JP2016163789A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably performing a specific operation for an inspection or the like.SOLUTION: A main control device 63 is provided with a board box 102 that internally stores a main control board, and the board box 102 is formed by combining a front constituent 111 with a rear constituent 112. A sticking base is formed by mutually superposing a front fixing base part formed at the front constituent 111 and a rear fixing base part formed at the rear constituent 112, and a seal is stuck to the sticking base. A cover member 191 having a destruction member mounted thereon is attached to the sticking base. When the destruction member is moved in a release direction, the seal is pressed while an escape is suppressed by the sticking base.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, for example, fraud countermeasures such as pasting a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box and leave a trace when peeled off. Is adopted (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This fraud countermeasure assists the confirmation work when confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the fact that the control board has been replaced. There is.

JP 2003-180917 A

  Here, in the game arcade, the control board may be inspected by an external engine or the like, and it may be necessary to open the board box for the inspection. In this case, in the situation where the seal seal is pasted so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies, since the opening of the substrate box is hindered by the seal seal, it is necessary to peel off the seal seal when opening the substrate box, The work becomes complicated.

  It should be noted that the above-described problem is in a gaming machine equipped with a trace means that inhibits a specific operation such as an opening operation of the board box and leaves a trace that the specific operation has been performed when the inhibition state is released. This is a common issue.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and inhibits a specific operation, and when the inhibition state is released, a trace unit that leaves a trace that the specific operation has been performed. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing the specific operation when the specific operation is performed for inspection or the like.

The present invention
A substrate box formed by combining a plurality of structural bodies and containing a control substrate;
Trace means provided in the substrate box;
Cover means provided to face at least part of the trace means and cover the trace means;
A dividing means disposed inside the cover means and interlocking with the removal of the cover means,
When the cover means is moved in the removal direction, the dividing means moves with the movement of the cover means, and the trace means is divided into a plurality of parts until the cover means is removed. A gaming machine capable of opening an internal space,
A first engagement portion provided in the dividing means;
A second engagement portion provided on the cover means and engaged with a first engagement portion of the dividing means;
A third engagement portion provided inside the cover means and engaged with the substrate box;
With
An engagement portion between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is covered with the cover means.

  According to the present invention, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

The perspective view seen from the front which shows the structure of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a game machine main body. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. The perspective view which shows the structure of a main controller. The partial exploded perspective view which looked at the main controller from the surface side. The partial exploded perspective view which looked at the main controller from the back side. (A) The front view which shows a fixed area | region periphery in a main controller, (b) The partial rear view which shows a fixed area | region periphery in a main controller. The disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the part in which the sealing seal | sticker was provided in the main controller. The expansion perspective view which expands and shows the area | region where the seal seal was affixed in the main controller, and its periphery. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a seal seal, (b) The back view which shows the structure of a seal seal. Sectional drawing which shows the structure of a seal seal. (A) The side view which expands and shows the sticking base and its periphery, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the seal seal | sticker in a sticking area | region. (A), (b) The perspective view at the time of seeing a cover member from a different angle, (c), (d) The exploded perspective view at the time of seeing the member for destruction from a different angle. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box, (b) The enlarged view of the area | region C. FIG. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box, Comprising: Sectional drawing at the time of seeing a sticking base from a table | surface. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box, Comprising: The cross-sectional view of a sticking base. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Schematic of a game hall where many pachinko machines are installed. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the engagement structure of the member for destruction, and a cover member. (A) Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a cover member, (b) The cross-sectional view of the sticking base for demonstrating the modification of a cover member. The disassembled perspective view which looked at the main controller from the surface side in 2nd Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the part in which the sealing seal | sticker was provided in the main controller. (A) The back view of the member for destruction, (b) The perspective view of the member for destruction seen from the back surface side. The expansion perspective view which expands and shows the area | region where the seal seal was affixed in the main controller, and its periphery. (A) The side view which expands and shows the sticking base and its periphery, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the seal seal | sticker in a sticking area | region. (A) The perspective view of a cover member, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the member for destruction, (b) AA sectional view taken on the line. (A) The perspective view of the member for destruction in 3rd Embodiment, (b), (c) The perspective view of the cover member in 3rd Embodiment seen from a respectively different direction. The disassembled perspective view which expands and shows a sticking base and its periphery in a main controller. (A) The perspective view which shows a cover member and its periphery in a main controller, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. (A) The perspective view of the member for destruction in 4th Embodiment, (b) The perspective view of the cover member in 4th Embodiment, (c) The exploded perspective view of the cover member in 4th Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which expands and shows a sticking base and its periphery in a main controller. (A) The perspective view which shows a cover member and its periphery in a main controller, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the member for destruction in 5th Embodiment. (A), (b) The perspective view of the cover member in 5th Embodiment seen from a different direction, respectively. (A) The exploded perspective view which shows the sticking base and its periphery in the main controller, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. The disassembled perspective view which shows the sticking base of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, and its periphery. The disassembled perspective view which shows the sticking base and the member for destruction. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the member for destruction is attached to the sticking base, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating rotation of the member for destruction. (A) The perspective view which shows the cover member of a main control apparatus, and its periphery, (b) The side view of the board | substrate box to which the cover member was attached. The disassembled perspective view which shows a sticking base and a cover member. (A), (b) The perspective view of the cover member seen from each different direction. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating 1st engagement. (A) The front view which shows a cover member and its periphery, (b) BB sectional drawing. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. The partial exploded perspective view which looked at the main controller from the surface side in a 7th embodiment. The partial exploded perspective view which looked at the main controller from the back side. The disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the part in which the sealing seal | sticker was provided in the main controller. (A) The perspective view of the member for destruction seen from the surface side, (b) The perspective view of the member for destruction seen from the back surface side, (c) The back view of the member for destruction seen from the back surface side. The expansion perspective view which expands and shows the area | region where the seal seal was affixed in the main controller, and its periphery. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the attachment aspect of the member for destruction with respect to the board part for front side sticking. (A) The side view which expands and shows the sticking base and its periphery, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the seal seal | sticker in a sticking area | region. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the member for destruction and a seal seal. (A) The perspective view of a cover member, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. The cross-sectional view of the sticking base for demonstrating the attachment aspect of a cover member. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a seal seal is cut | disconnected. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the member for destruction. Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of an expansion area | region. Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of an expansion part.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine main body 12 constituting the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be pivotable forward (openable and closable). . In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 can also be formed of a metal such as synthetic resin or aluminum.

  A gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported on one side of the outer frame 11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper support bracket 21 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and the lower frame portion and the left frame in the outer frame 11 are further fixed. A lower support metal fitting 22 is provided at a connection portion with the portion. The upper support bracket 21 and the lower support bracket 22 constitute a support mechanism, and the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by the support mechanism.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 23 at its rotating tip, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main body 12 is locked. The saddle member 24 of the device 23 is received by the saddle receiving portion provided on the inner side surface of the right frame portion of the outer frame 11, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is prevented. On the other hand, the hook member 24 is received by the hook receiving portion of the outer frame 11 by performing the unlocking operation using the unlock key on the cylinder lock 25 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. The state is released and the gaming machine body 12 can be released from the outer frame 11. The locking device 23 also has a function of locking an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 described later.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable and closable) with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side as the rotation front end side (opening / closing front end side) in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable), and in the front view, the left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is a rotation front end side (opening / closing front end). Side) and can be rotated forward. Further, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable), and in the front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation front end side ( It can be rotated backward as the opening / closing tip side.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 31 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 32 is formed at the center of the resin base 31. A game board 33 is detachably attached to the resin base 31. The game board 33 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 33 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 32 of the resin base 31.

  Here, the structure of the game board 33 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 33 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 34, a variable winning device 35, an operating port 36, a through gate 37, a variable display unit 38, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 34, the variable winning device 35 and the operation opening 36, it is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 39 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 33, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 39. The game board 33 is provided with a large number of nails 40 for distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  The variable display unit 38 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying symbols with a winning at the operation port 36 as a trigger. The variable display unit 38 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. A first specific lamp portion 43 and a second specific lamp portion 44 are provided on the center frame 42. Reservation lamp portions 45 and 46 are provided at the lower and upper portions of the center frame 42, respectively. The lower holding lamp unit 45 corresponds to the symbol display device 41 and the first specific lamp unit 43, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation port 36 is held up to four times, and the holding lamp unit 45 is turned on by The number of holds is displayed. The upper holding lamp unit 46 corresponds to the second specific lamp unit 44, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 37 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the holding lamp unit 46. It is like that.

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled up and down. When a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, a special gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot) occurs.

  In the first specific lamp unit 43 provided as a game result display unit (or a lottery result display unit), the emission color is switched in a predetermined order using a winning to the operation port 36 as a trigger, and a predetermined color is used. A jackpot is generated when the stop is displayed. Further, in the second specific lamp unit 44, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 37, and when the stop color is displayed in a predetermined color, the operation port 36 is displayed. The accompanying electric accessory is opened for a predetermined time. The control of the first specific lamp unit 43 and the second specific lamp unit 44 is performed by a main controller described later.

  The variable winning device 35 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which a game ball is easy to win in the case of a big win. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 35, the variable winning device 35 is repeated with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. What is opened is common. The drive control of the variable winning device 35 is performed by a main control device described later.

  An inner rail portion 47 and an outer rail portion 48 are attached to the game board 33, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 47 and the outer rail portion 48, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 50. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 50 is attached below the window hole 32 in the resin base 31, and the handle device 59 provided on the front door frame 14 is operated to launch the game ball. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1 and the like, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 55 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 55 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 56 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 56 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. Around the window 55, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. In addition, at the upper left and upper right positions, speaker units are provided for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 55 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 57 and a lower bulging portion 58 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 57a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 57, and a lower plate 58a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 58. The upper plate 57a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to a game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 58a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 57a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a main controller unit 61 and an audio lamp controller unit 65 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (game board 33). The main controller unit 61 includes a synthetic resin mount 62 and a main controller 63 mounted on the mount 62. The main controller unit 61 is mounted on the back of the game board 33 such that the mounting base 62 is sandwiched between the game board 33 and the main controller 63 and the main controller 63 faces the back of the pachinko machine 10. ing. A specific configuration of the main control device 63 will be described later.

  The sound lamp control device unit 65 includes a sound lamp control device 66 and a mounting base 67, and the sound lamp control device 66 is mounted on the mounting base 67. The voice lamp control device 66 includes a voice lamp control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 63 mounted on the main control device unit 61. The lamp control board is housed in a board box 68 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 71, and a payout mechanism 72 and a control device assembly unit 73 are attached to the back pack 71. The back pack 71 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and protrudes rearward so as to cover a part of the main control device unit 61, the sound lamp control device unit 65, and the like, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. A cover portion 75 is provided.

  The payout mechanism portion 72 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 75, and a tank 77 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 77. A payout device 78 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 78 are discharged to the upper plate 57a or the lower plate 58a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 78. The payout mechanism 72 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for performing a power ON / OFF operation is provided.

  The control device assembly unit 73 includes a payout control device 82 and a power source and launch control device 83. The payout control device 82 and the power supply / launch control device 83 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 82 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 82 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 78 is accommodated in a substrate box. The power supply and launch control device 83 is configured such that a power supply and launch control board is housed in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle device 59 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

  Next, the configuration of the main controller 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 is a perspective view of the main control device 63, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the main control device 63 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the main control device 63 viewed from the back side. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the main control device 63 includes a main control board 101 and a board box 102, and the main control board 101 is accommodated in the board box 102.

  The main control board 101 includes a CPU that performs main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and the like. In the present embodiment, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM are integrated into one chip on the CPU chip 103. Although not described in detail, an input / output driver IC chip 104 and a latching IC chip (not shown) are mounted. Further, various elements such as capacitors and resistors and a plurality of connectors are mounted on the main control board 101.

  In the main control board 101, various elements such as the CPU chip 103 and connectors are all mounted on the same plate surface and soldered on the opposite plate surface. That is, the main control board 101 has one plate surface as the element mounting surface 106 and the other plate surface as the solder surface 107. The solder surface 107 is a surface on which soldered portions of various elements mounted on the element mounting surface 106 are provided, but a circuit pattern may be formed on the solder surface 107. Further, both plate surfaces may be configured as element mounting surfaces.

  The board box 102 includes a front side structure (box cover) 111 and a back side structure (box base) 112 as a plurality of case bodies. The front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are made of a material having transparency so that the element mounting surface 106 and the solder surface 107 of the main control board 101 accommodated in the board box 102 can be seen from the outside of the board box 102. Is formed. Specifically, it is formed of a colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited thereto, and may be an acrylic resin or the like.

  By combining the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112, as shown in FIG. 5, the substrate box 102 is formed in a square box shape (substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape) and has a predetermined internal space.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the front side structure 111 is swelled to one side from the front side peripheral part 113 that defines the peripheral edge of the front side structure 111 and the front side peripheral part 113. The formed bulging part 114 is integrally formed. By the front side peripheral edge 113 and the bulging portion 114, the front side structure 111 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape opened to the opposite side of the bulging portion 114 from the bulging side. The front side structure 111 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Although a detailed description is omitted, an opening for exposing the connector provided on the main control board 101 to the outside of the board box 102 and an opening for heat dissipation are provided in the bulging part 114 of the front side structure 111. Is formed.

  The main control board 101 is screwed to the front side structure 111 from the back side (fixed in a removable state using a predetermined tool). Screw fixing of the main control board 101 to the front side structure 111 is performed from the solder surface 107 side of the main control board 101, and various elements mounted on the element mounting surface 106 of the main control board 101 are the main control board. It is accommodated in a region between 101 and the front side structure 111. Incidentally, an encircling wall portion extending toward the main control board 101 is formed on the back surface side of the bulging portion 114, and the CPU chip of the main control board 101 in the space between the front side structure 111 and the main control board 101. 103 is surrounded by a surrounding wall.

  A back side structure 112 is fixed to a front side structure 111 in which the main control board 101 is integrated. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the back-side structure 112 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a quadrangular shape, specifically a rectangular shape in front view, and a planar portion 116 formed in a planar shape, A back side peripheral edge 117 formed so as to surround the peripheral edge of the flat surface portion 116 is integrally formed.

  By fixing the back side structural body 112 from the back surface side to the front side structural body 111, the front side peripheral edge portion 113 of the front side structural body 111 and the back side peripheral edge portion 117 of the back side structural body 112 overlap, and the back surface of the bulging portion 114 The open part to the side is closed by the flat part 116 of the back side structure 112. In this case, the solder surface 107 of the main control board 101 is covered with the back side structure 112. That is, the element mounting surface 106 of the main control board 101 is entirely opposed to the front side structure 111, and the solder surface 107 of the main control board 101 is entirely opposed to the back side structure 112. The main controller 63 configured as described above is mounted on the mounting base 62 such that the back surface of the back-side structural body 112 faces the mounting base 62 side.

  Next, the structure which concerns on fixation with the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 is demonstrated in detail. As a configuration related to the fixation of the two structural members 111 and 112, a restricting unit that restricts the mutual positional deviation between the two structural members 111 and 112 only in a specific regulation direction, and a positional deviation in the regulation direction are prevented. Fixing means for fixing the two structural members 111 and 112 to each other.

  First, the regulating means will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a hook portion 118 is integrally formed with the front side structure 111 as a restricting means. A plurality of hook portions 118 are provided, and these hook portions 118 extend along the extending direction of the long side portions (specifically, the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion) of the front side peripheral edge portion 113 facing each other. Are formed at regular intervals. In this case, six hook portions 118 are formed on the upper and lower sides, respectively, but the number thereof is arbitrary as long as it is plural. The hook portions 118 are all formed to have the same shape, and are all formed to the same size. Each hook portion 118 is provided so as to stand up toward the back side structural body 112, and is formed by being bent at an intermediate position so that the free end side extends toward one short side of the front side structural body 111.

  A slit 119 is formed on each of the upper and lower long side portions of the back side structure 112 so as to correspond to the hook portion 118 and to correspond to each hook portion 118 on a one-to-one basis. The slit 119 penetrates in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102, that is, in the parallel arrangement direction of the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112, and the corresponding hook part 118 can be inserted therein. A receiving portion 119a for locking the tip of the hook portion 118 is formed in the slit 119 as shown in FIG.

  By providing the restricting means having the hook portion 118 and the receiving portion 119a as described above, when the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are integrated, the corresponding hook portion in each slit 119 is provided. The front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined so that 118 is inserted. At this stage, the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are displaced from each other in the length direction of the substrate box 102 (that is, the direction in which the long side portion extends). Thereafter, one of the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 is slid in the length direction with respect to the other so that the hook part 118 is locked to the corresponding receiving part 119a. Thereby, each hook part 118 is latched by the corresponding receiving part 119a, and the front side structure body 111 and the back side structure body 112 are separated in the thickness direction and width direction (namely, the direction where a short side part is extended) of the board | substrate box 102. Any attempt to do so will be regulated.

  The configuration of the restricting means is not limited to the above, and a guide protrusion is formed on one of the front peripheral edge 113 and the back peripheral edge 117, and the guide protrusion is on the other. It is good also as a structure which forms the groove part for guides which can be slidably moved to the predetermined | prescribed direction so that the ridge part for guide | inserts which can be fitted is possible.

  Next, the fixing means will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the substrate box 102 is provided with at least a first fixing region 120 and a second fixing region 130 as fixing means. One of the first fixed region 120 and the second fixed region 130 is provided with respect to one side portion of the substrate box 102, and the other is with respect to the side portion facing the one side portion. Is provided. Specifically, the first fixed region 120 is provided on one end side of both ends in the direction restricted by the restricting means, and the second fixed region 130 is both ends in the direction restricted by the restricting means. Is provided on the other end side. More specifically, the first fixed region 120 is provided on one short side. In addition, the second fixed region 130 is provided on the other short side.

  The first fixed region 120 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a partial front view of the substrate box 102 showing the periphery of the first fixed region 120, and FIG. 8B is a partial rear view of the substrate box 102 showing the periphery of the first fixed region 120. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8, the first fixing region 120 includes a front-side fixing region 121 formed integrally with the front-side structure 111 and a back-side fixing region 122 formed integrally with the back-side structure 112. ing. The front-side fixing region 121 and the back-side fixing region 122 are formed so as to extend to the side of one short side portion of each component 111, 112 more than the other part of the short side portion. It overlaps in the thickness direction.

  A plurality of (specifically, four) front side coupling portions 123 are arranged in parallel along the short side portion in the front side fixing region 121, and one in each of the front side coupling portions 123 in the back side fixing region 122. The back side coupling portions 124 are arranged side by side so as to correspond to each other. Since the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 of each combination have the same configuration, the configuration of one combination will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a through-hole 125 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102 is formed in the front side coupling portion 123, and the back side coupling portion 124 has a through hole 125 as shown in FIG. 8B. In addition, a bottomed screw hole 126 opened toward the front side coupling portion 123 is formed. The through hole 125 and the screw hole 126 are communicated with each other, and a break screw is screwed into the communicated hole portion from the through hole 125 side.

  Here, the breaking screw is a screw whose strength is set low at the connection between the head where the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver can be inserted and the side where the screw groove is formed, and can be tightened further. When a predetermined force is further applied to the head by the tool at a position where it cannot be performed, the connecting portion is cut and the head is separated. That is, the broken screw cannot be rotated in the loosening direction using the tool after screwing.

  Note that if it is possible to prevent loosening of the connection between the front-side coupling portion 123 and the back-side coupling portion 124 after screwing, the fixture (coupling device) that couples both the coupling portions 123 and 124 is broken. It is not limited to a screw and may be a well-known one-way screw. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the screws are coupled to each other, and a locking portion is provided on the back side coupling portion 124, and a locking claw inserted from the front side coupling portion 123 side is engaged with the locking portion. It is good also as a structure which is stopped and cannot cancel | release the said latching state, without requiring destruction of the front side coupling | bond part 123 and the back side coupling | bond part 124. FIG.

  A plurality of combinations of the front side coupling portion 123 and the back side coupling portion 124 are provided as described above, and some of the combinations are coupled by a break screw. The head of the breaking screw is removed. Thus, the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 are coupled to each other, so that the front side structural body 111 and the back side structural body 112 are fixed to each other in an inseparable state.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b), each back side coupling portion 124 is connected to the back side peripheral edge portion 117 via a connecting portion 127, and a cutting tool such as a nipper or a cutter is provided around the connecting portion 127. A space where the tip can be inserted is secured. Thereby, the connection part 127 can be cut. In particular, the connecting portion 127 is set so that its strength is easier to cut than when the front-side coupling portion 123 and the back-side coupling portion 124 are broken and the coupling via the breaking screw is released. Specifically, it is thinner than the surrounding area. Thereby, it becomes easy to cut | disconnect the connection part 127. FIG.

  By cutting the connecting portion 127, the back side coupling portion 124 is separated from the back side peripheral edge portion 117. In this case, the position where the front side coupling portion 123 and the back side coupling portion 124 are provided is one side portion of the substrate box 102, and the front side structure 111 or the back side configuration is configured to release the state regulated by the regulating means. When one side of the body 112 is slid relative to the other, the coupling trace piece between the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 is in a position where it does not contact the main body in which the main control board 101 is accommodated. . Thereby, the state where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are fixed through the connection of the front side connection part 123 and the back side connection part 124 can be released.

  In addition, even if the relative position between the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 is returned to the original position, the cut portion of the connecting portion 127 remains. Therefore, for a game hall manager or the like, by confirming whether or not the connecting portion 127 is disconnected, the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 through the coupling of the front side coupling portion 123 and the back side coupling portion 124 It is possible to visually confirm whether or not the fixing of is released.

  By the way, in a configuration in which a combination of a plurality of front side coupling parts 123 and back side coupling parts 124 is coupled to each other by a break screw, a game hall manager or the like inspects and maintains the main control board 101. At this time, after releasing the fixation associated with the connection, it is possible to perform the fixation again by screwing the breaking screw into the unused combination.

  The connecting portion 127 may be provided not on the back side connecting portion 124 but on the front side connecting portion 123, or may be provided on both the connecting portions 123 and 124. Further, the connecting portion 127 may be omitted, and the front side connecting portion 123 itself or the back side connecting portion 124 itself may be required to be broken in order to release the fixing related to the connection. In this case, although the workability when the game hall manager or the like properly opens the board box 102 is reduced, the function of fixing the board box 102 and the improper opening are still visible. The function to leave as an effect is fulfilled.

  Next, the second fixed region 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 in addition to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the configuration of another fixing means, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing the pasting base 135 and its periphery in an enlarged manner.

  In the second fixed region 130, a first combined body 131 and a second combined body 132 are provided. The first combined body 131 is disposed on one end side of the short side portion of the substrate box 102, while the second combined body 132 is disposed on the other end side, and both face each other. Since the structures of the combined bodies 131 and 132 are the same, only the first combined body 131 will be described. In the description of the first combined body 131, the second combined body 132 is described by replacing “131” in the reference numeral with “132”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the first combined body 131 includes a front side coupling portion 131 a formed by extending from the short side portion of the front side structural body 111 to the side, and a lateral side from the short side portion of the back side structural body 112. And a back-side coupling portion 131b formed to extend. A through hole (not shown) penetrating in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102 is formed in the front side coupling portion 131a, and a screw hole 131c opened toward the front side coupling portion 131a is formed in the back side coupling portion 131b. ing. The through hole and the screw hole 131c are communicated with each other, and the front side structure body 111 and the back side structure body 112 are fixed by screwing a break screw from the through hole side to these communicating hole portions.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 7, the back side coupling | bond part 131b is connected with the back side peripheral part 117 through the connection part 131d. Since the operation and effect of the connecting portion 131d are the same as those of the connecting portion 127, description thereof is omitted.

  The second fixing region 130 is further provided with a fixing means different from the combined bodies 131 and 132 at a position sandwiched between the combined bodies 131 and 132. The fixing means will be described.

  In the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112, on the short side opposite to the side where the front side fixing area 121 and the back side fixing area 122 are provided, as shown in FIG. 9, the front side fixing base part 133 and the back side A fixed base portion 134 is provided. The front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134 are disposed between the coupling bodies 131 and 132 on one short side portion of each component 111 and 112, and are located on the side of a part of the short side portion. It is formed to extend in the direction.

  The projecting position of the front side fixed base part 133 to the side and the projecting position of the back side fixed base part 134 are the same or substantially the same, and the dimensions in the direction along the short side part are both fixed base parts 133, 134. Are the same or substantially the same. In a state where the front-side structure 111 and the back-side structure 112 are combined, the front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134 are juxtaposed in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102, and the front-side fixed base portion 133 has the back-side fixed base portion 134. The entire peripheral portion on the surface side facing the surface and the entire peripheral portion on the surface side facing the front-side fixed base portion 133 in the back-side fixed base portion 134 are in contact with each other. A bonding base 135 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape is formed by overlapping the front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134 (see FIG. 9). A pasting region 136 for pasting a seal seal is formed on the surface of the pasting base 135.

  The pasting region 136 includes a front surface region 137 configured by the front side fixed base portion 133, a back surface region 138 (see FIG. 7) configured by the back side fixed base portion 134, the front side fixed base portion 133, and the back side fixed base portion 134. And a side surface region 139 that is continuous with both the front surface region 137 and the back surface region 138 through the corner portion and is interposed between the front surface region 137 and the back surface region 138. These front surface region 137, back surface region 138, and side surface region 139 are formed in a planar shape.

  Since the side surface region 139 is constituted by both the front side fixed base portion 133 and the back side fixed base portion 134 as described above, the side surface region 139 has a boundary 140 between the two fixed base portions 133 and 134. Here, a configuration in which the boundary 140 is generated will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the front-side fixed base portion 133 includes a front-side sticking plate portion 141 that constitutes a part of the surface region 137 and the side surface region 139 and sandwiches the front-side sticking plate portion 141 therebetween. A pair of front-side opposing plate portions 142 and 143 are provided.

  On the other hand, the back-side fixed base portion 134 includes a back-side pasting plate portion 144 that constitutes the back-side region 138, and the front-side pasting plate portion 141 from the opposite side of the back-side pasting plate portion 144 in the back-side pasting plate portion 144. A pedestal portion 145 protruding toward the side is provided. The pedestal portion 145 is formed between a pair of back side opposing plate portions 146 and 147 formed so as to sandwich the back side sticking plate portion 144 therebetween. The end surface on the protruding side of the pedestal portion 145 is close to the surface opposite to the surface region 137 side in the front-side sticking plate portion 141. However, they are not in contact with each other, and a predetermined gap is formed.

  The side surface outside the substrate box 102 in the pedestal portion 145 is located on the same surface with the predetermined gap interposed therebetween with respect to the end surface on the protruding side of the front side sticking plate portion 141, and the side surface region is defined by these side surfaces and end surfaces. 139 is formed. Further, a predetermined space is formed between the pedestal portion 145 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141 by the predetermined gap, and the space includes the pedestal portion 145 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141 on the side surface region 139. And is opened to the side by a boundary 140. The boundary 140 is formed along the direction in which the opposing plate portions 142, 143, 146, and 147 face each other.

  That is, in a situation where the two structural members 111 and 112 are combined and the relative positions of the two structural members 111 and 112 are arranged at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 9, the base portion 145 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and A sticking base 135 is formed in a state where the space between the two is opened through the boundary 140 of the side surface region 139.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the pedestal portion 145 has a plurality of screw holes 151 opened toward the front-side sticking plate portion 141, and each screw hole is formed in the front-side sticking plate portion 141. A through-hole 152 for opening 151 to the outside of the front-side sticking plate portion 141 is formed. The through holes 152 are arranged so as to be on the same axis with respect to the corresponding screw holes 151. Then, screws 153 as fixing members that can be attached and detached using a predetermined tool such as a screwdriver are screwed into the screw holes 151 from the front-side sticking plate portion 141 side, whereby both fixing base portions are fixed. 133 and 134 are fixed. The sliding movement of both constituent members 111 and 112 is restricted by the screw fixing.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a sealing seal 160 having an IC tag 163 is affixed to the affixing base 135 that has been screw-fixed as described above.

  Here, the seal seal 160 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11A is a front view of the seal seal 160, FIG. 11B is a back view of the seal seal 160, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the seal seal 160.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the seal seal 160 includes a substantially rectangular base sheet 161, and an adhesive is applied to the back surface of the base sheet 161 to form an adhesive layer 162. An IC tag 163 as an electronic tag (or RFID tag) is embedded in the adhesive layer 162. In FIG. 12, the release sheet 164 is laminated on the adhesive layer 162, but the release sheet 164 is peeled off when the seal seal 160 is attached to the substrate box 102.

  The base sheet 161 is formed of a flexible resin film such as a polyester film, has moderate brittleness, and is reactive to solvents and heat. Specifically, when toluene or the like that is soluble in the pressure-sensitive adhesive constituting the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 162 is applied to the base sheet 161, the base sheet 161 changes color. Further, the base sheet 161 also changes color when heat equal to or higher than the temperature at which the adhesive strength of the adhesive layer 162 decreases (for example, 50 ° C.). As a result, when the solvent is applied or heat is applied to illegally peel off the seal seal 160 from the pasting area 136 of the substrate box 102, the base sheet 161 is discolored to leave a trace of the fraud. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, an ink application unit 165, an identification number unit 166, and a model information unit 167 are provided on the surface of the base sheet 161. The ink application unit 165 is applied with special ink that shows a pattern when irradiated with light of a specific wavelength such as ultraviolet rays. A plurality of numbers are described in the identification number portion 166, and the numbers described in the identification number portion 166 are different for each pachinko machine. In the model information section 167, the model name of the gaming machine, the manufacturer name of the gaming machine, and the like are described.

  The adhesive of the adhesive layer 162 has an adhesive force that can be removed from the base sheet 161 when it is peeled off after being applied once, as in the case of a conventional seal. Therefore, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off, it cannot be applied again, and a part of the adhesive layer 162 remains on the application region side. Therefore, the trace which peeled off the seal | sticker seal | sticker 160 illegally can be left.

  The IC tag 163 includes an IC chip 171 and an antenna member 172. The IC chip 171 is formed as an integrated circuit and has a control unit and a memory area. The memory area is configured by a non-volatile memory (ROM) in which data cannot be rewritten, and its storage capacity is, for example, 128 bits. ID information as identification information is stored in the memory area. Specifically, a manufacturer name (or a manufacturer unique number assigned to each manufacturer) and an ID number unique to the gaming machine are stored. Since the memory area of the IC chip 171 is not rewritable, inconveniences such as unauthorized alteration of ID information can be suppressed.

  The antenna member 172 has a planar rectangular shape and is relatively thin (for example, 10 to 200 μm) long, and is formed as a conductive foil of a metal such as aluminum or copper. An IC chip 171 is disposed substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction (or length direction) of the antenna member 172. The IC chip 171 is arranged by fixing an electrode (not shown) of the IC chip 171 to the antenna member 172 with an adhesive such as an anisotropic conductive film or conductive paste.

  A slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 at a position where the IC chip 171 is disposed so as to penetrate from the front surface to the back surface of the antenna member 172. The slit 173 extends from the IC chip 171 in the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 and from the IC chip 171 in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction, specifically in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. The second slit portion 175 reaches the end of the antenna member 172, and is formed in an L shape as a whole. The slit 173 functions as an inductor that constitutes a matching circuit that is coupled to a capacitive element formed inside the IC chip 171 and matches the impedance between the IC chip 171 and the antenna member 172. In this regard, the slit 173 can be referred to as a notch for matching. Further, in view of a configuration in which normal communication is not possible in the IC tag 163 if the slit 173 does not function properly, a communication matching unit or a disabled state generating unit. It can be called.

  The antenna member 172 functions as a resonance adjustment circuit, and the length of the antenna member 172 has an important influence on the communication characteristics. The optimal length of the antenna member 172 varies depending on the operating conditions. However, when the periphery of the antenna member 172 is air, the optimum value is about half the wavelength of the operating frequency, and the periphery is covered with a dielectric. In this case, it is known that the optimum length dimension is shorter than this because there is a wavelength shortening effect by the dielectric. The length of the antenna member 172 in the pachinko machine 10 is set to a size of about 50 mm so that the operating frequency is a constant frequency.

  The ID information of the IC chip 171 is configured to be called by the control unit and be transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna member 172. The radio wave transmitted from the antenna member 172 is received by the reader device and the ID information is received. Can be read.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the IC tag 163 (antenna member 172) is disposed obliquely from one corner side to the diagonal corner side of the base sheet 161. In this case, the long antenna member 172 intersects with all the side directions of the base sheet 161 in the longitudinal direction.

  An antenna notch 176 is formed in the seal seal 160. The antenna cut 176 penetrates from the surface of the base sheet 161 to the surface of the adhesive layer 162. Note that the surface of the adhesive layer 162 is a surface exposed on the back surface side of the seal seal 160, and it can be said that the antenna cut 176 penetrates from the surface to the back surface of the seal seal 160.

  The antenna cut 176 has a linear shape extending in a direction orthogonal to or substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172. Incidentally, the direction orthogonal or substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 is a direction that intersects all the side directions of the base sheet 161.

  The antenna cuts 176 are formed so as to sandwich the antenna member 172 in the short direction of the antenna member 172, and a plurality of antenna cuts 176 are formed at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction on each long side portion side. Yes. Each of the antenna cuts 176 has a configuration in which the region where the antenna member 172 is not disposed in the base sheet 161 is one end and the other end is slightly over the region where the antenna member 172 is disposed. In this case, the antenna cut 176 on one long side is formed so as not to line up in the short direction with respect to the antenna cut 176 on the other long side.

  A part of the plurality of antenna cuts 176 is provided adjacent to the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172. In this case, a part of the antenna cuts 176 on the one long side is provided adjacent to the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172, and one on the other long side. The antenna notch 176 is also provided adjacent to the area where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172. That is, the antenna cut 176 is formed so as to sandwich at least the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172.

  Corner cuts 177 penetrating from the surface side of the base sheet 161 to the surface of the adhesive layer 162 are formed at the four corners of the seal seal 160, respectively. The corner-side cut 177 is formed in an L shape so as to follow the corner angle of the seal seal 160. A large number of outer edge notches 178 are formed on the outer edge of the seal seal 160 from the outer edge end portion toward the inner side. These outer edge notches 178 are formed in an acute V shape so as to open from the inside toward the outside, and are formed at equal intervals along the outer periphery of the seal seal 160.

  Since the antenna cut 176, the corner cut 177, and the outer cut 178 are formed as described above, the base sheet 161 may be broken or the antenna member 172 may be peeled off when the seal seal 160 is peeled off from the application region 136. Is disconnected.

  Specifically, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off from the sticking region 136, stress due to the peeling force concentrates on the corner-side cut 177 and the outer edge cut 178 of the seal seal 160, so that the seal seal 160 is broken. Thereby, when the seal seal 160 after being peeled is reapplied, the manager can grasp the fact of the unauthorized opening by visually confirming the destruction.

  Further, the stress associated with the peeling force concentrates on the end of the antenna cut 176, whereby the base sheet 161 is broken through the antenna cut 176, and the antenna member 172 is cut accordingly. In this case, since the length dimension of the antenna member 172 is reduced, the communicable distance is shortened. Thus, the administrator can grasp the fact of the unauthorized opening by confirming that communication using the reader device is difficult or cannot be performed.

  Further, the antenna cut 176 is formed so as to sandwich at least the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172, and the antenna cut is formed on both the front surface region 137 side and the back surface region 138 side with the boundary 140 as a reference. 176 is arranged. Therefore, when the boundary 140 is completely exposed, it is expected that the antenna member 172 is cut or broken at a position where the slit 173 is formed. If it does so, impedance matching will not be performed favorably, but it will become difficult to communicate, or communication will become impossible. In this case, the administrator can grasp the fact of unauthorized opening by confirming that communication using the reader device is difficult or cannot be performed.

  The antenna notch 176 is formed on one long side of the antenna member 172 and on the other long side, so that the antenna notch 176 is removed when the seal seal 160 is peeled off. The slit region is easily broken or cut through.

  In addition, each antenna cut 176 is formed so that the region where the antenna member 172 is not disposed in the base sheet 161 is one end and the other end is slightly over the region where the antenna member 172 is disposed. As a result, when the seal seal 160 is broken through the antenna cut 176, the broken area easily reaches the slit region in the seal seal 160, so that the slit region through the antenna cut 176 is easily broken or cut. .

  Further, the antenna cut 176 is formed in the base sheet 161 and is not formed in the antenna member 172. Further, the antenna notch 176 formed on one long side of the antenna member 172 and the antenna notch 176 formed on the other long side are formed so as not to line up in the width direction of the antenna member 172. ing. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the slit region is easily broken or cut through the antenna cut 176, the slit region may be broken or cut by mistake when the seal seal 160 is properly attached to the sticking region 136. Is reduced.

  Next, a configuration related to the sticking position of the seal seal 160 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 in addition to FIG. FIG. 13A is a side view showing the sticking base 135 and the periphery thereof, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory view for explaining the positional relationship of the seal seal 160 in the sticking region 136. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 13B, the corner side cut 177 and the outer edge cut 178 are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 13B, the seal seal 160 is attached to the application region 136. In this case, the sealing seal 160 is bent and attached in a U shape so that the sealing seal 160 is disposed across the front surface region 137, the side surface region 139, and the back surface region 138 in the pasting region 136. The seal seal 160 covers substantially the entire front surface region 137, substantially the entire side surface region 139, and substantially the entire back surface region 138. Therefore, the opening of each through hole 152 formed in the front surface region 137 and the opening of each screw hole 151 formed in the back surface region 138 are covered with the seal seal 160, and the front side fixing in the side surface region 139 is performed. A boundary 140 between the base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134 is also almost entirely covered with a seal seal 160. That is, the seal seal 160 is affixed across the boundary 140 between the front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134. Thereby, the opening operation of the substrate box 102 is obstructed by the seal seal 160. Therefore, it is difficult to open the substrate box 102 without cutting the portion pasted over the boundary 140 in the seal seal 160 or removing the seal seal 160.

  As already described, the antenna member 172 in the seal seal 160 is disposed from one corner side to the diagonal corner side in the base sheet 161, and therefore, similarly to the seal seal 160, the antenna member 172 is arranged. Is also arranged in a U-shape over the front surface region 137, the side surface region 139, and the back surface region 138. In this case, the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the boundary 140 and extends in the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 in the impedance matching slit 173 in the antenna member 172 as shown in FIG. The first slit portion 174 straddles the boundary 140. As a result, when the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 140, the region where the first slit portion 174 is formed in the antenna member 172 is cut, and normal communication cannot be performed in the IC tag 163.

  The positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the through hole 152 will be described.

  One end of the antenna member 172 in the longitudinal direction straddles the opening of one through-hole 152 in the surface region 137 as shown in FIGS. 10 and 13B. Specifically, the dimension of the antenna member 172 in the short direction is smaller than the diameter of the opening of the through hole 152, and the antenna member 172 sandwiches the opening of the through hole 152 with the peripheral edge of the opening. It is arranged so as to cross over. By arranging the antenna member 172 in this way, the end portion of the antenna member 172 is opposed to the end portion of the screw 153 opposite to the screw groove side. However, since the end of the screw 153 opposite to the screw groove side is disposed at an intermediate position in the axial direction of the through hole 152, the screw 153 and the antenna member 172 are not in contact with each other.

  In the antenna member 172, the end on the side opposite to the end across the opening extends over the opening of one screw hole 151 in the back surface region 138. In this case, the screw 153 and the antenna member 172 are not in contact with each other because the end portion on the screw groove side of the screw 153 is disposed in the middle of the screw hole 151 in the axial direction.

  For example, when the antenna member 172 contacts the screw 153, the set operating frequency (for example, 2.45 GHz) changes, and communication through the antenna member 172 may not be performed satisfactorily. Then, there is a possibility that the ID information stored in the IC chip 171 may not be read even if it is read by the reader device. However, since the antenna member 172 and the screw 153 are not in contact as described above, Occurrence is suppressed.

  Here, a surrounding portion 180 is formed on the pasting base 135 so as to partition the pasting region 136.

  6 and FIG. 10, in detail, the surrounding portion 180 includes a portion that is continuous with the front-side fixed base portion 133 in the front-side peripheral portion 113 of the front-side structure 111 and a surface region 137 of the front-side fixed base portion 133. A front side stepped portion 180a is formed between them. Further, as shown in FIG. 7, a back-side stepped portion 180 b is formed between a portion of the back-side peripheral portion 117 of the back-side structure 112 that is continuous with the back-side fixed base portion 134 and a back surface region 138 of the back-side fixed base portion 134. Has been. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the front-side fixed base portion 133 is formed with a pair of front-side protrusions 180 c that are opposed to each other with the surface region 137 and the side surface region 139 interposed therebetween. A pair of back-side protrusions 180d are formed so as to face each other with the side surface region 139 and the back surface region 138 interposed therebetween.

  A surrounding part 180 is formed by the front side step part 180 a, the back side step part 180 b, the front side protrusion part 180 c and the back side protrusion part 180 d, and the pasting area 136 is surrounded by the surrounding part 180. The entire periphery of the seal seal 160 attached to the attachment region 136 is close to the enclosing portion 180. Thereby, even if it is going to peel off the seal | sticker seal | sticker 160, the peeling act becomes difficult.

  Since the seal seal 160 is close to the enclosing portion 180, the antenna member is attached so that the seal seal 160 does not protrude from the area surrounded by the enclosing portion 180 when the seal seal 160 is attached. The positional relationship between 172 and the screw hole 151 and the through-hole 152 and the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 140 are naturally as described above.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the area surrounded by the surrounding portion 180 is wider than the area of the seal seal 160. As a result, when the seal sticker 160 is pasted, a predetermined clearance is created at the pasting position, and the workability of the pasting work is improved. In this case, the clearance of the attachment position is determined by the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 140, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the through hole 152, and the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the screw hole 151. It is set within the range that is naturally maintained.

  The seal seal 160 affixed to the affixing region 136 is covered with a cover member 191 having a destruction member. The cover member 191 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15 in addition to FIGS. 9 and 10. 14A and 14B are perspective views when the cover member 191 is viewed from different angles, FIGS. 14C and 14D are perspective views when the breaking member is viewed from different angles, and FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member 191 is attached to the board | substrate box 102, FIG.15 (b) is the elements on larger scale which expand and show the area | region C in Fig.15 (a). In FIG. 10, the cover member 191 is cut away.

  The cover member 191 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 192 as shown in FIGS. 10 and 15A. A plurality of (specifically, five) wall portions that form a partition can transmit radio waves into and out of the cover member 191. As shown in FIG. 14A, the cover member 191 is formed with an opening 193 so that one of the six faces of the rectangular parallelepiped is not provided, and an internal space 192 is formed through the opening 193. The cover member 191 is open to the outside. Further, the opening 193 is formed so that the peripheral edge thereof enters the inside with respect to each of the pair of wall portions 194 and 195 facing each other with the opening 193 interposed therebetween. The distance between the wall portions 194 and 195 is set larger than the length dimension of the corresponding pasting base 135 so that a gap is formed between the wall portions 194 and 195 and the pasting base 135.

  The internal space 192 of the cover member 191 is formed to have a size that can accommodate the entire sticking base 135 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck. The opening 193 is formed in a size that allows the sticking base 135 to be inserted into the internal space 192 from the protruding tip side of the sticking base 135. The cover member 191 is attached to the sticking base 135 by moving so that the sticking base 135 is inserted into the internal space 192 through the opening 193. The moving direction is also referred to as a mounting direction.

  Specifically, claw portions 201 and 202 that are locked to the sticking base 135 are formed in the internal space 192 of the cover member 191. The claw portions 201 and 202 are wall portions on the movement source side when the cover member 191 is mounted on the sticking base 135, and are directed from the side wall portion 203 facing the side region 139 of the sticking base 135 toward the opening 193 side. And is integrally formed (see FIG. 10 or FIG. 15A), and its tip is a free end.

  Corresponding to the claw portions 201 and 202, as shown in FIG. 10, receiving portions 204 and 205 are integrally formed on the front side opposing plate portions 142 and 143 so as to protrude outwardly (for the receiving portion 205). (See FIG. 15 (a)). The receiving portions 204 and 205 are formed so as to extend along the mounting direction. The cover member 191 is attached to the substrate box 102 by engaging the claw portions 201 and 202 with the corresponding receiving portions 204 and 205 respectively.

  Specifically, tip hook portions are formed at the tips of the claw portions 201 and 202 so as to protrude toward the direction in which the claw portions 201 and 202 face each other. The distal hook portion is formed so that the amount of protrusion gradually increases from the distal end side toward the proximal end side, and includes inclined surfaces 201a and 202a that are inclined in the facing direction toward the proximal end side. When the cover member 191 is mounted on the pasting base 135, the relative positional relationship between the inclined surfaces 201a and 202a is set so that the inclined surfaces 201a and 202a abut against the corresponding receiving portions 204 and 205. Specifically, the distance between the tip hook portions of the claw portions 201 and 202 is set slightly shorter than the distance between the receiving portions 204 and 205.

  The claw portions 201 and 202 are formed at positions close to the inner peripheral surfaces of the pair of wall portions 194 and 195 that sandwich the pasting base 135 in the width direction in the wall portion of the cover member 191. , 195 is opposed to the inner wall surface. The wall portions 194 and 195 are formed such that the area of the inner peripheral surface thereof is larger than the surface of the claw portions 201 and 202 facing the wall portions 194 and 195, and the wall portions 194 and 195 are attached. The length dimension in the direction is set larger than the projecting dimension of the claw portions 201 and 202 from the side wall portion 203. Accordingly, the claw portions 201 and 202 are covered with the wall portions 194 and 195.

  The distance between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the wall portions 194 and 195 adjacent to each other is within a range that does not hinder the attachment of the cover member 191 to the attaching base 135, specifically, the cover member 191 is attached to the attaching base 135. Is set in a range that does not prevent elastic deformation of the claw portions 201 and 202 due to contact with the receiving portions 204 and 205.

  According to such a configuration, when the cover member 191 is moved, the receiving portions 204 and 205 abut the inclined surfaces 201a and 202a. In this case, the claw portions 201 and 202 are elastically deformed so as to escape outward along the inclined surfaces 201a and 202a. And the nail | claw part 201,202 will return to a natural state with a restoring force by reaching | attaining the front side of the mounting direction of the said receiving part 204,205 via the receiving part 204,205. As a result, as shown in FIG. 15A, the tip hook portions of the claw portions 201 and 202 abut against the end portions of the receiving portions 204 and 205 from the front side in the mounting direction, and in the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Even if the cover member 191 is to be moved, it is blocked by the contact. The cover member 191 is attached to the substrate box 102 by the engagement between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 15A, the tip hook portions of the claw portions 201 and 202 are located closer to the movement source than the opening 193 on the movement destination side of the cover member 191, and the cover member 191. The peripheral edge portion of the opening 193 is adjacent to the side surface of the main body portion that is continuous with the base end side of the pasting base 135 in the substrate box 102. As a result, the locking portions between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 are accommodated in the internal space 192 formed by the side surfaces of the cover member 191 and the substrate box 102, and the cover member is placed in the locking portions. Even when trying to access from outside 191, it is difficult to do so. Furthermore, although the shape of the cover member 191 is complicated by the configuration in which the locking portion is accommodated by the cover member 191, the substrate box 102 of the cover member 191 is compared to the configuration provided on the substrate box 102 side. It is not necessary to consider the alignment accuracy with respect to.

  The amount of insertion of the sticking base 135 into the internal space 192 of the cover member 191 is limited when one component is slid in the longitudinal direction from the initial position in order to separate the two components 111 and 112 from each other. The fixed base portions 133 and 134 are set so as to still enter the internal space 192 at the position. In this case, in order to separate the two structural members 111 and 112 and completely open the internal space of the substrate box 102, the two structural members 111 and 112 are separated in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102 after the sliding movement. There is a need. The amount of movement necessary for this separation is set to be larger than the dimension in the thickness direction of the opening 193 of the cover member 191. Therefore, in order to open the internal space of the substrate box 102, it is necessary to separate the cover member 191 from the sticking base 135.

  Since the cover member 191 surrounds substantially the entire sticking base 135, the seal seal 160 is entirely surrounded by the cover member 191. As a result, the seal seal 160 is protected by the cover member 191. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the shrink film is thermally shrunk to cover the pachinko machine 10, but in a configuration in which the main control device 63 is exposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the shrink film It is preferable to suppress the influence on the sealing seal 160 and the IC tag 163 such as a load in the shrinking direction and heat when the heat shrinks, and the influence is reduced by providing the cover member 191 as described above. be able to.

  Since the cover member 191 is colorless and transparent, the seal seal 160 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 191 in the configuration in which the cover member 191 is provided as described above. However, the cover member 191 is not limited to being colorless and transparent, and in order to allow the seal seal 160 to be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 191, the cover member 191 may be transparent enough to visually confirm the seal seal 160. What is necessary is just to be colored and transparent. Further, the seal seal 160 cannot be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 191, but the cover member 191 may be formed non-transparent. In this case, since the inside of the space surrounded by the cover member 191 cannot be confirmed from the outside, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to take measures against the cover member 191.

  Further, the cover member 191 is formed to be able to transmit radio waves, and no member for blocking radio waves is provided between the IC tag 163 of the seal seal 160 and the cover member 191. Therefore, the manager or the like of the game hall can perform the reading operation without removing the cover member 191 when reading the ID information from the IC tag 163.

  In this case, when the ID information is read from the IC tag 163, the game hall manager or the like can easily and reliably read the ID information by bringing the tip of the reader device into contact with or close to the cover member 191. be able to. That is, the cover member 191 functions as a positioning unit for reading ID information.

  Since the IC tag 163 is covered with the cover member 191, when a game hall manager or the like tries to bring the reader device closer to the IC tag 163, the IC tag 163 comes into contact with the cover member 191 and cannot be further approached. In other words, the reading position when the identification information is read by the reader device with respect to the IC tag 163 should not be closer than the predetermined distance (the distance between the cover member 191 and the IC tag 163) from the IC tag 163. Is limited to. Accordingly, if it is determined that the reading operation is performed in a state where the tip of the reader device is in contact with or close to the cover member 191, the antenna member 172 is cut to reduce the communicable distance of the IC tag 163. If this happens, the ID information cannot be read by the reader device. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the fact that the antenna member 172 has been cut, and it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an unauthorized opening operation of the board box 102 has been performed.

  Here, the depth dimension of the cover member 191 so that a gap is formed between the sticking base 135 and the side wall 203 in the situation where the peripheral edge of the opening 193 is close to the side of the substrate box 102, Specifically, the length dimension from the opening 193 to the side wall 203 is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the sticking base 135. Thus, a predetermined gap is formed between the sticking base 135 and the side wall 203 in a situation where the cover member 191 is attached to the substrate box 102. In the gap, a breaking member 210 for cutting the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 is provided.

  The breaking member 210 will be described. The breaking member 210 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 14C and 14D, the breaking member 210 is slightly larger than the distance between the front-side counter plate portions 142 and 143 (or the back-side counter plate portions 146 and 147). A rectangular plate-shaped fracture base portion 211 having a length dimension in the longitudinal direction and a cutting portion 212 provided upright from one plate surface of the fracture base portion 211 are integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 9, the length dimension of the fracture base portion 211 in the short direction is set to be larger than the width dimension of the boundary 140 (the length dimension of the pasting base 135 in the overlapping direction). It is set to be larger than the distance between the portion 142 and the back side counter plate portion 146. Further, the cutting portion 212 is formed along the longitudinal direction of the destruction base portion 211, and the length dimension thereof is the same as that of the destruction base portion 211, the front side opposing plate portions 142, 143 (or the back side opposing plate portion 146, 147) is set to be larger than the distance dimension.

  An operation member 213 is attached to a plate surface opposite to the plate surface on which the cutting portion 212 is provided in the breaking member 210. The operating member 213 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape as a whole, and is integrated with the breaking member 210 by being locked to the breaking base portion 211. In this case, the operation member 213 protrudes from the destruction base portion 211 toward the side opposite to the cutting portion 212.

  The breaking member 210 having the above-described configuration is attached to the cover member 191 by the cutting portion 212 engaging with the claw portions 201 and 202. Specifically, on the proximal end side of the claw portions 201 and 202, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 15A, engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 that engage with both ends of the cutting portion 212 are formed. ing. The engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 are formed so as to be inclined in a direction in which the claw portions 201 and 202 approach each other toward the distal end side. As a result, the claw portions 201 and 202 are more distal than the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 than the distance between the proximal end portions 223 and 224, which are portions closer to the proximal end than the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222. The distance between the parts is small. Specifically, the distance between the base end portions 223 and 224 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the length dimension of the cutting portion 212 in the longitudinal direction (the length dimension of the cutting portion 212 in the width direction). The distance between the distal end portions of the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 is set to be smaller than the length dimension of the cutting portion 212 in the longitudinal direction.

  Corresponding to the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222, inclined surfaces 212a and 212b are formed at both ends of the cutting portion 212, respectively. The inclined surfaces 212a and 212b are formed to have the same inclination as the corresponding engaging inclined portions 221 and 222. In the situation where the plate surface opposite to the plate surface on which the cutting portion 212 is provided in the fracture base portion 211 is in contact with the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 203, the inclined surfaces 221 to which the inclined surfaces 212a and 212b correspond correspond. , 222 are set so as to be in contact with each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 14B, the side wall 203 of the cover member 191 is provided with an operation member opening 231 corresponding to the protrusion of the operation member 213. The operation member opening 231 is formed to have a size that allows the operation member 213 to pass therethrough. Specifically, the operation member opening 231 is formed so that the peripheral edge of the operation member opening 231 is in contact with or close to the operation member 213. ing. The operation member 213 fits into the operation member opening 231 in a situation where the plate surface opposite to the plate surface on which the cutting portion 212 is provided in the destruction base portion 211 is in contact with the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 203. The relative positions of the two are set so as to be included.

  According to such a configuration, the breaking member 210 has a breaking member 210 with the side opposite to the side where the cutting portion 212 of the breaking base portion 211 is provided, that is, the side where the operation member 213 is provided as the insertion destination side. Is inserted between the base end portions 223 and 224 to be attached to the cover member 191. In this case, one end side of the breaking member 210, specifically, the side on which the inclined surface 212b is formed is disposed obliquely so as to contact the corresponding base end portion 224, and then the other end side (inclined surface 212a). The breaker member 210 is pushed in such a way that the side where the is formed is disposed at a position where it abuts against the corresponding base end 223.

  Here, since the length dimension of the destruction base part 211 is set larger than the distance between the tip hook parts in the claw parts 201 and 202, the other end side of the destruction base part 211 corresponds to the inclined surface 201a of the claw part 201. The claw portion 201 is elastically deformed outward (toward the wall portion 194). Thereby, it becomes possible to push in the site | part of the other end side.

  Further, when the operation member 213 is pushed in as described above, the operation member 213 is fitted into the operation member opening 231. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation member 213 is in contact with the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 203 and the breaking member 210 cannot be attached.

  Although illustration is omitted, an inclined surface that is inclined so that the operation member opening 231 gradually increases toward the inner side of the cover member 191 is provided at the peripheral edge of the operation member opening 231. . As a result, the operation member 213 is guided to the operation member opening 231 so that the operation member 213 does not easily get in the way when the destruction member 210 is attached.

  When the breaking member 210 is pushed in, the plate surface opposite to the cutting portion 212 of the breaking base portion 211 comes into contact with the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 203, and further movement is restricted. In this case, the part on the other end side of the breaking member 210 reaches the base end part 223 via the engaging inclined part 221, and the claw part 201 returns to the natural state by the restoring force. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 abut against the inclined surfaces 212a and 212b from the original side in the direction in which the breaking member 210 is pushed, and the pushing direction. The movement of the breaking member 210 in the opposite direction is restricted. Thereby, the mounting of the breaking member 210 to the cover member 191 is completed. Then, by attaching the cover member 191 on which the breaking member 210 is mounted to the substrate box 102, the breaking member 210 is disposed between the sticking base 135 and the side wall portion 203. The regulated position is set as the initial position of the breaking member 210. The breaking member 210 is accommodated in the internal space 192 at the initial position.

  That is, by attaching the cover member 191 to the substrate box 102 in a state where the breaking member 210 is previously accommodated in the internal space 192, the breaking member 210 is naturally arranged at the initial position. Thereby, when the cover member 191 is attached to the substrate box 102, it is not necessary to adjust the position of the breaking member 210 disposed in the internal space 192.

  Further, when the cover member 191 with the breaking member 210 attached is attached to the substrate box 102, the breaking member 210 is arranged at the initial position. Thereby, since it is not necessary to separately provide a structure for attaching the breaking member 210 to the substrate box 102 on the substrate box 102 side (the pasting base 135 side), the configuration on the substrate box 102 side can be simplified. it can.

  Further, the attachment structure for attaching the breaking member 210 to the cover member 191 is based on the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 obtained by bending part of the claw portions 201 and 202 used for attaching the cover member 191 to the board box 102. It is configured. As a result, the claw portions 201 and 202 are also used to attach the breaking member 210 to the cover member 191. Therefore, the claw portions 201 and 202 can be multi-functionalized, and the mounting structure is separately provided. The structure of the cover member 191 can be simplified as compared with the structure provided in the cover.

  Here, the operation member 213 protrudes outside the cover member 191 through the operation member opening 231, and is surrounded by a guide frame 241 provided at the peripheral edge of the operation member opening 231.

  The guide frame 241 is formed in a substantially C shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the wall surface of the side wall 203. The guide frame 241 protrudes outward from the side wall portion 203, and the protruding dimension is a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness dimension of the side wall portion 203 from the length dimension of the operation member 213 (protrusion dimension from the destruction base portion 211). Is set smaller than. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 15A, the operation member 213 is configured such that a part of the operation member 213 protrudes outside the guide frame 241 in the situation where the breaking member 210 is disposed at the initial position. Are fitted into the guide frame 241.

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation member 213 is moved in the direction along the wall surface of the side wall portion 203, the operation member 213 and the guide frame 241 come into contact with each other, and the movement is restricted. When the operation member 213 is pulled in a direction opposite to the direction in which the cover member 191 is attached, the destruction base portion 211 and the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 203 come into contact with each other, and the movement of the breaking member 210 is restricted. On the other hand, when the operation member 213 is pressed so that the operation member 213 enters the inside of the cover member 191, the inclined surfaces 212 a and 212 b abut against the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222. In this case, when the pressing force applied to the operation member 213 is larger than the elastic force of the engaging inclined portions 221, 222, the engaging inclined portions 221, 222 are elastically deformed toward the wall portions 194, 195, and the restriction Is released. As a result, the breaking member 210 advances toward the sealing seal 160 side while sliding between the outer wall surface of the operation member 213 and the corresponding inner wall surface of the guide frame 241. The traveling direction is also referred to as a release direction. With the elastic deformation of the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 toward the wall portions 194 and 195, the tip hook portion is elastically deformed toward the wall portions 194 and 195.

  Here, when the breaking member 210 moves in the releasing direction, the engagement between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is released. Specifically, when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the breaking base portion 211 is opposed to the surrounding portion 180 at the initial position of the breaking member 210 so that the breaking base portion 211 and the surrounding portion 180 come into contact with each other. doing. Then, in a situation where the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction and the breaking base portion 211 is in contact with the surrounding portion 180, the amount of displacement to the outside of the tip hook portion is the protruding dimension of the receiving portions 204, 205 (the tip hook portion The inclination angles of the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 are set so as to be larger than the projecting dimension. Thereby, when the member 210 for destruction moves to the position where the destruction base part 211 contacts the enclosure part 180, the engagement between the claw parts 201 and 202 and the receiving parts 204 and 205 is released.

  In the situation where the breaking member 210 is disposed at the initial position, the cutting portion 212 is disposed so as to face the portion corresponding to the boundary 140 in the seal seal 160 in the release direction. In this case, the cutting part 212 does not come into contact with the seal seal 160.

  Further, since the length dimension of the cutting portion 212 in the longitudinal direction is set to the width dimension of the sticking base 135, specifically, the distance between the front-side opposing plate portions 142 and 143 is set large, both ends of the cutting portion 212 are sealed with seals. In 160, it arrange | positions outside the both ends corresponding to the cutting part 212. FIG. In this case, in order to avoid interference between the opposing plate portions 142, 143, 146, 147 and the cutting portion 212, the cutting portion 212 enters between the front side opposing plate portions 142, 143 and the back side opposing plate portions 146, 147. It is made possible.

  When the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the cutting portion 212 comes into contact with a portion corresponding to the boundary 140 of the seal seal 160. By the contact, a pressing force is applied to the seal seal 160, and the region corresponding to the boundary 140 is cut.

  Details of the cutting unit 212 will be described. As illustrated in FIG. 14C, the cutting unit 212 includes a first cutting unit 242 that cuts along the boundary 140, and a second cutting unit 243 that cuts in a direction that intersects the boundary 140. The first cutting portion 242 has a thickness dimension that can be inserted between the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and the pedestal portion 145, and faces the boundary 140. The first cutting portion 242 is formed so as to taper from a midway position in the protruding direction of the cutting portion 212 toward the front side in the protruding direction, and is sharpened toward the seal seal 160 side. When the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the first cutting portion 242 contacts the location corresponding to the boundary 140 in the seal seal 160 and cuts the seal seal 160 along the boundary 140.

  As shown in FIG. 14C and FIG. 15A, the first cutting portion 242 includes a first inclined portion 242a inclined with respect to the seal seal 160 attached to the side surface region 139, and the first inclined portion. And a second inclined part 242b inclined in the opposite direction with respect to the part 242a. The first inclined portion 242a is inclined so as to protrude toward the sealing seal 160 from the end on the side where the inclined surface 212a is provided in the longitudinal direction of the cutting portion 212 toward the center, and the second inclined portion 242b is inclined so as to protrude toward the sealing seal 160 from the end on the side where the inclined surface 212b is provided toward the center. For this reason, the 1st cutting part 242 is arrange | positioned in the side far from the sealing seal | sticker 160 by the both ends side rather than the center side.

  Here, the distance from the seal seal 160 to both ends of the first cutting part 242 to the seal seal 160 is set to be shorter than the distance from the destruction base part 211 to the enclosing part 180. For this reason, the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the first cutting portion 242 is completed before the destruction base portion 211 is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with the surrounding portion 180. In other words, the stroke amount that the breaking member 210 can move includes the stroke amount required to complete the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the first cutting portion 242 and the stroke amount of play.

  Here, “completed” means that the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 140 by the first cutting part 242, and the breaking member 210 is sealed from both ends of the first cutting part 242 in the release direction. This corresponds to the case of moving by a distance up to 160.

  Further, the stroke amount required to complete the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the first cutting portion 242 is smaller than the stroke amount required to release the engagement between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205. It is set to be. Specifically, in the situation where the breaking member 210 is disposed at a position where the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the first cutting portion 242 is completed, the displacement amount of the tip hook portion of the claw portions 201 and 202 due to elastic deformation is received. The inclination angles of the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 are set to be smaller than the projecting dimensions of the portions 204 and 205. Thus, the engagement between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is not released before the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the first cutting portion 242 is completed.

  The second cutting part 243 is provided between the first inclined part 242a and the second inclined part 242b. The 2nd cutting part 243 is provided with the 1st cutting blade 243a and the 2nd cutting blade 243b which stood up toward the sealing seal | sticker 160 side from the destruction base part 211. FIG. Each cutting blade 243a, 243b extends along a direction orthogonal to the boundary 140, specifically, a direction orthogonal to the first cutting portion 242 (short direction of the fracture base portion 211), and its length dimension. Is set larger than the thickness dimension of the front-side sticking plate portion 141. Each of the cutting blades 243a and 243b is formed so as to taper from the midway position in the protruding direction of the cutting portion 212 toward the tip portion, and the tip is sharp. The cutting blades 243a and 243b are formed so that the tips thereof are arranged on the sticking base 135 side (sealing seal 160 side) with respect to the cutting portion 212. Specifically, the sealing blades 160 from the cutting blades 243a and 243b are formed. Is set shorter than the shortest distance from the first inclined portion 242a and the second inclined portion 242b to the seal seal 160. Thus, when the breaking member 210 moves to the seal seal 160 side, the cutting blades 243a and 243b first come into contact with the seal seal 160.

  Moreover, each cutting blade 243a, 243b is arrange | positioned in the direction which followed the boundary 140 by the predetermined space | interval, and the 3rd cutting blade 243c is provided so that it may connect with each cutting blade 243a, 243b. . The third cutting blade 243c is formed between the first cutting blade 243a and the second cutting blade 243b, and is orthogonal to the cutting blades 243a and 243b. Similarly to the cutting blades 243a and 243b, the third cutting blade 243c is formed to protrude from the destruction base portion 211 toward the sealing seal 160, and the tip thereof is the same as the tip of each cutting blade 243a and 243b. Is set to That is, the distances from the cutting blades 243a, 243b, 243c to the seal seal 160 are set to be the same, and the distances are shorter than the shortest distance from the first inclined part 242a and the second inclined part 242b to the seal seal 160. Is set. The third cutting blade 243c is disposed at a position facing the boundary 140 in a direction opposite to the release direction.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the movement of the breaking member 210 is prevented from being obstructed by the contact between the cutting blades 243 a and 243 b and the pasting base 135 in correspondence with the cutting blades 243 a and 243 b. Cutting blade grooves 244 and 245 are formed. The cutting blade grooves 244 and 245 are open toward the breaking member 210 side (the side of the sticking base 135) and communicate with the boundary 140. The cutting blade grooves 244 and 245 are covered with a seal seal 160. The cutting blade grooves 244 and 245 are formed to have a size that allows the corresponding cutting blades 243a and 243b to enter, and the depth dimension of the cutting blade grooves 244a and 245b ranges from the destruction base portion 211 to the surrounding portion 180 (the front side opposing plate portions 142 and 143). Etc.) is set to be larger than the distance. The relative positional relationship between the cutting blades 243a and 243b and the cutting blade grooves 244 and 245 is set so that the breaking member 210 is disposed at the initial position.

  The position of the second cutting portion 243 is set so that when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the second cutting portion 243 comes into contact with the location where the antenna member 172 of the seal seal 160 is provided. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, the third cutting blade 243c is within a range Z corresponding to the location where the antenna member 172 is disposed when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction. It arrange | positions in the position which contact | abuts. The range Z is a range corresponding to the clearance of the attaching position generated between the surrounding portion 180 and the seal seal 160, and specifically, is a range in which the position of the antenna member 172 varies due to the clearance. The space | interval of the 1st cutting blade 243a and the 2nd cutting blade 243b is set so that the 2nd cutting part 243 may be formed over the range which opposes the range Z at least. Accordingly, even when the antenna member 172 and the second cutting portion 243 are displaced due to the clearance of the pasting position, the second cutting portion 243 comes into contact with the antenna member 172. .

  Moreover, as shown in FIG.13 (b), the 1st slit part 174 is arrange | positioned across the groove | channel 244 for cutting blades partially. Accordingly, when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the first cutting blade 243a comes into contact with the region where the first slit portion 174 is formed.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 16A to 16C are explanatory diagrams for explaining a procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 102 is opened, and FIGS. 17A to 17C are cases where the internal space of the substrate box 102 is opened. FIGS. 18A to 18C are cross-sectional views when the sticking base 135 is viewed from the front surface side, and FIGS. 18A to 18C are procedures for opening the internal space of the substrate box 102. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating, Comprising: It is a cross-sectional view of the sticking base 135. FIG. In FIG. 16, the cover member 191 is cut away.

  As already described, sliding the other of the constituent members 111 and 112 in the separating direction for opening is the screw fixing of the front side fixing base portion 133 and the back side fixing base portion 134 constituting the sticking base 135. In addition, it is limited by the cover member 191 and is blocked by the seal seal 160. For this reason, as a pre-process for performing the slide movement, the separation operation of the cover member 191, the screw fixation release, and the inhibition by the seal seal 160 are released.

  Here, since the screw fixing portion is covered with the cover member 191, the cover member 191 needs to be separated first. The cover member 191 is engaged with the sticking base 135, and the engagement is released by pressing the breaking member 210 in the releasing direction. For this reason, the breaking member 210 is first pressed in the release direction.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 16A, 17A, and 18A, a part of the operation member 213 protrudes outward from the guide frame 241, and therefore when the operation member 213 is pressed. In addition, the guide frame 241 is less likely to get in the way. Furthermore, the guide frame 241 is formed in a substantially C shape. For this reason, even if the operation member 213 enters the guide frame 241 by pressing the operation member 213, a part of the operation member 213 is exposed. Thereby, the member 210 for destruction can be further inserted in the sealing seal | sticker 160 side by pressing the site | part which is not enclosed by the guide frame 241. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, since the second cutting portion 243 is disposed at a position close to the seal seal 160, when the operation member 213 is pressed in the release direction, the second cutting portion 243 is first sealed. Abut against 160. Thereby, the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the cutting unit 212 is started. In this case, since the third cutting blade 243c of the second cutting portion 243 is disposed over the range Z in contact with the antenna member 172 when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the breaking member 210 is When moving in the release direction, the antenna member 172 is first disconnected and communication is disabled. Thereby, the fact can be grasped also when the member 210 for destruction is moved to the middle position.

  In particular, since the first slit portion 174 is disposed across the cutting blade groove 244 into which the first cutting blade 243a enters, when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the first cutting blade 243a causes the first slit portion 174 to be The region where the 1 slit portion 174 is formed is cut. As a result, the IC tag 163 cannot perform normal communication.

  Further, when the first cutting blade 243a and the second cutting blade 243b enter the cutting blade grooves 244 and 245, the portions of the sealing seal 160 covering the cutting blade grooves 244 and 245 are cut. In this case, each of the cutting blades 243a and 243b forms a cutting portion extending in a direction orthogonal to the direction along the boundary 140.

  Since the length dimension of each cutting blade 243a, 243b (the length dimension in the overlapping direction of the pasting base 135) is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the front-side pasting plate portion 141, each cutting blade 243a, 243b. Enters the cutting blade grooves 244 and 245, the cutting blades 243a and 243b protrude from the surface region 137 to the front side as shown in FIGS. 16 (b) and 17 (b). Thereby, a part of surface region 137 of the seal seal 160 is cut.

  When the breaking member 210 is further moved in the releasing direction, the first cutting portion 242 comes into contact with the portion corresponding to the boundary 140 in the seal seal 160, and the seal seal 160 is pressed. The seal seal 160 is cut by the pressing. In this case, the cutting part 212 enters the sticking base 135 through the boundary 140.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18A, since the seal seal 160 is pasted over the pedestal portion 145 and the front-side pasting plate portion 141, bending of the seal seal 160 in the release direction is restricted. Yes. As a result, when the seal seal 160 is pressed in the release direction via the breaking member 210, the seal seal 160 is unlikely to be cut by bending the seal seal 160 in the release direction. Therefore, the seal seal 160 can be easily cut. In other words, the seal seal 160 is sheared by being sandwiched between the sticking base 135 and the breaking member 210. As a result, the sealing seal 160 can be easily cut as compared with a configuration in which the breaking member 210 is simply cut.

  As already described, since both ends of the cutting portion 212 (first cutting portion 242) are disposed outside the seal seal 160, the cutting portion 212 cuts the portion including both ends of the boundary 140 in the seal seal 160. . As a result, uncut portions are less likely to occur in the seal seal 160.

  In addition, the thickness dimension of the 1st cutting part 242 is set so that the 1st cutting part 242 may contact | abut with the peripheral part of the boundary 140, or adjoins through a predetermined gap. Specifically, the thickness dimension of the first cutting portion 242 is set to be equal to or larger than the distance between the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and the pedestal portion 145. Thereby, the shear force which arises between the 1st cutting part 242 and the peripheral part of the boundary 140 is ensured. In this case, the first cutting portion 242 moves in the release direction while sliding with respect to the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and the pedestal portion 145. Therefore, the positional deviation of the cutting part 212 is suppressed. That is, the cutting part 212, the front-side sticking plate part 141, and the pedestal part 145 function as guide means for guiding the movement of the breaking member 210 in the release direction.

  Further, the distance between the front-side counter plate portions 142 and 143 and the back-side counter plate portions 146 and 147 corresponding to the front-side counter plate portions 142 and 143 is the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the first cutting portion 242. Thus, a part of the side of the back side opposing plate portions 146 and 147 protrudes to the front side (see FIG. 6). As a result, the cutting portion 212 slides with respect to each of the opposing plate portions 142, 143, 146, and 147 as the breaking member 210 moves, so that the front and back direction of the breaking member 210 (the overlapping direction of the pasting base 135). ) Is restricted.

  When the breaking member 210 is moved in the release direction by the longest distance from the seal seal 160 to the first cutting part 242, the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 140, and the inhibition state of the separation operation by the seal seal 160 is released. Is done. Thereby, the cutting | disconnection of the seal seal | sticker 160 by the 1st cutting part 242 is completed.

  Here, as already described, the stroke amount required to complete the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the first cutting part 242 is the same as the engagement between the claw parts 201 and 202 and the receiving parts 204 and 205 is released. It is set to be smaller than the required stroke amount. Thereby, the engagement relationship between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is maintained.

  When the destruction member 210 is further moved in the release direction, as shown in FIG. 17B, the destruction base portion 211 comes into contact with the surrounding portion 180, and further movement is restricted. That is, the distance from the destruction base portion 211 to the enclosure portion 180 at the initial position in the release direction is the distance that the destruction member 210 can move.

  Here, the movable distance of the breaking member 210 is set to be larger than the stroke amount required for cutting the seal seal 160 by the first cutting portion 242. Thereby, when the destruction member 210 is moved to a position where the destruction base portion 211 comes into contact with the surrounding portion 180, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the inhibition state is not released due to a part of the seal seal 160 remaining uncut. .

  In a situation where the destruction base portion 211 and the surrounding portion 180 are in contact with each other, the engagement relationship between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is released. Therefore, the cover member 191 can be moved in the removal direction. That is, the cover member 191 can be removed after the cutting by the first cutting portion 242 is completed.

  With the operation member 213 pressed, the cover member 191 is moved in the removal direction opposite to the mounting direction. In this case, since the breaking member 210 is kept engaged with the cover member 191, the breaking member 210 moves integrally with the cover member 191. Thereby, the cover member 191 is separated from the pasting base 135 together with the breaking member 210. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16C, a cut portion along the boundary 140 is exposed on the seal seal 160.

  As already described, the sealing seal 160 is formed with the first cutting blade 243a and the second cutting blade 243b so that the cutting portion extending in the direction perpendicular to the cutting portion along the boundary 140 is formed. It becomes easy to stand out as a whole. Thereby, the fact that the seal seal 160 is cut can be easily confirmed as compared with the configuration in which only the boundary 140 is cut.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16C, the cutting portion formed by each of the cutting blades 243a and 243b is formed across the surface region 137 and the side region 139. Thereby, compared with the case where the cut part is formed only in the side surface region 139, it is easy to confirm the cut part. Therefore, it can be easily confirmed that the inhibition of the seal seal 160 is released.

  Then, the seal seal 160 covering the head of the screw 153 is pierced by the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver, and the tip is inserted into the head of the screw 153. As shown in FIG. To leave. As already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the through-hole 152 for inserting the screw 153, when the tip of the tool is inserted into the head of the screw 153, the seal seal 160 Not only a part of the damage but also a part of the antenna member 172 is broken. A screwdriver is inserted into the through hole 152 and the screw 153 is removed. Thereby, the screw fixing is released, and the opening operation of the substrate box 102 can be performed. In this case, the portion covering the through hole 152 in the seal seal 160 is destroyed.

  In the cover member 191, when the cover member 191 is separated from the sticking base 135, the movement of the breaking member 210 is not restricted by the sticking base 135, so that the breaking member 210 can move toward the opening 193. For this reason, the operating member 213 is immersed in the internal space 192 of the cover member 191 and the breaking member 210 is pressed toward the back side. As a result, the engagement between the breaking member 210 and the claw portions 201 and 202 is released, and the breaking member 210 is located between the claw portions 201 and 202 as shown in FIGS. 17 (c) and 18 (c). Instead, it is arranged at a position shifted from the initial position. As a result, the breaking member 210 can be removed from the cover member 191, so that it is possible to deal with individual replacement of the breaking member 210.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 19, a power supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and a signal line is indicated by a solid line arrow.

  A main control board 101 provided in the main control device 63 includes a main control circuit 251 and a power failure monitoring circuit 252. A CPU chip 103 is mounted on the main control circuit 251. The CPU chip 103 temporarily stores various control programs executed by the CPU chip 103 and ROM 253 storing fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 253. For example, a RAM 254 as a memory and a variety of circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The CPU chip 103 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the CPU chip 103 are a power failure monitoring circuit 252 provided on the main control board 101, a payout control board 261 provided on the payout control device 82, and a switch group (not shown). In this case, the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is connected to a power source and launch control board 265 provided in the power and launch control device 83, and power is supplied to the CPU chip 103 via the power failure monitoring circuit 252.

  On the other hand, a power failure monitoring circuit 252, a payout control board 261 and a relay terminal board 269 are connected to the output side of the CPU chip 103. Various commands such as prize ball commands are output to the payout control board 261. Various commands and the like are output from the main control circuit 251 to the sound lamp control board 271 provided in the sound lamp control device 66 via the relay terminal plate 269.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 relays between the main control circuit 251 and the power source and launch control board 265, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power source and launch control board 265.

  The payout control board 261 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 78. The CPU 262 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 263 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 262, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 264 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The CPU 262 of the payout control board 261 is provided with an input / output port. A main control circuit 251, a power and launch control board 265, and a back pack board are connected to the input side of the CPU 262. Further, the main control circuit 251 and the back pack substrate are connected to the output side of the CPU 262.

  The power supply and launch control board 265 includes a power supply unit 266 and a launch control unit 267. The power supply unit 266 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control circuit 251, the payout control board 261, etc., and the generated operating power is indicated by a double line arrow. This is supplied to the main control circuit 251 and the payout control board 261 through the path. The launch control unit 267 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 50, and the game ball launch mechanism 50 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control board 271 controls the display control device 275. The CPU 272 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 273 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 272, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 274 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The CPU 272 of the sound lamp control board 271 is provided with an input / output port. A main control circuit 251 is connected to the input side of the CPU 272 through a relay terminal board 269 and controls the display control device 275 based on various commands output from the main control circuit 251. The display control device 275 controls the symbol display device 41 based on a display command input from the sound lamp control board 271.

  Next, the confirmation work of the presence or absence of fraud based on reading ID information from the IC tag 163 will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic view of a game hall H in which a large number of the pachinko machines 10 are installed.

  In FIG. 20, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall H has an IC tag 163 attached to the main controller 63 as described above. The reader device R is a handy type reader and can read ID information from the IC tag 163 in a non-contact state.

  The management computer HC is an electronic arithmetic device having a management program for the pachinko machine 10, and is connected to the reader device R so as to be able to read information read by the reader device R. In FIG. 20, symbol DC is a data counter for displaying the number of game games, the number of jackpots, etc., and the data counter DC is assigned a machine number for each pachinko machine 10 in the game hall H.

  In the above configuration, when the ID information is read from the IC tag 163 of each pachinko machine 10 by the reader device R, the reading result is input and collected in the management computer HC. In this case, the reader device R outputs ID information together with unique information (such as a machine number) that identifies the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source of the ID information. That is, when the operator who operates the reader device R starts reading the ID information, the unique information of the pachinko machine 10 that starts reading is input to the reader device R, and the input unique information together with the read ID information. It is output to the management computer HC.

  The management computer HC stores management data in which management ID information is registered in association with the unique information of the pachinko machine 10. The management computer HC reads management ID information based on the input unique information, compares the management ID information with the input ID information, stores the comparison result, and displays the comparison result. The information is displayed on a display device provided in the management computer HC. Thereby, after performing an exchange to an unauthorized device of the main control device 63 or an unauthorized control board or an unauthorized chip performed by opening the substrate box 102 as an illegal act against the main control device 63, Even if an illegal act of attaching an illegal IC tag capable of transmitting ID information is performed, it can be detected.

  In addition, if a response wave is not received by the reader device R even after a predetermined time has passed even though the calling wave is output from the reader device R, information indicating that is output to the management computer HC. May be. Then, in the management computer HC, the fact that the response wave is not received is stored in a manner specifying the pachinko machine 10 and displayed on the display device. As a result, an illegal act of not attaching an unauthorized IC tag after exchanging the main control device 63 with an unauthorized device or exchanging with an unauthorized control board or an unauthorized chip performed by opening the board box 102 If it is done, it will be possible to discover it.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A breaking member 210 for cutting the seal seal 160 along the boundary 140 was provided. Thereby, since the sealing seal | sticker 160 can be cut | disconnected easily, the improvement of workability | operativity of opening operation can be aimed at. Further, when the sealing seal 160 is cut by the breaking member 210, the cut portion remains as a trace, so that it is possible to easily confirm that the opening operation has been performed.

  The breaking member 210 is disposed outside the sticking base 135 and is movable toward the inside of the sticking base 135. As a result, when the breaking member 210 is moved toward the inside of the sticking base 135, the seal seal 160 attached to the sticking base 135 is sandwiched between the breaking member 210 and the sticking base 135. Disconnected. In this case, a shearing force is applied to the seal seal 160, and bending deformation of the seal seal 160 is restricted. Thereby, the seal seal | sticker 160 can be cut | disconnected easily.

  Further, since the breaking member 210 is arranged outside the sticking base 135, the breaking member 210 can be easily attached as compared with the arrangement arranged inside the sticking base 135, so the breaking member The workability of the attaching work of 210 can be improved.

  Here, in the case of the configuration in which the breaking member 210 is disposed outside the sticking base 135, it is necessary to provide an attachment structure for attaching the breaking member 210 to the sticking base 135, and there is a concern that the configuration may be complicated. Further, if the member for destruction 210 is exposed to the outside, the member for destruction 210 can be easily accessed, and thus an illegal act on the member for destruction 210 may be performed.

  In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the cover member 191 having the internal space 192 that can accommodate the sticking base 135 is provided, and the breaking member 210 is attached to the cover member 191 in a state of being accommodated in the internal space 192. And the relative position of the breaking member 210 with respect to the cover member 191 so that the breaking member 210 is disposed at a position facing the boundary 140 in a situation where the cover member 191 is attached to the substrate box 102. Set the position. Thereby, an attachment structure for attaching the breaking member 210 to the substrate box 102 is not necessary, and the breaking member 210 is protected by the cover member 191. Therefore, inconveniences that may be caused by disposing the breaking member 210 outside the sticking base 135 can be avoided.

  Note that the breaking member 210 is mounted on the cover member 191 by engaging the inclined surfaces 212a and 212b with the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. It may be configured. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a modified example of the structure for mounting the breaking member 210 to the cover member 191. In addition, since one nail | claw part and a pair of other nail | claw part are the same structures, while only showing the structure of one claw part, it demonstrates the description of the other nail | claw part.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 21 (a), a convex portion 281b that protrudes inward is provided in place of the engaging inclined portion 222 at an intermediate position of the claw portion 281a. The convex portion 281b has a hemispherical shape, and its radius is set larger than the protruding dimension of the receiving portion 205. The distance between the convex part 281b and the side wall part 203 is set so that the breaking member 210 can enter, and the breaking member 210 is arranged between the convex part 281b and the side wall part 203.

  According to this configuration, when the breaking member 210 is moved in the release direction, the inclined surface 212b and the convex portion 281b come into contact with each other, and the claw portion 281a is elastically deformed toward the wall portion 195, while the cutting portion 212 is the convex portion 281b. Get on. Since the radius of the convex portion 281b is set larger than the projecting dimension of the receiving portion 205, the engagement between the claw portion 281a and the receiving portion 205 is released in a situation where the cutting portion 212 rides on the convex portion 281b. Thereby, the cover member 191 can be removed.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 21 (b), a hook portion 282b protruding inward is provided in the middle of the claw portion 282a, instead of the engaging inclined portion 222, and the hook portion 282b An inclined surface 282c is provided at a portion on the side wall portion 203 side so that its protruding amount increases toward the tip hook portion side of the claw portion 282a. The breaking member 210 is disposed so that the breaking member 210 is sandwiched between the hook portion 282 b and the side wall portion 203. Thereby, the position of the member 210 for destruction is prescribed | regulated to the initial position. When the operation member 213 is pressed in the release direction, the claw portion 282a is elastically deformed outward by contact with the inclined surface 282c, and the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction.

  Here, an engaging convex portion 282d protruding outward is provided at an end portion of the cutting portion 212. Corresponding to the engaging convex portion 282d, an engaging concave portion 282e formed in a size capable of fitting the engaging convex portion 282d is provided on the front side in the releasing direction of the hook portion 282b. The relative positional relationship between them is set so that the engaging convex portion 282d fits into the engaging concave portion 282e in the situation where the breaking member 210 is disposed at the release position.

  According to this configuration, when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the end portion side portion of the cutting portion 212 comes into contact with the hook portion 282b, and the claw portion 282a is elastically deformed outward. Then, the cutting part 212 rides on the hook part 282b, and the engaging convex part 282d fits into the engaging concave part 282e at the release position. In this case, the movement of the breaking member 210 in the direction opposite to the release direction is restricted by the contact between the engaging convex portion 282d and the inner peripheral surface of the engaging concave portion 282e.

  Here, in the situation where the engaging convex portion 282d is fitted in the engaging concave portion 282e, the protrusion dimension of the hook portion 282b is such that the claw portion 282a is displaced to the position where the engagement with the receiving portion 205 is released. Is set. Accordingly, the engagement between the claw portion 282a and the receiving portion 205 is released in a state where the breaking member 210 is disposed at the release position. Therefore, the cover member 191 can be removed.

  As another modification of the engagement structure between the breaking member 210 and the cover member 191, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), a hook portion 283 b protruding inward is provided in the middle of the claw portion 283 a, A cut portion 283c may be provided on the side wall portion 203 side of the hook portion 283b and on the wall portion 195 side. According to this configuration, when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the cutting portion 212 comes into contact with the hook portion 283b, and the claw portion 283a is elastically deformed toward the wall portion 195. In this case, a force is applied to the portion where the cut portion 283c is provided in the claw portion 283a, the claw portion 283a is broken from the portion, and a portion ahead of the portion is separated. Thereby, the cover member 191 can be removed.

  In this case, when the sealing seal 160 is cut by the breaking member 210, the trace is formed not only on the sealing seal 160 but also on the cover member 191. Thereby, the fact that the sealing seal 160 has been cut by the breaking member 210 can be easily confirmed.

  Note that the engagement relationship between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is released in a situation where the destruction base portion 211 and the surrounding portion 180 are in contact with each other. It is good also as a structure by which a match is loosened. Specifically, the area where the claw portions 201 and 202 are engaged with the receiving portions 204 and 205 in a situation where the destruction base portion 211 and the surrounding portion 180 are in contact with each other, the destruction member 210 is in the initial position. It is good also as a structure set so that it may become small compared with the condition where it is arrange | positioned. Even in this case, it is easy to remove the cover member 191 because the breaking member 210 moves in the releasing direction to easily release the engagement relationship. In short, any configuration is possible as long as the breaking member 210 moves in the releasing direction and the engagement relationship is relaxed.

  The breaking member 210 is mounted on the cover member 191. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the breaking member 210 may be mounted on the substrate box 102 side. In this case, it is necessary to separately provide an attachment structure for attaching the breaking member 210 to the board box 102. For this reason, from the viewpoint of simplifying the configuration of the substrate box 102, the configuration in which the breaking member 210 is attached to the cover member 191 is superior.

  In the present embodiment, the engagement between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is released along with the movement of the breaking member 210 in the release direction. The engagement may not be released with the movement of the breaking member 210. Specifically, an accommodation part is provided inside the cover member 191 and the destruction member 210 is accommodated in the accommodation part in a state in which it can be moved in the release direction. And a nail | claw part is provided so that the engaging location of a nail | claw part and a receiving part may be exposed to the outer side of the cover member 191. FIG. In this case, after the breaking member 210 is moved in the releasing direction and the seal seal 160 is cut, an external force is applied to the engaging portion from the outside to release the engagement, and the cover member 191 is separated from the substrate box 102. By doing so, the internal space of the substrate box 102 can be opened. Thereby, since the operation of opening the internal space of the board box 102 can be complicated, an illegal act of opening the internal space of the board box 102 can be suppressed.

  Further, when the engagement portion is exposed to the outside of the cover member 191, the cover member is cut without cutting the seal seal 160 by applying an external force to the engagement portion so that the engagement is released. 191 can be removed. Thereby, the simple inspection which removes the cover member 191 from the board | substrate box 102, and confirms the sealing seal | sticker 160 directly without cut | disconnecting the sealing seal | sticker 160 can be performed.

  In addition, a box-side receiving portion that engages with the claw portion may be provided so that the claw portion protrudes outward. In this case, the engagement can be released by elastically deforming the claw portion inward. In this configuration, the breaking member is configured to restrict elastic deformation to the inside of the claw portion at the initial position and to release the restriction of elastic deformation to the inside of the claw portion by moving from the position in the releasing direction. It is good also as a structure which provides. In this case, the engagement is released by elastically deforming the claw portion inward with the breaking member moved in the release direction. Thereby, the cover member 191 can be removed.

  As a specific configuration, for example, the cover member 191 is formed by superposing the first housing member and the second housing member, and a claw portion is formed in the first housing member. A 1st housing member is attached so that the said nail | claw part and a box side receiving part may engage. And the member for destruction is mounted | worn so that it may contact | abut on the surface on the opposite side to the protrusion side of a nail | claw part. The breaking member is formed in a rectangular shape so as not to come into contact with the opposite surface when moved in the release direction. A configuration in which the second housing member is superposed on the first housing member after the destruction member is mounted is conceivable.

  Further, the cover member 191 and the substrate box 102 may be bonded via an adhesive, and the bonding may be released when the breaking member is pressed. Specifically, the cover member 191 is attached in a state where an adhesive is previously applied to a portion of the cover member 191 that contacts the surrounding portion 180. And the peeling part which penetrates with respect to the location which has adhere | attached so that both may be isolate | separated in the member for destruction when the said member for destruction moves to a cancellation | release direction is provided separately. As a result, when the breaking member moves in the release direction, the peeled portion pushes the bonding portion between the two members, releases the connection between them, and allows the cover member 191 to be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, the cover member 191 may be provided with a regulation plate portion 284 that regulates the movement of the breaking member 210 to the back surface side. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22B, since the movement of the breaking member 210 to the back side can be regulated, the position between the breaking member 210 and the sealing seal 160 is moved when the breaking member 210 is moved in the release direction. Deviation can be made difficult to occur.

  A plurality of ribs that protrude from the destruction base portion 211 in the release direction and that abut against the restriction plate portion 284 and the cover member 191 may be provided at predetermined intervals. This guides the movement of the breaking member 210 in the release direction. In this case, when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the relative position between the ribs and the surrounding portion 180 may be shifted so that they do not face each other.

  In addition, a positioning structure is provided in which when the breaking member 210 moves in the releasing direction, the breaking member 210 is positioned at a position where the engagement between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is released. Also good.

  Specifically, as the positioning structure, as shown in FIG. 22B, a positioning hook 285 is provided in a portion where the guide frame 241 is not provided in the peripheral portion of the operation member opening 231. The positioning hook 285 is provided so as to protrude outside the cover member 191, and the protruding dimension is set smaller than the length dimension of the operation member 213 in the release direction.

  Further, the positioning hook 285 has a free end, and a tip hook portion protruding inward is provided at the tip. The protruding amount of the tip hook portion increases toward the base end side. The positioning hook 285 is disposed at a position where the breaking member 210 is not locked with respect to the operation member 213 in a state where the breaking member 210 is disposed at the initial position. When the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the positioning hook 285 is moved. The operation member 213 is locked.

  Specifically, when the breaking member 210 to which the operation member 213 is not attached is attached to the cover member 191, a part of the destruction base portion 211 is exposed through the operation member opening 231. Here, one of the side surfaces of the operation member 213 is opened, and the operation member 213 is attached to the destruction base portion 211 with the opened side as the front side. As a result, the operation member 213 is attached to the destruction base portion 211 without the positioning hook 285 being caught by the operation member 213. The cover member 191 configured as described above is attached to the sticking base 135. In this case, a part of the positioning hook 285 is disposed in a region where the operation member 213 forms a partition.

  According to this configuration, when the operation member 213 is pressed in the release direction, the original wall portion in the release direction of the operation member 213 comes into contact with the tip hook portion of the positioning hook 285. In this case, the positioning hook 285 is elastically deformed outward (front side). Thereafter, when the operation member 213 reaches the front side of the tip hook portion in the release direction, the positioning hook 285 returns to the natural state, and the end surface of the tip hook portion comes into contact with the operation member 213 from the original side in the release direction ( (See the two-dot chain line in FIG. 22B). Thereby, the movement of the operation member 213 in the direction opposite to the release direction is restricted. Therefore, the destruction member 210 is restricted from being pushed back in the direction opposite to the release direction by the elastic force with the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222. Therefore, it is not necessary to keep pressing the operating member 213 in order to maintain the state where the breaking member 210 is disposed at the release position. The regulated position is called a release position.

  In a situation where the breaking member 210 is disposed at the release position, the seal seal 160 is cut. Specifically, the protrusion of the positioning hook 285 is such that the stroke amount from the initial position to the release position is larger than the stroke amount required for the first cutting portion 242 to cut the seal seal 160 along the boundary 140. The dimension and the position of the end face of the tip hook portion are set.

  Further, the stroke amount from the initial position to the release position is arranged at a position where the claw parts 201 and 202 are disengaged from the receiving parts 204 and 205 in a situation where the breaking member 210 is arranged at the release position. Is set to Accordingly, since it is not necessary to maintain the state where the operation member 213 is pressed when removing the cover member 191, the cover member 191 is compared with the configuration in which the cover member 191 is moved in the removal direction while pressing the operation member 213. Removal work can be easily performed.

  In this modified example, when the breaking member 210 is attached, the breaking member 210 is first attached so that the positioning hook 285 does not interfere with the operating member 213, and then the operating member 213 is attached to the breaking member 210. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the breaking member 210 to which the operation member 213 is attached may be attached to the cover member 191. In this case, the positioning hook 285 may be elastically deformed outward in advance by hand.

  In addition, the positioning hook 285 is provided as the positioning structure. However, the positioning hook 285 is not limited thereto. For example, one of the breaking member 210 and the cover member 191 is provided with a concave portion, and the other is provided with a convex portion that can enter the concave portion. It is good also as a structure by which the relative positional relationship of both was set so that a convex part may fit in a recessed part in the condition where the member 210 is arrange | positioned in a cancellation | release position. Even in this case, the breaking member 210 is positioned at the release position. In short, any structure that can keep the breaking member 210 in the release position against the elastic force of the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222 may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the claw portions 201 and 202 are elastically deformed to the side where the engagement with the receiving portions 204 and 205 is released. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the receiving portions 204 and 205 may be elastically deformed. Specifically, by cutting out the periphery of the receiving portions 204 and 205, the receiving portions 204 and 205 are formed to be elastically deformable with the side engaged with the claw portions 201 and 202 as a free end. In addition, instead of the engaging inclined portions 221 and 222, the claw portions 201 and 202 are provided with protruding portions that protrude in directions facing each other, and the breaking member 210 is disposed at the initial position. In the situation, the receiving portions 204 and 205 are arranged on the original side in the release direction. According to such a configuration, when the breaking member 210 moves in the release direction, the convex portion and the receiving portions 204 and 205 come into contact with each other, and the claw portions 201 and 202 are elastically deformed outward, and the receiving portion 204 and 205 is elastically deformed inward. Thereby, the engagement between the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 is released, and the cover member 191 can be removed. In short, it is sufficient that at least one of the claw portions 201 and 202 and the receiving portions 204 and 205 moves to the side where the engagement with the other is released.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a part of the sticking base 135, the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 are different from those in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the same structure as 1st Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the sticking base 135 in the present embodiment, FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the configuration of the portion where the seal seal 160 is provided in the main control device 63, and FIG. FIG. 26A is a rear view of the breaking member 311, FIG. 26B is a perspective view of the breaking member 311 viewed from the back side, and FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the sticking base 135 and its periphery.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the front-side fixed base portion 133 is provided with a pair of front-side opposing plate portions 301 and 302 that are formed so as to sandwich the front-side sticking plate portion 141 therebetween. Both front-side opposing plate portions 301 and 302 protrude toward at least the back-side fixed base portion 134.

  On the other hand, the back-side fixed base portion 134 is provided with a pedestal portion 303 that protrudes from the opposite side of the back-side pasting plate portion 144 toward the front-side pasting plate portion 141 in the back-side pasting plate portion 144. The pedestal portion 303 is formed between a pair of back side opposing plate portions 304 and 305 formed so as to sandwich the back side sticking plate portion 144 therebetween. As shown in FIG. 23, the pedestal portion 303 protrudes so as to enter between the front-side opposing plate portions 301 and 302, and the end surface on the protruding side of the pedestal portion 303 is connected to the surface region 137 side in the front-side sticking plate portion 141. Is close to the opposite surface. However, they are not in contact with each other, and a predetermined gap is formed.

  The side surface outside the substrate box 102 in the pedestal portion 303 is located on the same plane with respect to the protruding end surface of the front-side sticking plate portion 141 with the predetermined gap interposed therebetween. 139 is formed. In addition, a predetermined space is formed between the pedestal portion 303 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141 by the predetermined gap, and the space includes the pedestal portion 303 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141 on the side surface region 139. Are opened laterally by a single boundary 306 formed between the two. In a space between the pedestal portion 303 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141, a breaking member 311 for cutting the seal seal is provided.

  The breaking member 311 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIGS. 25A and 25B, the breaking member 311 has a thickness dimension capable of entering a space between the pedestal portion 303 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141, and the pedestal. A plate-like fracture base portion 312 having a length slightly larger than the distance between the back-side opposing plate portions 304 and 305 in the portion 303, and a pair of breakage base portions 312 formed at both ends in the length direction. Arm portions 313 and 314 are integrally formed.

  The pair of arm portions 313 and 314 protrude toward the back-side pasting plate portion 144 at positions outside the both end portions 303a and 303b adjacent to the back-side facing plate portions 304 and 305 in the pedestal portion 303, respectively. The breaker member 311 is disposed such that the pedestal portion 303 is sandwiched between the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 and the breakage base portion 312 is inserted between the pedestal portion 303 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141. ing.

  Here, both end portions 303a and 303b of the pedestal portion 303 are not covered with the back-side facing plate portions 304 and 305 as shown in FIG. In addition, the front-side counter plate portions 301 and 302 are recessed at the corners on the side region 139 side and the back-side counter plate portions 304 and 305 side so as not to cover both end portions 303a and 303b of the pedestal portion 303. Is formed. Therefore, both end portions 303a and 303b of the pedestal portion 303 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 135 as shown in FIG.

  In the above configuration, the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are provided so as to sandwich the pedestal portion 303 therebetween as described above, and therefore, as shown in FIG. It is exposed outside. Further, the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are disposed between the corresponding front side opposing plate portions 301 and 302 and the back side opposing plate portions 304 and 305, and both end portions 303 a and 303 b of the pedestal portion 303 are connected to the pasting base 135. The exposed part is buried.

  While the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 135, the fracture base portion 312 is accommodated in the sticking base 135. If attention is paid to the pasting area 136, it can be said that the destruction base portion 312 is arranged on the opposite side of the pasting base 135 where the pasting area 136 is provided.

  Although the destruction base portion 312 has a plate shape as described above, as shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, it is orthogonal to both the direction between the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 and the thickness direction. A tapered region 315 is formed so as to taper from an intermediate position in the width direction that is a direction toward one end side in the width direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, the tip of the tapered region 315 is formed so as to be inclined so as to intersect with the direction between the pair of arm portions 313 and 314.

  The breaking member 311 having the above-described configuration is attached to the sticking base 135 after the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined and the relative positions of the both structures 111 and 112 become the initial position. In detail, the configuration related to this mounting is shown in FIG. 24, when both the structural bodies 111 and 112 are combined and the relative positions of the both structural bodies 111 and 112 become the initial positions, as shown in FIG. The sticking base 135 is formed in a state in which the spaces 303a and 303b are exposed and the space between the pedestal part 303 and the front-side sticking plate part 141 is opened through the boundary 306 of the side surface region 139. Then, with respect to the sticking base 135, an end opposite to the tapered region 315 side is set as an insertion destination side, and a pair of arm portions 313 and 314 slide on both end portions 303a and 303b of the pedestal portion 303. In this way, the breaking member 311 is inserted. In this case, the movement in the insertion direction is the periphery of the concave portion formed to expose both end portions 303a and 303b of the pedestal portion 303 in the front-side opposing plate portions 301 and 302, and the insertion side of the breaking member 311 When the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are brought into contact with the peripheral edge, further movement is restricted. This restricted position is the position where the breaking member 311 is installed, and this position is the initial position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of screw holes 316 are formed in the pedestal portion 303 so as to open toward the front-side sticking plate portion 141 side, and the screw holes 316 are formed on the front side of the breaking member 311. A through hole 317 is formed on the outside of the sticking plate portion 141 to be opened. The through holes 317 are arranged on the same axis with respect to the corresponding screw holes 316 and the through holes 152. Then, a screw 153 as a fixing member that can be attached and detached using a predetermined tool such as a screwdriver is screwed into each screw hole 316 from the front-side sticking plate portion 141 side, so that the breaking member 311 is attached. The fixing base parts 133 and 134 are fixed in a state where the base plate part 141 and the pedestal part 303 are sandwiched between the fixing base parts 133 and 134. When the screw fixing is completed, the mounting of the breaking member 311 to the sticking base 135 is completed.

  A seal seal 160 is affixed to the affixing base 135 having such a configuration. In addition to FIG. 26, the structure which concerns on the sticking position of the seal seal | sticker 160 is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 27A is a side view showing the sticking base 135 and the periphery thereof, and FIG. 27B is an explanatory view for explaining the positional relationship of the seal seal 160 in the sticking region 136.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 (b), the seal seal 160 is affixed to the affixing region 136. In this case, the sealing seal 160 is bent and attached in a U shape so that the sealing seal 160 is disposed across the front surface region 137, the side surface region 139, and the back surface region 138 in the pasting region 136. The seal seal 160 covers substantially the entire front surface region 137, substantially the entire side surface region 139, and substantially the entire back surface region 138. Therefore, the opening of each through hole 152 formed in the front surface region 137 and the opening of each screw hole 316 formed in the back surface region 138 are covered with the seal seal 160 and the front side fixing in the side surface region 139 is performed. A substantially whole boundary 306 between the base portion 133 and the back side fixed base portion 134 is covered with a seal seal 160. That is, the seal seal 160 is affixed across the boundary 306 between the front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134. Thereby, the opening operation of the substrate box 102 is obstructed by the seal seal 160. Therefore, it is difficult to open the substrate box 102 without cutting the seal seal 160 along the boundary 140 or removing the seal seal 160.

  The positional relationship between the breaking member 311 and the seal seal 160 will be described. The seal seal 160 is disposed at a position separated from the breaking member 311. Further, since the breaking member 311 is provided so as to be slidable toward the boundary 306, it can be said that the seal seal 160 is provided at a midpoint of the sliding movement of the breaking member 311.

  Next, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 306 will be described.

  Since the antenna member 172 is disposed across the side surface region 139 from the front surface region 137 to the back surface region 138, the antenna member 172 straddles the boundary 306 between the front side fixed base portion 133 and the back side fixed base portion 134 in the side surface region 139. Since the breaking member 311 is slidably provided toward the boundary 306 side, the antenna member 172 is disposed in the middle of the sliding movement of the breaking member 311. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, the first slit portion 174 straddles the boundary 306. As a result, when the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 306, the area where the first slit portion 174 is formed in the antenna member 172 is cut, and normal communication is impossible in the IC tag 163.

  Incidentally, also in the present embodiment, a surrounding portion 321 is formed on the sticking base 135 so as to partition the sticking region 136. In this case, a part of the surrounding portion 321 is formed by the front side opposing plate portions 301 and 302 and the back side opposing plate portions 304 and 305, but the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 correspond to each other as described above. The pair of arm portions 313 and 314 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321. The pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are disposed between the front side opposing plate portions 301 and 302 and the back side opposing plate portions 304 and 305. The operation and effect obtained by forming the surrounding portion 321 is as described in the first embodiment.

  The cover member 331 is attached to the sticking base 135 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck as described above. The cover member 331 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28A is a perspective view of the cover member 331, and FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the cover member 331 is attached to the substrate box 102.

  The cover member 331 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 332 as shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. A plurality of (specifically, five) wall portions that form a partition can transmit radio waves into and out of the cover member 331. As shown in FIG. 28A, an opening 333 is formed in the cover member 331 so that one of the six faces of the rectangular parallelepiped is not provided, and an internal space 332 is formed through the opening 333. The cover member 331 is open to the outside. Further, the opening 333 is formed so that the peripheral edge thereof enters the inside of each of the pair of wall portions 334 and 335 facing each other with the opening 333 interposed therebetween.

  The internal space 332 of the cover member 331 is formed to have a size that can accommodate the entire sticking base 135 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck. The opening 333 is formed in a size that allows the sticking base 135 to be inserted into the internal space 332 from the protruding tip side of the sticking base 135.

  The distance between the two wall portions 334 and 335 of the cover member 331 is equal to or greater than the distance between the pair of opposed plate portions 301, 302, 304, and 305 facing each other across the pasting region 136 in the pasting base 135. It is set slightly larger. A pair of claw portions 336 and 337 are integrally formed on both the wall portions 334 and 335 so as to protrude from the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion 333 toward the sticking base 135 (note that the claw portion 337 is shown in FIG. see b)). The claw portions 336 and 337 have free ends at their distal ends, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  In correspondence with the claw portions 336 and 337, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a), 25 (b) and 26, the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 integrated with the pasting base 135 are The receiving portions 338 and 339 are integrally formed so as to protrude outward. The cover member 331 is installed in the substrate box 102 so that the sticking base 135 is inserted into the internal space 332 through the opening 333. At the time of installation, the claw portions 336 and 337 are elastically deformed so as to escape outward by coming into contact with the corresponding receiving portions 338 and 339 from the original side in the mounting direction, and hook portions of the claw portions 336 and 337 are hooked. However, when it reaches the front side in the mounting direction with respect to the receiving portions 338 and 339, it returns to the natural state by the restoring force. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the tip hook portions of the claw portions 336 and 337 come into contact with the end portions of the receiving portions 338 and 339 from the front side in the mounting direction, and in the reverse direction of the mounting direction. Even if an attempt is made to move the cover member 331 in a certain removal direction, this is prevented by the contact. The cover member 331 is fixed to the substrate box 102 by the engagement between the claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339.

  Here, the engaging portions of the claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339 are respectively arranged outside the sticking base 135 so that they can be accessed from the outside. Specifically, the engagement portion is exposed to the outside, and a predetermined space is formed between the cover member 331 and the coupling bodies 131 and 132 so that the engagement portion can be accessed. ing.

  Since the cover member 331 is fixed to the substrate box 102, substantially the entire sticking base 135 in which the breaking member 311 is integrated is surrounded by the cover member 331. Specifically, the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 331 is in contact with or close to the surrounding portion 321 on the surface region 137 side, the side surface region 139 side, and the back surface region side of the pasting region 136.

  On the surface side wall portion 340 facing the surface region 137 in the cover member 331, a fixing release hole 341 is formed so as to be disposed on the same axis as each through hole 152 of the sticking base 135. However, a seal seal 160 is interposed between the hole 341 for releasing the lock and the head of the screw 153 screwed into the corresponding through hole 152. The unlocking hole 341 is used when the screw 153 is removed prior to opening the internal space of the board box 102. The details of this operation will be described later.

  Since the cover member 331 substantially surrounds the entire sticking base 135, the seal seal 160 is entirely surrounded by the cover member 331. As a result, the seal seal 160 is protected by the cover member 331. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the shrink film is thermally shrunk to cover the pachinko machine 10, but in a configuration in which the main control device 63 is exposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the shrink film It is preferable to suppress the influence on the seal 160 and the IC tag 163 such as a load in the shrinking direction and heat when the heat shrinks, and the influence is reduced by providing the cover member 331 as described above. be able to.

  Since the cover member 331 is colorless and transparent, the seal seal 160 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 331 in the configuration in which the cover member 331 is provided as described above. However, the cover member 331 is not limited to colorless and transparent, and the cover member 331 may be transparent enough to visually confirm the seal seal 160 from the outside of the cover member 331. What is necessary is just to be colored and transparent. Further, the seal seal 160 cannot be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 331, but the cover member 331 may be made non-transparent. In this case, since the inside of the space surrounded by the cover member 331 cannot be confirmed from the outside, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to take measures against the cover member 331.

  The cover member 331 is formed so as to be able to transmit radio waves, and no member for blocking radio waves is provided between the IC tag 163 of the seal seal 160 and the cover member 331. Therefore, the manager or the like of the game hall can perform the reading operation without removing the cover member 331 when reading the ID information from the IC tag 163.

  In this case, when the ID information is read from the IC tag 163, the game hall manager or the like performs the ID information reading operation easily and reliably by bringing the tip of the reader device into contact with or close to the cover member 331. be able to. That is, the cover member 331 functions as a positioning unit for reading ID information.

  Since the IC tag 163 is covered with the cover member 331, when a game hall manager or the like tries to bring the reader device closer to the IC tag 163, the IC tag 163 comes into contact with the cover member 331 and cannot be further approached. In other words, the reading position when the identification information is read by the reader device with respect to the IC tag 163 is prevented from approaching a predetermined distance (distance between the cover member 331 and the IC tag 163) from the IC tag 163. Is limited to. Accordingly, if it is determined that the reading operation is performed in a state where the tip of the reader device is in contact with or close to the cover member 331, the antenna member 172 is cut to shorten the communicable distance of the IC tag 163. If this happens, the ID information cannot be read by the reader device. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the fact that the antenna member 172 has been cut, and it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an unauthorized opening operation of the board box 102 has been performed.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 102 will be described. FIGS. 29A to 29C are explanatory diagrams for explaining a procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 102 is opened.

  As already described, sliding the other of the constituent members 111 and 112 in the separating direction for opening is the screw fixing of the front side fixing base portion 133 and the back side fixing base portion 134 constituting the sticking base 135. And it is restricted by the cover member 331 and obstructed by the seal seal 160. For this reason, as a pre-process for performing the slide movement, the separation operation of the cover member 331, the screw fixation release, and the inhibition by the seal seal 160 are released.

  Here, the cover member 331 is attached to the substrate box 102 by engaging with the breaking member 311, and the breaking member 311 is fixed to the pasting base 135 by screw fixing, so the cover member The screw fixing of the breaking member 311 is released as a pretreatment for separation of 331. Specifically, the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted from the fixing release hole 341 of the cover member 331. Then, the seal seal 160 covering the head of the screw 153 is pierced by the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver, and the tip is inserted into the head of the screw 153. As shown in FIG. To leave. As already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the through-hole 152 for inserting the screw 153, when the tip of the tool is inserted into the head of the screw 153, the seal seal 160 Not only a part of the damage but also a part of the antenna member 172 is broken.

  When the screw 153 is detached as described above, the breaking member 311 can be separated from the sticking base 135, and accordingly, the cover member 331 can be separated from the sticking base 135. In this case, since the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 are engaged, if the cover member 331 is slid and moved in the direction opposite to the mounting direction at the time of installation as the separation direction (removal direction), the breakage is caused. The member 311 also moves in the separation direction integrally.

  As shown in FIG. 29C, when the cover member 331 is separated from the sticking base 135, the breaking member 311 is also removed from the sticking base 135 through the boundary 140 between the two fixed base portions 133 and 134 in the side region 139 of the sticking base 135. To be separated. In this case, since the seal seal 160 is pasted so as to straddle the boundary 140, the seal seal 160 is cut along with the slide movement from the inside of the pasting base 135 of the breaking member 311 to the outside, Since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is also provided so as to straddle the boundary 140, the antenna member 172 is cut as the destruction member 311 slides. As a result, the obstruction of the opening operation by the seal seal 160 is released. Therefore, both the constituent members 111 and 112 can be slid and the internal space of the substrate box 102 can be opened. Therefore, it is possible to inspect the CPU chip 103 and the like.

  Incidentally, as already described, a tapered region 315 is formed in the destruction base portion 312 of the breaking member 311, and when the breaking member 311 is separated, the tip of the tapered region 315 becomes the leading side in the separation direction. . Therefore, a sharp point comes into contact with the seal seal 160 and the antenna member 172, and the sealing member 160 and the antenna member 172 can be easily cut, and the cover member 331 can be easily separated. . Further, since the tip of the tapered region 315 is inclined, the entire tip does not contact the seal seal 160 and the antenna member 172 at the same time, but the contact range at the tip gradually increases. Also in this respect, the cover member 331 can be easily separated as the sealing seal 160 and the antenna member 172 are easily cut.

  Note that the tip of the tapered region 315 may not be inclined and may be parallel to the boundary 140 as long as the function of cutting the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 is exhibited in the breaking member 311. Furthermore, the tapered region 315 may be omitted.

  From the above, the release operation of the board box 102 can be performed by releasing the screw fixing and separating the cover member 331. In this case, the breaking member 311 is slid along with the separation operation of the cover member 331, and the seal seal 160 is cut. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when performing the opening operation.

  In particular, when the cover member 331 for restricting the opening operation is attached, in addition to releasing the screw fixing and cutting the seal seal 160, it is necessary to separate the cover member 331 as a stage before performing the opening operation. For this reason, while an unauthorized opening operation can be suppressed, there is a concern about an increase in the amount of work required for a regular opening operation. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, since the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 are integrated by engagement, the sealing seal 160 is cut along with the separation work of the cover member 331. . Thereby, it is suppressed that workability | operativity in the case of performing opening operation falls extremely.

  Here, the cover member 331 is attached to the board box 102 by engaging with the breaking member 311, and the engaging portion is exposed so as to be accessible from the outside. For this reason, it is possible to release the integration of the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 by applying an external force to the engagement portion to release the engagement, and to separate only the cover member 331 from the substrate box 102. it can. Specifically, the claw portions 336 and 337 are disengaged by applying an external force toward the side opposite to the side from which the tip hook portion protrudes, and the direction opposite to the mounting direction at the time of installation is the separation direction. By sliding the cover member 331 as the (removal direction), only the cover member 331 is separated from the substrate box 102. In this case, the breaking member 311 remains accommodated in the sticking base 135 and does not affect the sealing seal 160 at all. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple inspection in which the cover member 331 is removed from the substrate box 102 without cutting the seal seal 160 and the seal seal 160 and the breaking member 311 are directly confirmed.

  In particular, in a situation where the seal seal 160 and the breaking member 311 are surrounded by the cover member 331, it may be desired to remove the cover member 331 once in order to confirm these directly. In this case, when the cover member 331 is separated while the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 are engaged, the breaking member 311 is separated along with the separation of the cover member 331, and the breaking member 311 is separated. The sealing seal 160 is cut by separating the member 311. If it does so, the inconvenience that the check operation | work of the sealing seal | sticker 160 and the member 311 for destruction cannot be performed suitably will arise.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by performing the separation operation of the cover member 331 in the state where the engagement between the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 is released, the sealing seal 160 is not cut. The cover member 331 can be removed from the substrate box 102. Accordingly, it is possible to easily cope with a case where a simple inspection for directly confirming the seal seal 160 and the breaking member 311 is performed.

  In addition, since the access to the seal seal 160 is restricted by the cover member 331 and the opening operation of the substrate box 102 is restricted, when the opening operation of the substrate box 102 is illegally performed, the cover member 331 is a preliminary step. It is assumed that a separation operation is performed. Here, according to the present embodiment, since the sealing seal 160 is cut in accordance with the separation operation of the cover member 331, the cover member 331 is released without releasing the engagement of the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311. When the separating operation is performed, a cut portion of the seal seal 160 that is not intended for an unauthorized person is formed. Thereby, it can be easily confirmed that an illegal separation operation of the cover member 331 has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to give up an unauthorized opening operation and to suppress a skillful fraud that performs the opening operation without forming a trace.

  30 (a) and 30 (b), a pinching plate portion 351 may be provided so as to sandwich the seal seal 160 in cooperation with the sticking base 135. The sandwiching plate portion 351 is fixed to the opposing plate portions 301, 302, 304, and 305. The plate surface of the sandwiching plate portion 351 is in contact with the sealing seal 160. The sealing seal 160 includes the front-side pasting plate portion 141 and the pedestal portion 303 that constitute the side surface region 139 of the pasting base 135, and the sandwiching plate. It is sandwiched between the parts 351.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, the pinching plate portion 351 is provided with an opening 352 through which the breaking member 311 can pass, and the breaking member 311 is moved in the removal direction by the opening 352. It is movable.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 331 is moved in the removal direction, the breaking member 311 comes into contact with the seal seal 160. In this case, the bending deformation of the seal seal 160 is restricted by the pinching plate portion 351, and the seal seal 160 is sheared so as to be pinched by the pinching plate portion 351 and the breaking member 311. Thereby, even if it is a case where the member 311 for destruction is arrange | positioned inside the sticking base 135, the sealing seal | sticker 160 can be easily cut | disconnected similarly to 1st Embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the breaking member 401 and the cover member 411 is different from that of the second embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the same structure as 2nd (1st) embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  31A is a perspective view of the breaking member 401 in the present embodiment, FIGS. 31B and 31C are perspective views of the cover member 411 in the present embodiment as seen from different directions, and FIG. FIG. 33 (a) is a perspective view showing the cover member 411 and its periphery in the main control device 63, and FIG. 33 (b) is a view showing the cover member 411 in the main control device 63. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode attached to the board | substrate box.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the breaking member 401 is similar to the breaking member 311 of the second embodiment in that the breaking base portion 402, the arm portions 403 and 404, the tapered region 405, the through hole 406, Receiving portions 407 and 408 are provided. Since these are the same as the corresponding portions of the breaking member 311 in the second embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  As in the second embodiment, the breaking member 401 is installed so that the breaking base portion 402 enters the space formed in the sticking base 135, and is screwed at that position. , Attached to the sticking base 135. In this case, as shown in FIG. 32, the arm portions 403 and 404 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321. And the sealing seal | sticker 160 is affixed with respect to the affixing base 135 to which the member 401 for destruction is attached.

  Here, hook portions 409 and 410 are integrally formed with the arm portions 403 and 404, respectively. As shown in FIG. 32, the hook portions 409 and 410 are formed so as to protrude sideways from the arm portions 403 and 404 so as not to interfere with the seal seal 160, and the distal end side is a free end. Thereby, the hook parts 409 and 410 can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  A cover member 411 is attached to the sticking base 135 having such a configuration. As shown in FIG. 31B, the cover member 411 includes an internal space 412, an opening 413, and wall portions 414 and 415. Since these are the same as the corresponding parts in the cover member 331 in the second embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 31C, a screw opening 417 is provided in the surface side wall 416 facing the surface region 137 in the cover member 411 instead of the hole 341. The screw opening 417 is open so that each screw hole 316 of the sticking base 135 can be accessed when the cover member 411 is attached to the board box 102.

  The cover member 411 is attached to the substrate box 102 in a state where the entire pasting base 135 is accommodated in the internal space 412. Specifically, the wall portion that defines the internal space 412 is formed such that the inner wall surface is in contact with or close to the surrounding portion 321, and the opening 413 is large enough to allow the surrounding portion 321 to pass therethrough. Is formed. When the cover member 411 is slid from the opening 413 side toward the sticking base 135, the cover member 411 is disposed at a predetermined mounting position while the inner wall surface slides on the surrounding portion 321 and is attached to the substrate box 102. It is done. The sticking base 135 is accommodated in the internal space 412 through the opening 413.

  In this case, the attachment direction when the cover member 411 is attached to the sticking base 135 is defined as one direction by sliding between the inner wall surface of the cover member 411 and the surrounding portion 321. That is, the path for attaching the cover member 411 to the sticking base 135 is defined.

  The cover member 411 is engaged with both the breaking member 401 and the substrate box 102 in a state where the cover member 411 is attached to the substrate box 102.

  First, the engagement relationship between the cover member 411 and the board box 102 will be described. The two wall portions 414 and 415 of the cover member 411 protrude from the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion 413 toward the sticking base 135 side. The claw portions 421 and 422 are integrally formed. The claw portions 421 and 422 are arranged at positions shifted from the hook portions 409 and 410 in the front and back direction of the sticking base 135. The front and back direction of the sticking base 135 can also be said to be the overlapping direction of the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112.

  In correspondence with the claw portions 421 and 422, as shown in FIG. 32, the front-side opposing plate portions 301 and 302 have a box-side receiving portion 423 protruding outward (on the opposite side to the pasting base 135). 424 is provided (see FIG. 33B for the box side receiving portion 424). The box side receiving portions 423 and 424 have the same protruding amount as the receiving portions 407 and 408 provided on the arm portions 403 and 404 of the breaking member 401. The box side receiving portions 423 and 424 are formed to be continuous with the receiving portions 407 and 408 along the mounting direction. The cover member 411 is attached to the substrate box 102 by the claw portions 421 and 422 engaging with the corresponding box side receiving portions 423 and 424, respectively.

  Specifically, tip hook portions are formed at the tips of the claw portions 421 and 422 so as to protrude toward the direction in which the claw portions 421 and 422 face each other. The distal hook portion is formed so that the amount of protrusion gradually increases from the distal end side toward the proximal end side, and includes inclined surfaces 421a and 422a that incline in the facing direction toward the proximal end side. The inclined surfaces 421a and 422a are disposed so as to contact the receiving portions 407 and 408 when the cover member 411 is attached. Specifically, the inclined surfaces 421a and 422a and the receiving portions 407 and 408 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction of the cover member 411.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 411 is slid in the mounting direction, the receiving portions 407 and 408 and the inclined surfaces 421a and 422a come into contact with each other. In this case, the claw portions 421 and 422 are elastically deformed so as to escape outward (on the side opposite to the pasting base 135) along the inclined surfaces 421a and 422a. And the nail | claw part 421,422 returns to a natural state with a restoring force by reaching | attaining the front side of the attachment direction of the box side receiving part 423,424 via the receiving part 407,408. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the tip hook portions of the claw portions 421 and 422 abut against the end portions of the box side receiving portions 423 and 424 from the front side in the mounting direction, and the reverse of the above mounting direction. Even if the cover member 411 is slid in the detaching direction, which is the direction, it is blocked by the contact. The cover member 411 is attached to the substrate box 102 by the engagement between the claw portions 421 and 422 and the box side receiving portions 423 and 424.

  In addition, since hook part 409,410 and nail | claw part 421,422 are mutually shifted | deviated in the front-back direction of the sticking base 135, these do not interfere in the sliding movement to an attachment direction. In other words, the hook portions 409 and 410 and the claw portions 421 and 422 are disposed so as not to interfere when the cover member 411 is attached. Thereby, even in the situation where the hook portions 409 and 410 are provided, smooth sliding movement is ensured.

  Next, the engagement relationship between the breaking member 401 and the cover member 411 will be described. As shown in FIG. 32, slits 432 and 433 are provided in the side wall portion 431 facing the side surface region 139 of the cover member 411 so as to correspond to the hook portions 409 and 410 of the breaking member 401. The slits 432 and 433 are formed in such a size that the hook portions 409 and 410 can be inserted therethrough. When the hook portions 409 and 410 are engaged with the peripheral portions of the corresponding slits 432 and 433, the engagement relationship between the cover member 411 and the breaking member 401 is generated.

  Specifically, tip portions of the hook portions 409 and 410 are provided with tip hook portions that protrude in a direction opposite to the direction in which the hook portions 409 and 410 face each other. The distal hook portion is formed so that the protruding amount gradually increases from the distal end side toward the proximal end side, and the inclined surfaces 409a and 410a are inclined to the opposite side from the facing direction toward the proximal end side. It has. The inclined surfaces 409a and 410a are disposed so as to contact the edges of the slits 432 and 433 when the cover member 411 is attached. Specifically, the inclined surfaces 409a and 410a and the slits 432 and 433 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction of the cover member 411.

  When the cover member 411 is slid in the mounting direction with respect to the substrate box 102, the inclined surfaces 409a and 410a of the hook portions 409 and 410 abut against the edge portions of the corresponding slits 432 and 433, respectively. In this case, the hook portions 409 and 410 are elastically deformed so as to escape inward (on the sticking base 135 side) along the inclined surfaces 409a and 410a. The cover member 411 is slid while the hook portions 409 and 410 interfere with the inner wall surfaces of the slits 432 and 433. And when the tip hook part of hook parts 409 and 410 passes slits 432 and 433, it will return to a natural state by restoring force. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the tip hook portions of the hook portions 409 and 410 are engaged with the peripheral portions of the slits 432 and 433. Thereby, the cover member 411 is engaged with the breaking member 401, and both are integrated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33A, the hook portions 409 and 410 protrude from the cover member 411 via the slits 432 and 433, so that an external force can be applied.

  According to the substrate box 102 configured as described above, the breaking member 401 is separated by separating the cover member 411 from the substrate box 102 in a state where only the engagement between the cover member 411 and the substrate box 102 is released. The seal seal 160 is cut. Thereby, the inhibition by the seal seal 160 is released, and the cut portion remains as a trace. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an opening operation that does not leave a trace while suppressing a decrease in workability of the opening operation.

  On the other hand, it is possible to separate only the cover member 411 from the substrate box 102 by releasing the engagement between the cover member 411 and the substrate box 102 and further releasing the engagement between the cover member 411 and the breaking member 401. It becomes. Thereby, only the cover member 411 can be replaced, and the cover member 411 can be removed to directly check the presence or absence of the seal seal 160.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the engagement portion between the cover member 411 and the substrate box 102 and the engagement portion between the cover member 411 and the breaking member 311 exist separately. Accordingly, when only the cover member 411 is illegally separated, it is necessary to release the respective engagements, and thus the separation operation of only the cover member 411 is complicated.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the cover member 411 is engaged with both the board box 102 and the breaking member 401. As a result, the cover member 411 and the breaking member 401 can be selectively separated, and an unauthorized separation operation using only the cover member 411 is complicated. Therefore, unauthorized separation operation of only the cover member 411 can be suppressed while enabling simple inspection.

  Hook portions 409 and 410 are provided on the breaking member 401 so as to engage with the cover member 411. The hook portions 409 and 410 are formed so as to protrude laterally from the arm portions 403 and 404 so as not to interfere with the seal seal 160. Thereby, the fall of workability | operativity of the sticking operation | work of the seal seal | sticker 160 which may arise by providing the hook parts 409 and 410 can be suppressed.

  Further, by attaching the cover member 411 to the substrate box 102, the relative positions of the hook portions 409, 410 and the slits 432, 433 so that the engagement relationship between the cover member 411 and the breaking member 401 occurs naturally. Set up a relationship. Thereby, it is not necessary to perform a special operation for integrating the cover member 411 and the breaking member 401. Therefore, the workability | operativity fall of attachment work can be suppressed.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the breaking member 501 and the cover member 511 is different from that of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In addition, about the same structure as 3rd Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  34A is a perspective view of the breaking member 501 in the present embodiment, FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the cover member 511 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 34C is an exploded perspective view of the cover member 511. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the pasting base 135 and its periphery in the main control device 63 in an enlarged manner, FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view showing the cover member 511 and its periphery in the main control device 63, and FIG. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 102.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, the breaking member 501 in the present embodiment includes a breaking base portion 502, arm portions 503 and 504, a tapered region 505, a through hole 506, and receiving portions 507 and 508. About these, since it is the same as that of the corresponding site | part in the member 311 for destruction of 2nd Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As in the second embodiment, the breaking member 501 is installed so that the breaking base portion 502 enters the space formed in the sticking base 135, and is screwed at that position. , Attached to the sticking base 135. In the situation where the breaking member 501 is attached, the arm portions 503 and 504 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321 as shown in FIG. And the sealing seal | sticker 160 is affixed with respect to the affixing base 135 to which the member 501 for destruction is attached.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), hook portions 509 and 510 are integrally formed on the arm portions 503 and 504, respectively. As shown in FIG. 35, the hook portions 509 and 510 are formed so as to protrude laterally from the arm portions 503 and 504 so as not to interfere with the seal seal 160. The hook portions 509 and 510 have free ends on the tip side, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  A cover member 511 is attached to the sticking base 135 having such a configuration. Similarly to the cover member 331 of the second embodiment, the cover member 511 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 512, and a plurality of (specifically, a plurality of (specifically) the internal space 512 is formed. The five wall portions allow radio waves to pass through the inside and outside of the cover member 511 (see FIGS. 34B and 34C). An opening 513 is formed in the cover member 511 so that one of the six surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped is not provided, and the internal space 512 is opened to the outside of the cover member 511 through the opening 513. . Further, the opening 513 is formed so that the peripheral edge thereof enters the inside of each of the pair of wall portions 514 and 515 facing each other with the opening 513 interposed therebetween.

  An internal space 512 of the cover member 511 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the entire sticking base 135 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck and the entire breaking member 501 including the hook portions 509 and 510. Further, the distance between the two wall portions 514 and 515 of the cover member 511 is set to be larger than the distance between the arm portions 503 and 504 of the breaking member 501. Thus, the cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 102 in a state where the breaking member 501 and the pasting base 135 are accommodated in the internal space 512. As described in the third embodiment, the direction in which the cover member 511 is attached when the cover member 511 is attached to the board box 102 is defined.

  A screw opening 517 is provided in the surface side wall 516 corresponding to the surface region 137 in the cover member 511. The screw opening 517 is opened so that each screw hole 316 of the sticking base 135 can be accessed when the cover member 511 is attached to the board box 102.

  In a situation where the cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 102, an engagement relationship is generated between both the breaking member 501 and the substrate box 102.

  First, the engagement relationship between the cover member 511 and the board box 102 will be described. The two wall portions 514 and 515 of the cover member 511 are projected from the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion 513 toward the sticking base 135 side, and a pair of them is formed. Claw portions 521 and 522 are integrally formed, and inclined surfaces 521a and 522a are formed on the claw portions 521 and 522, respectively. The claw portions 521 and 522 engage with the box side receiving portions 423 and 424. The details of the engagement are the same as the engagement between the claw portions 421 and 422 and the box side receiving portions 423 and 424, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the engagement relationship between the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501 will be described. Tip portions of the hook portions 509 and 510 are provided with tip hook portions protruding in directions facing each other. The distal hook portion is formed so that the amount of protrusion gradually increases from the distal end side toward the proximal end side, and includes inclined surfaces 509a and 510a that incline in the facing direction toward the proximal end side.

  Corresponding to the hook portions 509, 510, engagement portions with the hook portions 509, 510 are provided in the internal space 512 of the cover member 511. Specifically, an engagement member 531 is attached to the inside of the cover member 511. The engaging member 531 has a plate shape and is formed in a size that can be accommodated in the internal space 512. The length of the engaging member 531 in the longitudinal direction is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the distance between the arms 503 and 504 of the breaking member 501. The engaging member 531 is fixed to a side wall portion 418 disposed to face the opening 513.

  Specifically, a boss 532 opened toward the opening 513 is provided inside the side wall 418. The boss 532 is formed to protrude from the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 418 toward the opening 513. Corresponding to the boss 532, as shown in FIG. 34C, the engaging member 531 is provided with a through hole 533. The engaging member 531 is arranged so that the through-hole 533 and the boss 532 are on the same axis, and the screw 534 is screwed from the through-hole 533 side in this state, whereby the engaging member 531 is attached to the cover member 511. Fixed. In this case, a gap corresponding to the protruding amount of the boss 532 is formed between the engaging member 531 and the side wall portion 418.

  Here, the protruding amount of the boss 532 is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the tip hook portion of the hook portions 509 and 510. As a result, the gap formed between the engaging member 531 and the side wall portion 418 has such a size that the tip hook portions of the hook portions 509 and 510 can protrude toward the side wall portion 418 side of the engaging member 531. doing.

  The length of the engaging member 531 in the longitudinal direction is set to be smaller than the distance between the walls 514 and 515 of the cover member 511, and the distance between the walls 514 and 515 of the cover member 511. Is set to be larger than the distance between the arm portions 503 and 504, so that gaps 535 and 536 are formed between the engaging member 531 and the wall portions 514 and 515 as shown in FIG. ing.

  The gaps 535 and 536 are formed in such a size that the hook portions 509 and 510 can be inserted. Specifically, the distance between the engaging member 531 and the wall portions 514 and 515 is set to be larger than the thickness of the tip hook portion in the hook portions 509 and 510.

  Here, when the cover member 511 slides in the mounting direction, the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a of the hook portions 509 and 510 are in contact with the edges of the engaging members 531 forming the gaps 535 and 536, respectively. The positional relationship is specified. Specifically, in the mounting direction of the cover member 511, the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a and the edge of the engaging member 531 are arranged on the same line.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 511 is slid in the attachment direction so that the sticking base 135 is accommodated in the internal space 512 via the opening 513, the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a of the hook portions 509 and 510 are provided. And the engaging member 531 come into contact with each other. In this case, the hook portions 509 and 510 are elastically deformed along the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a toward the outside, that is, toward the wall portions 514 and 515, respectively. Then, the tip hook portions of the hook portions 509 and 510 pass through the gaps 535 and 536 and the tip hook portions of the hook portions 509 and 510 reach the side wall portion 418 side of the engaging member 531, so that the natural state is achieved by the restoring force. Return to. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the tip hook portions of the hook portions 509 and 510 engage with the peripheral edge portion of the engaging member 531. Therefore, an engagement relationship between the breaking member 501 and the cover member 511 is generated.

  In this case, the engagement portion between the breaking member 501 and the cover member 511 is accommodated in the internal space 512 of the cover member 511. This makes it difficult to access the engagement location.

  When performing the opening operation, first, the engagement between the cover member 511 and the board box 102 is released. Specifically, the claw portions 521 and 522 are elastically deformed outward. As a result, the engagement between the cover member 511 and the board box 102 is released, and in this state, the cover member 511 is slid in a removal direction that is opposite to the attachment direction. Thereby, the cover member 511 is separated. In this case, since the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501 are integrated, the sealing seal 160 is cut by the breaking member 501 as the cover member 511 is separated. Therefore, the inhibition by the seal seal 160 is released, and the cut portion remains as a trace.

  That is, since the sealing seal 160 is cut along with the separation of the cover member 511, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability of the opening operation that may occur due to the provision of the cover member 511. On the other hand, if the cover member 511 is illegally separated, unintentional cutting is performed when the cover member 511 is separated, and a cut portion is formed as a trace. Can be confirmed.

  As described above, it is difficult to access the engagement portion by housing the engagement portion between the breaking member 501 and the cover member 511 in the internal space 512 of the cover member 511. While it is difficult to separate only 511, it is possible to prevent or give up the act of releasing the engagement so that the breaking member 501 does not follow when the cover member 511 is separated. Therefore, when the cover member 511 is separated, the breaking member 501 follows, and the breaking member 501 follows, so that the sealing seal 160 is cut and the IC tag is cut as described in the second embodiment. Cutting of the antenna member 172 at 163 occurs.

  In particular, the hook portions 509 and 510 are formed so as to protrude laterally from the sticking base 135. Thereby, in the situation where cover member 511 was attached to sticking base 135 from the side, hook parts 509 and 510 are engaged in the position where it entered from opening 513. That is, since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where it enters the back side (side wall portion 418 side) with respect to the opening 513, access to the engaging portion is difficult. Thereby, the illegal act which accesses an engagement location via the opening part 513 of the cover member 511 can be suppressed.

  When the breaking member 501 and the cover member 511 are engaged in the internal space 512 of the cover member 511, an external force that assists the engagement cannot be applied to the hook portions 509 and 510. There is a problem that it is difficult to cope with the case where the engagement between the cover member 511 and the cover member 511 is not suitably performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a are provided on the hook portions 509 and 510, and when the cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 102, the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a are separated by the gap 535. , 536 to define the relative positional relationship so as to contact the edge of the engaging member 531. As a result, the hook portions 509 and 510 are elastically deformed along the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a, and are naturally engaged with the engaging member 531. Therefore, inconveniences that may occur in the configuration in which the engagement location is accommodated in the internal space 512 can be avoided.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the attachment mode of the breaking member 311 and the configuration relating to the cover member 611 are different from those of the second embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the same structure as 2nd Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  FIG. 37A is a partial rear view of the front side structure 111 in a state where the breaking member 311 is attached to the front side sticking plate portion 141, and FIG. 37B shows a state in which the breaking member 311 is rotating. 38 (a) and 38 (b) are perspective views of the cover member 611 in the present embodiment as seen from different directions, and FIG. 39 (a) shows the sticking base 135 and its periphery in the main controller 63. FIG. 39B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the cover member 611 is attached to the substrate box 102.

  As shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, the breaking member 311 is pivotally supported with respect to the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and is formed to be rotatable. Specifically, a shaft portion 601 is provided on the back side of the front-side sticking plate portion 141. The shaft portion 601 has a cylindrical shape, and is provided upright toward the back-side sticking plate portion 144 side. The rising amount of the shaft portion 601 is set to be substantially the same as the thickness direction of the breaking base portion 312 of the breaking member 311. The shaft portion 601 is arranged at the end portion on the front side opposing plate portion 302 side in the front side sticking plate portion 141.

  Corresponding to the shaft portion 601, a bearing hole 602 is provided in the breaking base portion 312 of the breaking member 311. The bearing hole 602 is provided at the end portion on the arm portion 314 side of the fracture base portion 312 so as to correspond to the shaft portion 601. The hole diameter of the bearing hole 602 is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft part 601, and the shaft part 601 is inserted into the bearing hole 602. Thereby, as shown in FIG.37 (b), the member 311 for destruction can be rotated toward the outer side by using the axial support location which consists of the axial part 601 and the bearing hole 602 as a fulcrum. In this state, the breaking member 311 is attached to the board box 102 in a state where it cannot be removed or difficult by combining the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112.

  Specifically, in a state where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined, the breaking member 311 is sandwiched between the front side sticking plate part 141 and the back side sticking plate part 144. Thereby, the movement of the breaking member 311 in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102 is restricted by the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and the back-side sticking plate portion 144. Further, the movement of the breaking member 311 in the direction orthogonal to the thickness direction is restricted by contact with the shaft portion 601. Therefore, it is impossible or difficult to remove the breaking member 311 from the substrate box 102 without opening the substrate box 102.

  Further, in a state where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined, the breaking member 311 is disposed at a position facing the boundary 306 and is rotatable toward the boundary 306 side, Rotation in directions other than the boundary 306 side is limited by contact with the front-side counter plate 301 or the like. The restricted position is set as the initial position. In the initial position, the arm portions 313 and 314 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321 and are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 135 so as to be accessible from the outside.

  In a situation where the breaking member 311 is disposed at the initial position, the screwing of the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and the back-side sticking plate portion 144 is performed, whereby the breaking member 311 rotates to the boundary 306 side. The seal seal 160 is affixed in a state where the movement is restricted and the screw is fixed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), in a situation where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined, the pivotal support portion is covered with a sticking base 135 and a seal seal 160. As a result, the pivot support location is protected by the sticking base 135 and the seal seal 160.

  Next, the cover member 611 according to the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, the cover member 611 is similar to the cover member 331 according to the second embodiment. 612, an opening 613, and walls 614 and 615 are provided. Since these configurations are the same as those of the cover member 331 in the second embodiment, description thereof is omitted. Further, as described in the third embodiment, the attachment direction of the cover member 611 to the board box 102 is defined as one direction.

  The cover member 611 is attached to the substrate box 102 in a state where the sticking base 135 with the seal seal 160 attached is accommodated in the internal space 612. In this case, the cover member 611 is engaged with the substrate box 102.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38A, the walls 614 and 615 are provided with claw portions 621 and 622 protruding inward, and corresponding to the claw portions 621 and 622, FIG. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the front-side counter plate portions 301 and 302 are provided with box-side receiving portions 623 and 624 that protrude outward (the box-side receiving portion 624 is illustrated in FIG. 39 (b)). The box side receiving portions 623 and 624 are attached to the projecting portions 338 and 339 provided on the arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 and the mounting direction, similarly to the box side receiving portions 423 and 424 of the third embodiment. In order to be continuous. The relative positional relationship between the claws 621 and 622 and the projecting portions 338 and 339 is defined by the movement of the cover member 611 in the mounting direction. Specifically, the claw portions 621 and 622 and the protruding portions 338 and 339 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 611 is slid toward the substrate box 102 so that the sticking base 135 in which the breaking member 311 is integrated in the internal space 612 through the opening 613, As shown in FIG. 39B, the claw portions 621 and 622 engage with the corresponding box side receiving portions 623 and 624. Thereby, the cover member 611 is attached to the substrate box 102. The engaging portion is exposed from the sticking base 135 and can be accessed from the outside.

  The claw portions 621 and 622 are provided with inclined surfaces 621a and 622a, respectively. Since the inclined surfaces 621a and 622a are the same as the inclined surfaces 421a and 422a of the claw portions 421 and 422 of the third embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  Here, since there is no cover member 611 corresponding to the hole 341, the screw fixing portion is covered with the cover member 611. Accordingly, it is impossible or difficult to release the screw fixing of the pasting base 135 without removing the cover member 611 from the substrate box 102.

  Moreover, since the sticking base 135 and the seal seal 160 are accommodated in the internal space 612 of the cover member 611, access to them is restricted. Furthermore, since the breaking member 311 is accommodated by the cover member 611, access to the breaking member 311 is restricted.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 102 will be described. 40A to 40C are explanatory views for explaining a procedure in the case where the internal space of the substrate box 102 is opened.

  Since the seal seal 160 and the screw fixing portion of the sticking base 135 and the seal seal 160 are surrounded by the cover member 611, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation of the cover member 611 in order to enable access to them. Since the cover member 611 is engaged with the board box 102, it is necessary to release the engaged state. When releasing the engagement state, the claw portions 621 and 622 of the cover member 611 are elastically deformed toward the outside. Then, the cover member 611 is slid in the removal direction opposite to the attachment direction. As a result, only the cover member 611 is removed from the substrate box 102.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the cover member 611 and the breaking member 311 are not integrated. Specifically, the cover member 611 is not engaged or fixed to the breaking member 311. For this reason, the breaking member 311 is not separated along with the separation operation of the cover member 611. That is, even when the cover member 611 is separated, the breaking member 311 is accommodated in the sticking base 135. Thereby, it is possible to remove the cover member 611 from the substrate box 102 without destroying the seal seal 160, and it is suitable for the replacement of the cover member 611 and the confirmation work for directly confirming the seal seal 160. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40B, the screw 153 is removed. As a result, the breaking member 311 can be rotated and a trace is formed on the seal seal 160.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the breaking member 311 whose rotational movement restriction is released is rotated. Specifically, the arm portion 313 opposite to the arm portion 314 in the vicinity of the pivot support portion of the breaking member 311 is rotated toward the boundary 306 side (outside of the pasting base 135). In this case, since the seal seal 160 is pasted so as to straddle the boundary 306, the portion straddling the boundary 306 of the seal seal 160 is cut with the rotation of the breaking member 311. Thereby, the obstruction by the seal seal 160 is released. Therefore, it is possible to slide the other of the components 111 and 112 in the separating direction with respect to the other.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A shaft support location is provided on the arm portion 314 side at one end of the breaking member 311, and the arm portion 313 provided on the side opposite to the shaft support location as an operation portion (action portion) is rotated toward the boundary 306 side. Accordingly, the tapered region 315 existing between the pivot support portion and the arm portion 313 is configured to abut on the seal seal 160. Thereby, the pressing force with respect to the contact portion between the breaking member 311 and the seal seal 160 becomes larger than the force applied to the arm portion 313. Further, when the breaking member 311 rotates, the breaking base portion 312 comes into contact with the sealing seal 160 in an inclined state. As a result, only the tip portion of the tapered region 315 contacts the seal seal 160, and the contact portion shifts with rotation. Accordingly, the sealing seal 160 is gradually cut. Therefore, the sealing seal 160 and the antenna member 172 can be easily cut.

  The shaft support portion of the breaking member 311 on the sticking base 135 is accommodated by the sticking base 135. Thereby, since it is difficult to access these, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts on the pivot support location.

  Further, since the seal sticker 160 is affixed to the sticking base 135, it is expected that traces due to the destruction of the seal sticker 160 will remain if the shaft support location is accessed via the sticking base 135. . Thereby, the fact of unauthorized access to the pivot support location can be easily confirmed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the breaking member 701 and the cover member 721 is different from that of the second embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  41 is an exploded perspective view showing the sticking base 135 and its surroundings, FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view showing the sticking base 135 and its surroundings, and FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) are explanatory views showing the rotation of the breaking member 701. It is.

  42. As shown in FIG. 42, the breaking member 701 in the present embodiment has a thickness dimension capable of entering the space between the pedestal portion 145 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141, and is opposed to both back sides of the pedestal portion 145. A plate-shaped fracture base portion 702 having a length dimension slightly larger than the distance dimension between the plate portions 304 and 305 is provided. A first arm portion 703 is integrally formed at one end of the destruction base portion 702 in the length direction, and a second arm portion 704 is integrally formed at the other end on the opposite side. The first arm portion 703 is formed in a plate shape extending in a direction orthogonal to the length direction of the destruction base portion 702. The second arm portion 704 protrudes toward the front side of the sticking base 135. The breaking member 701 is attached to the substrate box 102 while being pivotally supported with respect to the sticking base 135.

  Specifically, a shaft portion 711 is provided on the outside of the sticking base 135, specifically, between the front-side facing plate portion 302 and the first combined body 131. The shaft portion 711 has an annular shape with the front / back direction of the sticking base 135 as an axis, and is provided outside the front-side structure 111.

  As shown in FIG. 42, a receiving portion 712 is provided at one end of the breaking member 701 corresponding to the shaft portion 711. The receiving portion 712 is provided outside the first arm portion 703. The receiving part 712 includes a bearing hole 713 penetrating in the front and back direction of the sticking base 135. The inner diameter of the bearing hole 713 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 711. Thereby, the shaft portion 711 can be inserted into the bearing hole 713. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the breaking member 701 is attached to the sticking base 135 in a state where the shaft portion 711 is inserted into the bearing hole 713, and the bearing hole The shaft support 711 into which the shaft portion 711 is inserted can be rotated to the outside of the sticking base 135 with the shaft support 713 as a fulcrum.

  Specifically, the shaft portion 711 is inserted into the bearing hole 713 in a state where the breaking member 701 is inclined with respect to the sticking base 135 so that the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and the breaking base portion 702 do not interfere with each other. As shown, the breaking member 701 is attached from the front side of the sticking base 135. Then, the breaking member 701 is rotated toward the sticking base 135. Then, the front side sticking plate part 141 is sandwiched between the first arm part 703 and the second arm part 704, and the destruction base part 702 is inserted between the base part 145 and the front side sticking plate part 141. The member 701 for destruction is arrange | positioned.

  Corresponding to the first arm portion 703 of the breaking member 701, the side portion of the front facing plate portion 302 is recessed. Thereby, a part of edge part close | similar to the front side opposing board part 302 of the board part 141 for front side sticking is exposed. And the distance from a shaft support location to the 1st arm part 703 is set so that the 1st arm part 703 may be arrange | positioned in the space produced by having been dented. Accordingly, when the breaking member 701 rotates when the breaking member 701 is attached to the sticking base 135, the first arm portion 703 does not interfere with the front-side opposing plate portion 302, and the breaking member 701 is disposed at the initial position. In this situation, the first arm portion 703 is continuous with the front-side facing plate portion 302 and the back-side facing plate portion 305 and comes into contact with the exposed portion of the front-side sticking plate portion 141.

  Corresponding to the second arm portion 704, a notch is formed in a corner portion on the front side of the sticking base 135 on the side surface region 139 side in the front side opposing plate portion 301. Due to the notch, a part of the end portion of the front-side sticking plate portion 141 adjacent to the front-side facing plate portion 301 is exposed. And the distance from a shaft support location to the 2nd arm part 704 is set so that the 2nd arm part 704 may fit in a notch part. Accordingly, when the breaking member 701 rotates when the breaking member 701 is attached to the sticking base 135, the second arm portion 704 does not interfere with the front-side opposing plate portion 301, and the breaking member 701 is disposed at the initial position. In this situation, the second arm portion 704 and the front-side facing plate portion 301 are continuous and abut the exposed portion of the front-side sticking plate portion 141.

  Here, the contact between the second arm portion 704 and the front-side counter plate portion 301 and the contact between the first arm portion 703 and the front-side counter plate portion 302 cause further rotation in the mounting direction of the breaking member 701. It is regulated. The restricted position is set as the initial position. That is, the destruction member 701 can be easily positioned to the initial position by the contact.

  In addition, since the destruction base portion 702 is disposed inside the sticking base 135 at the initial position, even if it is attempted to move the breaking member 701 in the front and back direction of the sticking base 135, the destruction base portion 702 and the sticking base 135 The movement is regulated by the contact with the front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134 that constitute the. In other words, the breaking member 701 cannot be removed from the substrate box 102 unless the breaking base portion 702 rotates to a position where it does not interfere with the sticking base 135 (front-side fixed base portion 133). That is, it can be said that the breaking member 701 cannot be removed from the substrate box 102 without rotating itself.

  In the situation where the breaking member 701 is disposed at the initial position, the front-side sticking plate portion 141 is sandwiched between the first arm portion 703 and the second arm portion 704. Further, the first arm portion 703 and the second arm portion 704 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321, and the exposed portions of the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and the like are the first arm portion 703 and the second arm portion 704. Covered by.

  As shown in FIG. 41, a handle 714 is provided on the second arm portion 704 of the breaking member 701. The handle 714 is integrally formed so as to protrude laterally from an end on the back side of the second arm portion 704. In a situation where the breaking member 701 is disposed at the initial position, the handle 714 is disposed at a position facing the boundary 306 (destruction base portion 702), and a predetermined gap is provided between the handle 714 and the pasting base 135. Is formed. The thickness of the handle 714 is substantially the same as the boundary 306. The handle 714 has an annular shape and is formed so as to be graspable. By having the handle 714, the handle 714 can be easily rotated toward the boundary 306 (in the direction opposite to the rotation direction when the breaking member 701 is attached).

  Note that a tapered region 705 and a through hole 706 are formed in the fracture base portion 702. Since the tapered region 705 and the through hole 706 are the same as those in the second embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  The sticking base 135 is fixed with screws in a state where the breaking member 701 is disposed at the initial position. Specifically, the screw 153 is screwed into the communication hole of the through holes 152 and 706 and the screw hole 316. Thereby, the front side fixed base part 133 and the back side fixed base part 134 are fixed, and the member 701 for destruction is further fixed. Therefore, the sliding movement of the front side structural body 111 and the back side structural body 112 is restricted, and the rotational movement of the breaking member 701 is further restricted. A seal seal 160 is affixed to the affixing base 135 fixed with screws.

  At the time of attachment, the seal seal 160 is attached so as to enter the gap between the handle 714 and the attachment base 135 so that the handle 714 and the seal seal 160 do not interfere with each other. Thereby, since the seal seal | sticker 160 is affixed over the boundary 306, the slide movement of the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 is inhibited.

  A cover member 721 is attached to the sticking base 135 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck. The cover member 721 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  44 (a) is a perspective view showing the cover member 721 and its periphery in the substrate box 102, FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the substrate box 102, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view showing the sticking base 135 and its periphery. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are perspective views of the cover member 721 as seen from different directions.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the cover member 721 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 722, and a plurality of (specifically, five) cover members 721 are defined. The wall portion allows radio waves to pass through the inside and outside of the cover member 721. The cover member 721 is provided with an opening 723, and the internal space 722 is released to the outside of the cover member 721 through the opening 723.

  An internal space 722 of the cover member 721 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a part of the sticking base 135 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck and the first combined body 131. The opening 723 is formed in accordance with the shape of the pasting base 135 and the first combined body 131 so that the pasting base 135 and the first combined body 131 can enter the internal space 722. Specifically, the opening 723 is formed such that the peripheral edge of the opening 723 is in contact with or close to the surrounding part 321 and the first combined body 131. The cover member 721 is slid so that the surrounding portion 321 and the first combined body 131 enter the opening 723, so that a part of the pasting base 135 and the first combined body 131 are accommodated in the internal space 722. A cover member 721 is attached to the substrate box 102.

  As the cover member 721 slides, the peripheral edge forming the opening 723 and the surrounding part 321 slide. Thereby, the attachment direction of the cover member 721 to the board box 102 is defined in one direction, and the removal direction is also defined in one direction (the direction opposite to the removal direction).

  Further, since the opening 723 is formed in accordance with the shape of the surrounding portion 321 and the like, the opening 723 is blocked by the surrounding portion 321 and the first combined body 131 in the situation where the cover member 721 is attached. Yes. This makes it difficult to insert a jig through the opening 723.

  Here, in the situation where the cover member 721 is arranged, the rotation of the breaking member 701 is not restricted by the cover member 721. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a slit 732 is provided in the side wall portion 731 facing the side region 139 so as to correspond to the handle 714. As shown in FIG. 44B, the slit 732 is disposed at a position facing the boundary 306. The slit 732 is provided on a path along which the breaking member 701 rotates. The slit 732 is formed in a size that allows the destruction base portion 702 and the handle 714 to pass therethrough. Specifically, the length dimension in the longitudinal direction of the slit 732 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the length dimension of the fracture base portion 702, and the length dimension in the short direction of the slit 732 is the fracture base. The thickness dimension of the part 702 and the handle 714 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than that. In the situation where the cover member 721 is disposed, the handle 714 protrudes through the slit 732.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, in the situation where the breaking member 701 is disposed at the initial position, the second arm portion 704 is directed outward (on the opposite side to the pasting base 135) from the front-side facing plate portion 301. The side wall portion 731 is provided with a second arm portion opening 733 corresponding to the protrusion. The second arm portion opening 733 is formed at one end of the slit 732 and at the corner of the side wall portion 731. The second arm portion opening 733 is formed in a size that allows the second arm portion 704 to pass therethrough. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the length dimension in the front and back direction of the adhesive base 135 in the second arm part opening 733 is the same as or equal to the corresponding second arm part 704. Is set to be slightly larger. The wall portion 734 that defines the internal space 722 so that the length dimension in the direction perpendicular to the front and back direction of the second arm portion opening 733 is larger than the projecting dimension of the corresponding second arm portion 704. The corner portion corresponding to the second arm portion 704 is expanded outward. In the situation where the cover member 721 is disposed, the second arm portion 704 is disposed in the second arm portion opening 733.

  Further, a rotation opening 735 is formed on the other end side of the slit 732 so as to correspond to the pivotal support portion between the breaking member 701 and the pasting base 135. The rotation opening 735 is formed in a size that allows the first arm portion 703 to pass therethrough so that the first arm portion 703 and the cover member 721 do not interfere when the breaking member 701 rotates.

  From the above, even when the cover member 721 is attached to the sticking base 135, the cover member 721 can be rotated when the screw fixing of the breaking member 701 is released. ing. In this case, since the handle 714 protrudes through the slit 732 of the cover member 721, a state in which it is easy to grasp is secured.

  Further, in the situation where the cover member 721 is disposed, the second arm portion 704 and the pivot support location are accommodated in the internal space 722 of the cover member 721. This restricts access to them.

  In a situation where the cover member 721 is disposed at such a position, the cover member 721 is engaged with the breaking member 701. Specifically, a first engagement and a second engagement are generated between the cover member 721 and the breaking member 701.

  First, the first engagement will be described with reference to FIG. 47 in addition to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first engagement, and is a diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 44 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 45, the wall portion 734 is provided with a first hook portion 741. As shown in FIG. 47, the first hook portion 741 protrudes toward the front side opposing plate portion 301 side. The first hook portion 741 is engaged with the second arm portion 704.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46B, the periphery of the first hook portion 741 is cut out except for the end portion on the opening 723 side. Accordingly, the first hook portion 741 is formed to be elastically deformable with the side wall portion 731 side as a free end. Moreover, the 1st hook part 741 is provided with the hook side inclined surface 741a which inclines to the sticking base 135 side as it goes to the side wall part 731 side. In correspondence with the hook side inclined surface 741a, a second arm portion side inclined surface 704a having the same inclination as the hook side inclined surface 741a is provided on the second arm portion opening 733 side in the second arm portion 704. Is provided. When the cover member 721 slides in the mounting direction, the relative positional relationship between the hook side inclined surface 741a and the second arm portion side inclined surface 704a is defined. Specifically, the hook side inclined surface 741a and the second arm part side inclined surface 704a are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the cover member 721 is slid in the mounting direction, the two members come into contact with each other, and the first hook portion 741 is elastically deformed so as to escape to the outside (the side opposite to the pasting base 135). Then, when the first hook portion 741 reaches the front side in the attachment direction with respect to the second arm portion 704, the first hook portion 741 returns to the natural state by the restoring force. As a result, as shown in FIG. 47, the first hook portion 741 abuts the end surface on the front side in the attachment direction of the second arm portion 704, and therefore the cover member 721 is moved in the removal direction that is the reverse direction of the attachment direction. Even if it tries to make it, it will be regulated by the said contact.

  In the situation where the cover member 721 is disposed, the second arm portion 704 is surrounded by a wall portion that defines and forms the second arm portion opening 733. Thereby, access to the second arm portion 704 is restricted, and access to the engaging portion between the second arm portion 704 and the first hook portion 741 is restricted. Furthermore, since the end surface of the second arm portion 704 that is in contact with the first hook portion 741 is disposed on the front side in the attachment direction, the engaging portion can be accessed through the second arm portion opening 733. It has become difficult.

  Next, the second engagement will be described with reference to FIG. 48 in addition to FIGS. 45 and 46. 48A is a front view showing the cover member 721 and its periphery in the substrate box 102, and FIG. 48B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 48A.

  The front side wall 751 disposed on the front side of the cover member 721 is provided with a second hook portion 752 that protrudes from the peripheral edge of the opening 723 toward the attachment direction. As shown in FIG. 46B, the second hook portion 752 has a free end on the tip side, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied. As shown in FIG. 48A, the second hook portion 752 is disposed at a position corresponding to the shaft support location and engages with the receiving portion 712.

  Specifically, the second hook portion 752 is provided with a tip hook portion protruding toward the receiving portion 712 side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 48B, the receiving portion 712 is provided with a protrusion 753 corresponding to the second hook portion 752. The protrusion 753 is disposed at a position where the protrusion 753 engages with the second hook portion 752 in a state where the breaking member 701 is at the initial position. Specifically, the protrusion 753 is disposed on the attachment direction side of the cover member 721 in a situation where the breaking member 701 is in the initial position. Then, when the cover member 721 is slid in the attachment direction, the relative positional relationship between the second hook portion 752 and the protrusion 753 is set. Specifically, the second hook portion 752 and the protrusion 753 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction of the cover member 721.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 721 is slid in the mounting direction, the tip hook portion of the second hook portion 752 comes into contact with the receiving portion 712, and the second hook portion 752 is brought into contact with the front side of the pasting base 135 by the contact. It is elastically deformed. When the tip hook portion of the second hook portion 752 reaches the front side in the attachment direction with respect to the protrusion 753 of the receiving portion 712, the second hook portion 752 returns to the natural state by the restoring force. As a result, as shown in FIG. 48B, the second hook portion 752 and the protrusion 753 are engaged.

  The tip hook portion of the second hook portion 752 is provided with a hook side inclined surface 752a as shown in FIG. 46 (b), and the front side peripheral portion of the receiving portion 712 has As shown in FIG. 48B, a receiving portion side inclined surface 712a is provided. Since these relationships and their effects are the same as those of the hook-side inclined surface 741a and the second arm portion-side inclined surface 704a, description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the influence of the rotation of the breaking member 701 on the engagement will be described.

  First, the first engagement will be described. When the breaking member 701 rotates, the second arm portion 704 also rotates and moves to the side opposite to the side where the first hook portion 741 is disposed. As a result, the engagement relationship between the second arm portion 704 and the first hook portion 741 does not occur. Therefore, the sliding movement of the cover member 721 in the removal direction is not hindered. In other words, the second arm portion 704 moves toward the side where the engagement with the first hook portion 741 is released as the breaking member 701 rotates.

  Next, the second engagement will be described. When the breaking member 701 rotates, the rotational direction position of the protrusion 753 changes accordingly. Then, the second hook portion 752 engages with the receiving portion 712 instead of the protrusion 753. In this case, since the play is generated by the amount of the protrusion 753, the engaged state is easily released compared to the state where the protrusion 753 is engaged.

  From the above, when the breaking member 701 rotates, the first engagement is released and the second engagement is easily released.

  Incidentally, when the breaking member 701 rotates, the protrusion 753 and the front-side counter plate portion 302 are formed to contact each other. Specifically, the protrusion amount of the protrusion 753 is set to be larger than the interval between the receiving portion 712 and the front-side counter plate portion 302. Thereby, a rotatable range of the breaking member 701 is defined.

  In the situation where the cover member 721 is attached to the substrate box 102, the first combined body 131 is covered with the cover member 721. As a result, access to the first combined body 131 is restricted. Therefore, cheating on the first combined body 131 can be suppressed. In particular, since the opening of the front coupling portion 131a for inserting the breaking screw is covered by the cover member 721, access to the breaking screw is impossible or difficult.

  Further, a portion of the surface side wall portion 751 facing the surface region 137 is recessed so as to contact the surface region 137. Thus, the seal seal 160 is sandwiched between the front side wall portion 751 and the front side sticking plate portion 141.

  The surface side wall 751 is provided with a fixing release hole 761. Since the hole 761 is the same as the hole 341 in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 102 will be described. 49 and 50 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 102 is opened.

  Since the separation of the cover member 721 is restricted by contact with the breaking member 701, it is necessary to release the restriction prior to the removal of the cover member 721.

  Here, the restriction by the breaking member 701 can be easily released by rotating the breaking member 701. The rotation of the breaking member 701 is limited by screw fixing of the front side fixed base portion 133 and the back side fixed base portion 134. Therefore, first, the screw fixing is released.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted from the hole 761, and the seal seal 160 covering the head of the screw 153 is broken, so that the tip is screwed. Insert 153 and remove the screw 153. As a result, the breaking member 701 can rotate. As already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the through-hole 152 for inserting the screw 153, when the tip of the tool is inserted into the head of the screw 153, the seal seal 160 Not only a part of the damage but also a part of the antenna member 172 is broken.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50B, the breaking member 701 is rotated by holding the handle 714. Thereby, the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 306, and the inhibition of the seal seal 160 is released. In this case, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is also provided so as to straddle the boundary 306, the antenna member 172 is cut along with the rotational movement of the breaking member 701.

  The cutting of the seal seal 160 by rotation will be described in detail. Since the seal seal 160 is disposed at a midway position of the destruction member 701, when the destruction member 701 rotates, the destruction member 701 is connected to the seal seal 160. Abut. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the breaking member 701 slides, a part of the breaking base portion 702 comes into contact with the sealing seal 160, and the contacting portion between the breaking base portion 702 and the sealing seal 160 gradually increases with rotation. In order to shift, cutting is performed with a small contact area. Further, the tapered region 705 that comes into contact with the seal seal 160 is sharply formed, and since the tip thereof is inclined, the contact area is smaller. As a result, the pressing force applied to the seal seal 160 is increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the fracture base portion 702 as the force point and the seal seal 160 is disposed between the shaft support location as the fulcrum and the handle 714 as the action point, the pressing force against the seal seal 160 Becomes larger than the force applied to the handle 714. In this case, since the pivot support location is arranged outside the sticking base 135, the shaft support location and the operating portion (first operation) for applying external force are compared with the configuration in which the pivot support location is arranged inside the sticking base 135. In the fifth embodiment, the distance between the arm portion 313 and the present embodiment the handle 714) is large. As a result, the distance between the fulcrum and the action point is increased, so that the force applied to the sealing seal 160 by the fracture base portion 702 is increased.

  Further, since the handle 714 is provided, the breaking member 701 can be easily grasped and rotated. Thereby, it is possible to suitably apply a force for rotating the breaking member 701.

  From the above, the seal seal 160 can be easily cut.

  Further, since the pivot support portion is disposed outside the sticking base 135 and the fracture base portion 702 is disposed along the boundary 306 inside the sticking base 135, the entire seal seal 160 straddling the boundary 306 is provided. The amount of rotation stroke of the breaking member 701 necessary for cutting is reduced. As a result, the inhibition by the seal seal 160 can be easily released, and the inconvenience that a part of the seal seal 160 remains without being cut can be avoided. Note that the rotation range of the breaking member 701 is defined by the protrusion 753 coming into contact with the front-side counter plate portion 302.

  Then, when the breaking member 701 rotates, the restriction of the sliding movement of the cover member 721 by the second arm portion 704 is released, and the engagement between the second hook portion 752 and the protrusion 753 is released. In this case, the second hook portion 752 is engaged with the receiving portion 712, and play corresponding to the protrusion 753 occurs in the engagement.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50B, the cover member 721 is slid while the second hook portion 752 is elastically deformed to the side from which the engagement is released using the play generated by the rotation. Thereby, the cover member 721 is separated from the sticking base 135.

  In this case, since the seal seal 160 is cut prior to the separation of the cover member 721, the cover member 721 can be more easily compared with the configuration in which the seal seal 160 is cut along with the separation of the cover member 721. Can be separated. That is, as in the case of the second embodiment, when the seal seal 160 is cut along with the separation of the cover member 331, a force necessary to cut the seal seal 160 when the cover member 331 is separated is used. It is necessary to grant. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the cover member 721 and the seal seal 160 do not interfere with each other, so that the cover member 721 can be easily separated.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the relative position of the cover member 721 with respect to the breaking member 701 is adjusted so that the cover member 721 can pass through the second arm portion 704 and the handle 714. Specifically, the relative position of the cover member 721 with respect to the breaking member 701 is determined so that the second arm portion 704 can enter the second arm portion opening 733.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the cover member 721 is slid along the longitudinal direction of the breaking member 701 so that the first hook portion 741 does not come into contact with the second arm portion 704. As a result, the cover member 721 is removed. In the situation where the cover member 721 has been removed, as already described, a cut portion of the seal seal 160 is formed along the boundary 306, and a mark is further formed in which the screw 153 is removed (see FIG. 49C). ). Therefore, it is possible to visually confirm that the opening operation has been performed.

  In the state of FIG. 50B, the cover member 721 is separated together with the breaking member 701 by sliding the breaking member 701 to the front side of the sticking base 135. Accordingly, only the cover member 721 can be separated, and the cover member 721 and the breaking member 701 can be integrally separated. In this case, the integral separation of the cover member 721 and the breaking member 701 can be performed more easily than the separation of the cover member 721 alone.

  That is, in a situation where the mounting direction of the cover member 721 to the board box 102 is defined in one direction by sliding between the peripheral edge of the opening 723 and the surrounding portion 321, the first hook is placed outside the sticking base 135. Part 741, a second arm part 704 that engages with the second hook part 752, and a protrusion 753 are provided, and the first hook part 741 is disposed at a position on the same straight line as the second arm part 704 in the attachment direction, and attached. The second hook portion 752 is disposed at a position on the same straight line as the protrusion 753 in the direction. The hook portions 741 and 752 are provided with hook-side inclined surfaces 741a and 752a for guiding the hook portions 741 and 752 so as to be elastically deformed to the side over the corresponding second arm portion 704 and the receiving portion 712. . Thus, the cover member 721 and the breaking member 701 are naturally engaged with each other by attaching the cover member 721 to the substrate box 102 in a state where the breaking member 701 is disposed in the initial position in advance. In this case, even if the cover member 721 is to be separated and slid in the removal direction, the sliding movement is restricted by contact with the breaking member 701. The restriction is easily released when the breaking member 701 rotates.

  Here, in order to allow the cover member 721 to be separated after the breaking member 701 is rotated, the breaking member 701 is normally set so as to prevent the separation of the cover member 721 after the cover member 721 is first attached. A configuration is possible in which the is attached. In this case, it becomes difficult to accommodate the breaking member 701 in the internal space 722 of the cover member 721 and inside the sticking base 135, and there is a concern about an increase in the size of the substrate box 102. However, if the mounting structure avoids the above inconvenience, there is a concern that the configuration is complicated and the workability of the cover member 721 is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the second arm portion 704 and the protrusion 753 are disposed outside the sticking base 135 in a situation where the breaking member 701 is disposed at the initial position. Correspondingly, the relative positions of the hook portions 741 and 752 are defined. Accordingly, the breaking member 701 is first attached so that the breaking base portion 702 is accommodated in the sticking base 135, and then the cover member 721 is slid in the attaching direction, thereby moving the cover member 721 in the removing direction. The cover member 721 is attached to the substrate box 102 in a state where the cover member 721 is regulated by the breaking member 701. Thereby, the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  Next, the fraud suppression will be described. Since it is difficult to separate the cover member 721 without cutting the seal seal 160, it is difficult to separate the cover member 721 without leaving a trace. . Thereby, since the opening operation which does not leave a trace is difficult, the skillful fraud which performs the opening operation without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

  Further, since the separation work is more complicated than the attachment work of the cover member 721, unauthorized attachment of the cover member 721 can be suppressed while performing the attachment work of the cover member 721 easily.

  In addition, since the region where the impedance matching slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 straddles the boundary 306, the slit 173 is broken as the breaking member 701 rotates. As a result, the IC tag 163 cannot perform normal communication with the separation of the cover member 721 from the sticking base 135.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A breaking member 701 for cutting the seal seal 160 along the boundary 306 is provided. Thereby, the sealing seal | sticker 160 along the boundary 306 can be cut | disconnected easily. Therefore, since the obstruction of the opening operation by the seal seal 160 can be easily released, the opening operation can be easily performed.

  A cover member 721 that is difficult to remove without cutting the sealing seal 160 by the breaking member 701 is provided. Accordingly, it is necessary to cut the seal seal 160 prior to removing the cover member 721. Therefore, when the cover member 721 is removed, the sealing seal 160 is surely cut. Therefore, since the opportunity to cut the seal seal 160 is likely to occur, an illegal act of performing the opening operation without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

  A surface side wall portion 751 was formed so as to sandwich the seal seal 160 between the front side sticking plate portion 141. As a result, the shearing force applied to the sealing seal 160 by the breaking member 701 can be increased. That is, the sealing member 160 can be easily cut by the cover member 721 that restricts the opening operation of the substrate box 102.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a part of the sticking base 135, the breaking member 810, and the cover member 861 are different from those in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the same structure as 1st Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  First, the sticking base 135 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the main control device 63 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front surface side, FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the main control device 63 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows 135 and its periphery.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the front-side fixed base portion 133 is provided with a pair of front-side opposing plate portions 801 and 802 formed so as to sandwich the front-side sticking plate portion 141 therebetween. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52, the back side fixed base part 134 protrudes from the opposite side of the back surface region 138 side to the front side sticking plate part 141 side in the back side sticking plate part 144 and the front side facing plate part 801. , 802 facing each other (the direction in which each fixed base portion 133, 134 protrudes and the direction perpendicular to both the overlapping directions) are provided with a pair of pedestal portions 804, 805 arranged at predetermined intervals. It has been. Between the pair of back-side opposing plate portions 806 and 807 formed so as to sandwich the back-side pasting plate portion 144 therebetween, a pedestal portions 804 and 805 and an extended region 808 sandwiched between both are formed. As shown in FIG. 53, the pedestal portions 804 and 805 project so as to enter between the front-side opposing plate portions 801 and 802, and the projecting side end surfaces of the pedestal portions 804 and 805 are surfaces of the front-side sticking plate portion 141. It is close to the surface opposite to the region 137 side. However, they are not in contact with each other, and a predetermined gap is formed.

  The side surface outside the substrate box 102 in the pedestal portions 804 and 805 is located on the same plane with the predetermined gap between the protruding side end surface of the front-side sticking plate portion 141, and these side surfaces and end surfaces A side region 139 is formed. The predetermined gap is opened to the side by a boundary 809 between the front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134. The boundary 809 is formed along the direction in which the opposing plate portions 801, 802, 806, and 807 face each other, and part of the boundary 809 extends in the front and back direction of the sticking base 135 by the expansion region 808. Thus, a bent portion extending in a direction different from the facing direction, specifically, a direction orthogonal to the boundary 809 is formed.

  In the space between the pedestal portions 804 and 805 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141, a breaking member 810 for cutting the seal seal is provided. The breaking member 810 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 as appropriate in addition to FIGS. 51, 52 and 53.

  54A is a perspective view of the breaking member 810 viewed from the front surface side, FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the breaking member 810 viewed from the back surface side, and FIG. 54C is a back surface of the breaking member 810. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the pasting base 135 and its periphery in an enlarged manner.

  The breaking member 810 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. In addition, as shown in FIG. 51, the breaking member 810 has a thickness dimension capable of entering a space between the pedestal portions 804 and 805 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141 and between the back-side opposing plate portions 806 and 807. A plate-shaped fracture base portion 811 having a length slightly larger than the distance dimension and a pair of arm portions 812 and 813 formed at both ends in the length direction of the fracture base portion 811 are integrally formed.

  The pair of arm portions 812 and 813 protrude toward the back-side sticking plate portion 144 at positions outside the end portions 804a and 805a adjacent to the back-side facing plate portions 806 and 807 in the pedestal portions 804 and 805, respectively. Yes. And the relative position of both is set so that the base parts 804 and 805 arrange | positioned via the expansion area | region 808 between the pair of arm parts 812 and 813 may be pinched | interposed.

  In correspondence with the extended region 808, an extended portion 814 is integrally formed on one end side in the width direction of the fracture base portion 811. As shown in FIG. 54B, the extended portion 814 protrudes in the thickness direction of the destruction base portion 811 and is formed in a plate shape. The extension region 808 is formed in a size that allows the extension part 814 to pass through. Specifically, the distance between the pair of pedestal parts 804 and 805 is larger than the length of the extension part 814 in the longitudinal direction. Is set to When the breaking member 810 is inserted into the sticking base 135 so that the base parts 804 and 805 extended area 808 is disposed between the pair of arm parts 812 and 813, the extended part 814 passes through the extended area 808 and is attached. The relative positions of the extension portion 814 and the extension region 808 are set so as to enter the base 135.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the fracture base portion 811 is provided with a fracture portion 815 projecting in the thickness direction. The fracture portion 815 includes a fracture base portion 816 formed so as to extend in the width direction of the fracture base portion 811, and a fracture protrusion 817 that is provided on one end side of the fracture base portion 816 and protrudes from the fracture base portion 816 in the thickness direction. And. The protruding dimension of the breaking part 815 including the breaking protrusion 817 is larger than the thickness dimension of the front-side sticking plate part 141.

  Corresponding to the protrusion of the breaking portion 815, as shown in FIG. 53, the front-side sticking plate portion 141 is formed with a breaking portion opening 818 through which the breaking portion 815 can pass. The opening part 818 for breaking parts is formed in a size that allows the breaking part 815 to enter. The fracture opening 818 is open to the side and communicates with the boundary 809. When the breaking member 810 is inserted so that the pedestal portions 804 and 805 are disposed between the pair of arm portions 812 and 813, the relative positions of the two are such that the breaking portion 815 fits into the breaking portion opening 818. Is set.

  The breaking member 810 having the above-described configuration is attached to the sticking base 135 after the front-side structure 111 and the back-side structure 112 are combined and the relative positions of both the structures 111 and 112 become the initial position. Specifically, when the two structural members 111 and 112 are combined and the relative position between the two structural members 111 and 112 becomes the initial position, as shown in FIG. 53, the expansion region 808 is opened to the side, Further, the outer end portions of the pedestal portions 804 and 805, more specifically, the end portions 804a and 805a on the back side opposing plate portions 806 and 807 are exposed, and the pedestal portions 804 and 805 and the front side sticking plate portion 141 are exposed. A pasting base 135 is formed in a state where the space between the side areas 139 is opened through the boundary 809. With the side where the expanded portion 814 and the fractured portion 815 are formed as the insertion destination side with respect to the sticking base 135, the expanded portion 814 passes through the expanded region 808 so that the fractured portion 815 enters the fractured portion opening 818. By inserting the breaking member 810 in such a manner, the breaking member 810 enters the sticking base 135. In the following description, the insertion direction of the breaking member 810 is also referred to as an attachment direction.

  The movement of the breaking member 810 in the mounting direction is the periphery of the concave portion formed to expose the end portions 804a and 805a of the pedestal portions 804 and 805 in the front-side opposing plate portions 801 and 802, and the breaking member 810. When the pair of arm portions 812 and 813 come into contact with the peripheral edge on the insertion destination side, further movement is restricted. This restricted position is the initial position of the breaking member 810. In a situation where the breaking member 810 is disposed at the initial position, the expansion portion 814 is accommodated in the sticking base 135. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, the breaking projection 817 of the breaking portion 815 protrudes from the front sticking plate portion 141 to the front side through the breaking portion opening 818.

  Here, the end portions 804a and 805a of the pedestal portions 804 and 805 are not covered with the back-side opposing plate portions 806 and 807 as shown in FIG. Further, the front-side opposing plate portions 801 and 802 are concave on the side region 139 side and the corner portions on the back-side opposing plate portions 806 and 807 side so as not to cover the ends 804a and 805a of the pedestal portions 804 and 805. Not formed. Therefore, the end portions 804a and 805a of the pedestal portions 804 and 805 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 135 as shown in FIG.

  In the above configuration, the pair of arm portions 812 and 813 are arranged with the pedestal portions 804 and 805 sandwiched therebetween as described above, so that the pair of arm portions 812 and 813 are attached to the base as shown in FIG. 135 is exposed to the outside. Further, the pair of arm portions 812 and 813 are disposed between the corresponding front-side facing plate portions 801 and 802 and the back-side facing plate portions 806 and 807, and end portions 804 a and 804 a of the pedestal portions 804 and 805 on the pasting base 135. The portion where 805a is exposed is filled.

  While the pair of arm portions 812 and 813 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 135, the fracture base portion 811 is accommodated in the sticking base 135. If attention is paid to the pasting area 136, it can be said that the destruction base portion 811 is disposed on the opposite side of the pasting base 135 where the pasting area 136 is provided.

  Here, in consideration of the dimensional variation in the manufacturing stage, the length dimension in the longitudinal direction of the fracture base part 811 (distance between the arm parts 812 and 813) is the length dimension of the corresponding sticking base 135 (front side opposing plate part) (Distance between 801 and 802). As a result, the fracture base portion 811 can be accommodated in the sticking base 135 even when dimensional variation occurs in the manufacturing stage. The dimensional difference (play) is set to be small within a range in which dimensional variation can be accommodated. Thereby, since the clearance gap produced between the destruction base part 811 and the sticking base 135 becomes small, the fraudulent act which inserts a jig | tool from the said clearance gap can be suppressed. In this case, the diagonal dimension based on the width dimension and the longitudinal dimension of the fracture base portion 811 is larger than the length dimension of the sticking base 135. For this reason, in the situation where the breaking member 810 is disposed at the initial position, the breaking member 810 may be loosely attached to the sticking base 135.

  In order to suppress the rattling, a regulation structure that regulates the movement of the breaking member 810 is provided inside the sticking base 135. The restriction structure will be described with reference to FIG. 56 in addition to FIG. FIG. 56 is an explanatory view for explaining an attachment mode of the breaking member 810 to the front-side sticking plate portion 141, and is a longitudinal sectional view of the sticking base 135 as seen from the side.

  On the back side of the front-side sticking plate portion 141, that is, on the side opposite to the surface region 137, a pair of restricting convex portions 821 and 822 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the direction in which the front-side facing plate portions 801 and 802 face each other. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 52, the restriction convex portions 821 and 822 protrude toward the back side. The restricting convex portions 821 and 822 are inclined in a direction away from each other, and intersect the direction in which the breaking member 810 is separated from the front side sticking plate portion 141, specifically, the front and back directions of the sticking base 135. Is formed.

  Corresponding to the restricting convex portions 821 and 822, restricting openings 823 and 824 are formed in the breaking member 810 as shown in FIG. The restricting openings 823 and 824 are formed in such a size that the restricting convex parts 821 and 822 can enter, and are opened toward the attachment direction of the breaking member 810. When the breaking member 810 is moved in the mounting direction, the restricting convex portions 821 and 822 enter the restricting opening portions 823 and 824 and come into contact with the breaking base portion 811.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c), in correspondence with the inclination of the restricting convex portions 821 and 822, the first peripheral portion of the restricting opening 823 on the side of the arm portion 812 is provided. An inclined surface 825 is provided, and a second inclined surface 826 is provided on the peripheral edge of the restriction opening 824 on the arm portion 813 side. As shown in FIG. 56, the first inclined surface 825 and the second inclined surface 826 are formed so as to have the same inclination as the inclination of the restricting convex portions 821 and 822, and with respect to the front and back direction of the sticking base 135 Intersect. The restricting convex portions 821 and 822 are in contact with the first inclined surface 825 and the second inclined surface 826 from the front side in the direction in which the back surface of the front-side sticking plate portion 141 faces. Specifically, a part of the breaking member 810 is sandwiched between the front and back sides of the sticking base 135 in a gap formed between the regulating convex portions 821 and 822 and the front-side sticking plate portion 141. Thereby, the movement to the front-back direction of the member 810 for destruction is controlled.

  Further, the abutting surface intersects the direction in which the front-side opposing plate portions 801 and 802 face each other and is inclined in different directions. Thereby, the movement of the member 810 for destruction to the direction where the front side opposing board parts 801 and 802 face is controlled. Specifically, the movement of the breaking member 810 toward the front-side counter plate 802 is restricted by the contact between the restricting convex portion 821 and the first inclined surface 825, and the restricting convex portion 822 and the second convex portion 822 are in contact with each other. Due to the contact with the inclined surface 826, the movement of the breaking member 810 toward the front-side counter plate portion 801 is restricted.

  From the above, the breaking member 810 is attached to the sticking base 135 in a state where rattling is suppressed. In this case, the destruction member 810 is restricted from moving in a direction other than the removal direction. In other words, it can be said that the breaking member 810 is regulated to move in the removal direction by contact between the restricting convex portions 821 and 822 and the restricting opening portions 823 and 824.

  The restriction structure is not limited to the above-described structure. For example, a hook part may be provided instead of the restriction convex parts 821 and 822, and a slit may be provided on the destruction base part 811 so as to engage with the hook part. . In short, it is only necessary to engage with the breaking member 810 and suppress the rattling of the breaking member 810, and its specific shape is arbitrary.

  As shown in FIG. 52, on the back side of the front-side sticking plate portion 141, ridges 830 and 831 that protrude toward the back-side sticking plate portion 144 are provided. The protrusions 830 and 831 extend in a direction perpendicular to the mounting direction, and specifically extend in a direction in which the front-side opposing plate portions 801 and 802 face each other.

  Corresponding to the protrusions 830 and 831, protrusion grooves 832 and 833 are provided on the front side of the fracture base portion 811 (see FIG. 54A). The protrusion grooves 832 and 833 are formed in a size that allows the protrusions 830 and 831 to be fitted therein. In the situation where the breaking member 810 is disposed at the initial position, the protrusions 830 and 831 are fitted in the protrusion grooves 832 and 833. As a result, the breaking member 810 is temporarily fixed to the front-side sticking plate portion 141. Therefore, the member 810 for destruction is previously attached with respect to the board part 141 for front side sticking, and the combination work of the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 can be performed after that.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c), the breakage base portion 811 is directed from the middle position in the width direction toward the side opposite to the side on which the extension portion 814 and the breaking protrusion 817 are provided. A tapered region 841 is formed so that the thickness dimension of the fracture base portion 811 is reduced. The breaking member 810 is arranged so that the tapered region 841 faces the boundary 809 side of the side surface region 139. In this case, the tapered region 841 enters the inside of the sticking base 135 with respect to the boundary 809, and the tapered region 841 does not protrude outside the side surface region 139.

  The tapered region 841 is provided with a plurality of inclined portions inclined with respect to the seal seal attached to the attaching region 136, and the plurality of inclined portions facilitate the cutting of the seal seal. However, the details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 51, each of the pedestal portions 804 and 805 is formed with screw holes 842 that are open toward the front-side sticking plate portion 141 side, and each screw hole 842 is provided on the front side of the breaking member 810. A through hole 843 is formed outside the sticking plate portion 141 for opening. The through holes 843 are arranged on the same axis with respect to the corresponding screw holes 842 and the through holes 152 of the front-side sticking plate portion 141. Then, a screw 153 as a fixing member that can be attached and detached using a predetermined tool such as a screwdriver is screwed into each screw hole 842 from the front-side sticking plate portion 141 side, whereby a breaking member 810 is attached. The fixing base parts 133 and 134 are fixed in a state where the base plate part 141 and the pedestal parts 804 and 805 are sandwiched. By completing the screw fixing, the mounting of the breaking member 810 to the sticking base 135 is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a sealing seal 844 having an IC tag 163 is attached to the sticking base 135 to which the breaking member 810 is attached as described above. Since the configuration of the seal seal 844 is the same as that of the seal seal 160 of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a configuration related to the position where the seal seal 844 is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 in addition to FIG. 55. 57 (a) is a side view showing the sticking base 135 and its periphery, FIG. 57 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the positional relationship of the seal seal 844 in the sticking region 136, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the member 810 for destruction accommodated in the inside, and the sealing sticker 844, Comprising: It is a partial cross section figure at the time of seeing the sticking base 135 from the front side. For convenience of explanation, the corner side cut 177 and the outer edge cut 178 are omitted in FIG. 57B, and the breaking member 810 is shown in a non-sectional state in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 57 (b), the seal seal 844 is affixed to the affixing region 136. In this case, the sealing seal 844 is affixed in a U shape so that the sealing seal 844 is disposed across the front surface region 137, the side surface region 139, and the back surface region 138 in the pasting region 136. The seal seal 844 covers substantially the entire surface region 137, substantially the entire extended region 808, substantially the entire side surface region 139, and substantially the entire back surface region 138. Therefore, the opening of each through hole 152 formed in the front surface region 137 and the opening of each screw hole 842 formed in the back surface region 138 are covered with the seal seal 844, and the front side fixing in the side surface region 139 is performed. The boundary 809 and the extended region 808 between the base portion 133 and the back side fixed base portion 134 are also covered almost entirely with a seal seal 844. That is, the seal seal 844 is pasted across the boundary 809 and the extended region 808 of the front side fixed base part 133 and the back side fixed base part 134. Thereby, the opening operation of the substrate box 102 is hindered by the seal seal 844. Therefore, it is difficult to open the substrate box 102 without cutting a portion of the sealing seal 844 pasted over the boundary 809 and the extended region 808 or removing the sealing seal 844.

  Further, the positional relationship between the breaking member 810 and the sealing seal 844 will be described. The sealing seal 844 is disposed at a position spaced from the breaking member 810. Further, since the breaking member 810 is provided so as to be movable toward the boundary 809, it can be said that the seal seal 844 is provided in the middle of the movement of the breaking member 810.

  As described in the first embodiment, the antenna member 172 in the seal seal 844 is arranged from the one corner side to the diagonal corner side in the base sheet 161, and thus the seal seal 844. Similarly to the above, the antenna member 172 is also arranged in a U shape over the front surface region 137, the side surface region 139, and the back surface region 138. In this case, as described in the first embodiment, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the through-hole 152 is such that the antenna member 172 bridges the periphery of the opening with the opening of the through-hole 152 interposed therebetween. In addition, the end of the antenna member 172 opposite to the end of the antenna member 172 across the opening extends over the opening of one screw hole 842 in the back surface region 138.

  Next, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the extended region 808 will be described.

  The antenna member 172 is disposed across the side surface region 139 from the front surface region 137 to the back surface region 138, and straddles the extended region 808 in the side surface region 139. Specifically, one end of the antenna member 172 sandwiching the IC chip 171 is disposed in the front surface region 137, and the other end is disposed in the back surface region 138. The antenna member 172 includes the extended region. Of the peripheral edge of 808, from the edge on the surface area 137 side to the corner of the extended area 808 formed by the edge on the back surface area 138 side and the edge extending in a direction perpendicular to the edge. It is arranged over. That is, the antenna member 172 is disposed so as to straddle a plurality of locations in the peripheral edge portion of the extended region 808. Thereby, when the part corresponding to the peripheral part of the expansion area | region 808 is cut | disconnected in the seal | sticker seal | sticker 844, several site | parts in the antenna member 172, specifically the site | part of both sides which pinched | interposed IC chip 171 will be cut | disconnected. .

  Further, since the antenna member 172 is disposed from the one corner side to the diagonal corner side of the base sheet 161, the antenna member 172 straddles in an inclined state with respect to the expansion region 808. For this reason, the region of the antenna member 172 that overlaps the extended region 808 is larger than the configuration in which the antenna member 172 is disposed along the front and back direction of the sticking base 135.

  57A and 57B, among the impedance matching slits 173 in the antenna member 172, the end of the first slit portion 174 extending in the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 on the IC chip 171 side is expanded. While disposed in the region 808, the end opposite to the IC chip 171 side is disposed closer to the surface region 137 than the boundary 809. Thereby, when the area | region corresponding to the boundary 809 is cut | disconnected in the seal | sticker seal 844, the area | region in which the 1st slit part 174 was formed in the antenna member 172 is cut | disconnected, and normal communication in an IC tag 163 becomes impossible. .

  Here, a surrounding portion 850 is formed on the pasting base 135 so as to partition the pasting region 136.

  The surrounding portion 850 is formed in the same manner as the surrounding portion 180 described in the first embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 53, a front side stepped portion is formed between a portion of the peripheral portion of the front side structure 111 that is continuous with the front side fixed base portion 133 and a surface region 137 of the front side fixed base portion 133. 850a is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a back-side step portion 850 b is formed between a portion that is continuous with the back-side fixed base portion 134 at the peripheral portion of the back-side structure 112 and a back surface region 138 of the back-side fixed base portion 134. Yes. Further, the front-side fixed base portion 133 is formed with a pair of front-side protrusions 850c facing each other with the surface region 137 and the side surface region 139 sandwiched therebetween, and the back-side fixed base portion 134 has a side surface region 139 and a back surface region. A pair of back-side ridges 850d facing each other with 138 interposed therebetween are formed. A part of the arm portions 812 and 813 of the breaking member 810 is disposed between the front-side ridge portion 850c and the back-side ridge portion 850d, and the front-side ridge portion is interposed via the arm portions 812 and 813. 850c and the back side protrusions 850d are arranged on the same side. That is, a part of the arm portions 812 and 813 constitutes a surrounding portion 850.

  A surrounding portion 850 is formed by the arm portions 812, 813, the front side step portion 850a, the back side step portion 850b, the front side protruding portion 850c, and the back side protruding portion 850d, and the pasting region 136 is surrounded by the surrounding portion 850. The entire periphery of the seal seal 844 that is affixed to the affixing region 136 is close to the enclosing portion 850. Thereby, even if it is going to peel off the sealing seal | sticker 844, the peeling act becomes very difficult.

  When the seal seal 844 is attached, the entire periphery of the seal seal 844 is close to the enclosing portion 850, so that the seal seal 844 does not protrude from the area surrounded by the enclosing portion 850. Thus, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the extended region 808, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the screw hole 842 and the through hole 152, and the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 809 are naturally as described above. .

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the area surrounded by the enclosing portion 850 is wider than the area of the seal seal 844. As a result, when the seal sticker 844 is attached, a predetermined clearance is created at the attachment position, and the workability of the attachment work is improved. In this case, the clearance of the attachment position includes the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the extended region 808, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 809, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the through hole 152, and the antenna member. The positional relationship between 172 and the screw hole 842 is set within a range that is naturally maintained.

  Since the breaking member 810 is arranged so that the tapered region 841 faces the boundary 809 side, the tapered region 841 contacts the sealing seal 844 when the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction. Due to the contact, a pressing force relating to the movement is applied to the seal seal 844, and an area corresponding to the boundary 809 is cut in the seal seal 844.

  Details of the tapered region 841 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 54B, 54C, and 58, a cutting edge 851 sharpened toward the seal seal 844 by a tapered region 841 is provided at the front side in the removal direction of the breaking member 810 in the breaking base portion 811. Is formed. The cutting edge 851 has a plurality of inclined portions formed on the same plane, specifically, a first inclined portion 852 inclined with respect to the sealing seal 844 attached to the side surface region 139, A second inclined portion 853 inclined in a different direction with respect to the first inclined portion 852. The first inclined portion 852 is inclined so as to enter the direction opposite to the removing direction of the breaking member 810 from the end portion on the arm portion 812 side toward the center side in the longitudinal direction of the breaking base portion 811 and the second inclined portion. The portion 853 is inclined so as to enter the direction opposite to the removal direction of the breaking member 810 from the end portion on the arm portion 813 side toward the center side. Due to the inclined portions 852 and 853, the distance from the both ends of the cutting edge 851 to the seal seal 844 is the same in the removing direction of the breaking member 810.

  Further, a saw portion 854 formed by an inclined portion having a larger inclination angle than the first inclined portion 852 and the second inclined portion 853 between the first inclined portion 852 and the second inclined portion 853 in the cutting edge 851. Is provided. The saw portion 854 has blades 855 and 856 that are convex in the removal direction of the breaking member 810 by a pair of inclined portions having opposite inclination directions. The blades 855 and 856 are juxtaposed in the direction in which the arm portions 812 and 813 face each other, and both are continuous.

  The saw portion 854 is continuous with the first inclined portion 852 and the second inclined portion 853. Specifically, one of the pair of inclined portions forming the blade 855 is continuous with the end portion on the center side of the first inclined portion 852, and the valley portion 857 is formed by the blade 855 and the first inclined portion 852. . In addition, one of the pair of inclined portions forming the blade 856 is continuous with the end portion on the center side of the second inclined portion 853, and the valley portion 858 is formed by the blade 856 and the second inclined portion 853. Accordingly, the distance from both ends of the cutting edge 851 to the seal seal 844 in the removing direction of the breaking member 810 is smaller than the distance from the valleys 857 and 858 to the seal seal 844.

  The distance from the tip of the saw portion 854 (tip of the blades 855 and 856) to the seal seal 844 and the distance from both ends of the cutting edge 851 to the seal seal 844 in the removing direction of the breaking member 810 are set to be the same. Yes. Thus, when the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction, both ends of the cutting edge 851 and the tip of the saw portion 854 come into contact with the seal seal 844.

  Here, both ends of the cutting edge 851 are arranged outside the both ends corresponding to the cutting edge 851 in the seal seal 844. Specifically, the length dimension between both ends of the cutting edge 851 (the distance from the end portion on the arm portion 812 side of the first inclined portion 852 to the end portion on the arm portion 813 side of the second inclined portion 853) is: The sealing seal 844 is set to be larger than the corresponding length dimension. Thus, when the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction, the cutting edge 851 comes into contact with both ends of the seal seal 844, and the seal seal 844 is cut from both ends.

  Note that both ends of the cutting edge 851 may be at the same positions as the corresponding ends in the seal seal 844. However, the configuration in which both ends of the cutting edge 851 are on the outside is easier to cope with the positional deviation of the seal seal 844.

  The position of the saw portion 854 is set so that the saw portion 854 contacts the portion of the seal seal 844 where the antenna member 172 is provided when the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58, the cutting edge 851 is sawed at a position opposite to the removal direction of the breaking member 810 with respect to the range Z corresponding to the place where the antenna member 172 is disposed. A portion 854 is provided. The range Z is a range corresponding to the clearance of the attachment position generated between the enclosing portion 850 and the seal seal 844, and specifically, is a range in which the position of the antenna member 172 varies due to the clearance. A plurality of blades 855 and 856 are provided so that the saw portion 854 is formed at least over a range facing the range Z in the cutting edge 851. As a result, even when the antenna member 172 and the saw portion 854 are misaligned due to the clearance of the pasting position, the saw portion 854 comes into contact with the antenna member 172.

  Next, the relationship between the fracture protrusion 817 and the seal seal 844 will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, the seal protrusion 817 is formed on the seal seal 844 in correspondence with the fact that the fracture protrusion 817 protrudes from the front-side sticking plate portion 141. Is provided with a cutout recess 859 formed by cutting out a part thereof. By sticking the sealing seal 844 so that the breaking protrusion 817 enters the cut-out recess 859, the breaking protrusion 817 comes into contact with the end of the sealing seal 844 when the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction. . Accordingly, the seal seal 844 is cut by the breaking protrusion 817 by the movement of the breaking member 810 in the removing direction.

  In the removal direction of the breaking member 810, the length dimension of the cut-out recess 859 is set so that the distance from the breaking projection 817 to the sealing seal 844 is different from the distance from both ends of the breaking base portion 811 to the sealing seal 844. Specifically, the length dimension of the cut-out recess 859 in the removal direction of the breaking member 810 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by adding the diameter of the breaking projection 817 and the distance from both ends of the breaking base portion 811 to the sealing seal 844. .

  Further, by sticking the seal seal 844 so as not to protrude from the region surrounded by the enclosing portion 850, the positional relationship between the breaking projection 817 and the cut-out recess 859 is set so as to be the above-described relationship. ing. Furthermore, the clearance of the attaching position generated between the enclosing portion 850 and the seal seal 844 is set within a range in which the above-described positional relationship between the fracture protrusion 817 and the cutout recess 859 is naturally maintained.

  Incidentally, an inclined surface 816 a that is inclined with respect to the seal seal 844 attached to the side surface region 139 is formed at a site on the seal seal 844 side of the fracture base portion 816. The inclined surface 816a is inclined so that the thickness dimension of the fracture base portion 816 becomes smaller toward the seal seal 844 side, and the fracture base portion 816 is tapered toward the direction in which the fracture member 810 is removed. . The inclined surface 816a facilitates the cutting of the sealing seal 844 by the fracture base portion 816. This action will be described later.

  The seal seal 844 attached to the attachment region 136 is covered with a cover member 861 at the periphery thereof. The cover member 861 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 59A, 59B and 60 in addition to FIG.

  59A is a perspective view of the cover member 861, FIG. 59B is an explanatory view for explaining a state in which the cover member 861 is attached to the substrate box 102, and FIG. It is sectional drawing. In FIG. 59B, the destructive member 810 is shown in a state other than a cross section for convenience of explanation.

  The cover member 861 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 862 as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. A plurality of (specifically, five) wall portions that form a partition can transmit radio waves into and out of the cover member 861. As shown in FIG. 59A, an opening 863 is formed in the cover member 861 so that one of the six faces of the rectangular parallelepiped is not provided, and an internal space 862 is formed through the opening 863. The cover member 861 is open to the outside. In addition, the opening 863 is formed so that the peripheral edge thereof enters the inside of each of the pair of wall portions 864 and 865 facing each other with the opening 863 interposed therebetween.

  The internal space 862 of the cover member 861 is formed in a size that can accommodate the entire sticking base 135 to which the seal seal 844 is stuck. The opening 863 is formed in a size that allows the sticking base 135 to be inserted into the internal space 862 from the protruding tip side of the sticking base 135.

  The distance between the two wall portions 864 and 865 of the cover member 861 is equal to or greater than the distance between the pair of opposed plate portions 801, 802, 806, and 807 that are opposed to each other across the pasting region 136 in the pasting base 135. It is set slightly larger.

  A pair of claw portions 866 and 867 are integrally formed on both wall portions 864 and 865 so as to protrude from the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion 863 toward the sticking base 135 (note that the claw portion 867 is shown in FIG. )). The claw portions 866 and 867 have free ends at their distal ends, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  54 and 55, corresponding to the claw portions 866 and 867, the pair of arm portions 812 and 813 of the breaking member 810 integrated with the sticking base 135 are protruded outward and received. Portions 868 and 869 are integrally formed. The cover member 861 is installed in the substrate box 102 so that the sticking base 135 is inserted into the internal space 862 through the opening 863. At the time of this installation, the claw portions 866 and 867 are elastically deformed so as to escape outward by coming into contact with the corresponding receiving portions 868 and 869 from the original side in the mounting direction. However, it will return to a natural state by a restoring force when it reaches | attains the front side of an attachment direction rather than receiving part 868,869. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the tip hook portions of the claw portions 866, 867 abut against the end portions of the receiving portions 868, 869 from the front side in the mounting direction, and in the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Even if an attempt is made to move the cover member 861 in a certain removal direction, the contact is prevented by the contact. The cover member 861 is fixed to the substrate box 102 by the engagement between the claw portions 866 and 867 and the receiving portions 868 and 869.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, the fracture protrusion 817 is engaged with the cover member 861. Specifically, the break protrusion 817 protrudes to the front side from the front step 850 a that is a part of the enclosing portion 850, and the surface facing the surface region 137 in the cover member 861 in correspondence with the break protrusion 817. An engaging recess 871 is formed on the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 870. The engaging recess 871 is formed by denting a part of the inner wall surface of the surface side wall portion 870 so that the breaking protrusion 817 can be inserted. When the cover member 861 is attached, the breaking projection 817 is arranged so as to enter the engaging recess 871. As a result, when the cover member 861 is moved in the removal direction, the breaking projection 817 is caught on the cover member 861 and the movement is hindered.

  That is, the cover member 861 and the breaking member 810 are connected by the first engagement of the claw portions 866 and 867 and the receiving portions 868 and 869 and the second engagement of the breaking protrusion 817 and the engagement recess 871. Has been. A cover member 861 is attached to the substrate box 102 via these two connections. Thereby, the breaking member 810 is interlocked with the movement of the cover member 861.

  By fixing the cover member 861 to the substrate box 102, substantially the entire sticking base 135 in which the breaking member 810 is integrated is surrounded by the cover member 861. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the inner wall surface of the cover member 861 is in contact with or close to the surrounding portion 850 on the surface region 137 side, the side surface region 139 side, and the back surface region 138 side of the pasting region 136. . In this case, the second engaging portion of the breaking protrusion 817 and the engaging recess 871 is disposed inside the cover member 861, and access from the outside is restricted. Specifically, the inner wall surface of the front side wall portion 870 of the cover member 861 and the front side surface of the front side protrusion 850c are in contact with each other, and the second engagement portion is more open than the contact portion. Are arranged on the opposite side. As a result, an illegal act of accessing the second engagement location via the opening 863 of the cover member 861 can be suppressed.

  Incidentally, both dimensions are set between the cover member 861 and the surrounding portion 850 so that a play corresponding to a dimensional variation in the manufacturing stage is generated. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the cover member 861 cannot be attached due to dimensional variations at the manufacturing stage. The play is set to be small within a range capable of dealing with the dimensional variation so that a gap formed between the cover member 861 and the sticking base 135 is reduced when the cover member 861 is attached. Thereby, an illegal act of inserting a jig from the gap between the cover member 861 and the surrounding portion 850 can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 53, the surfaces of the front-side opposing plate portions 801 and 802 and the back-side opposing plate portions 806 and 807 are provided with inclined surfaces that are inclined in a direction facing each other toward the removing direction of the breaking member 810. (Refer to FIG. 8 for the back-side counter plate portion 807). Corresponding to the inclined surface, the same inclination as the inclined surface is formed in a portion of the wall portions 864 and 865 of the cover member 861 that faces the inclined surface. Thereby, in the situation where cover member 861 is attached, the surface of each counter board part 801,802,806,807 and the inner wall surface of wall part 864,865 contact or adjoin, and adhesion base 135 and cover member The gap formed between the two and 861 is small.

  A hole 881 is provided in the surface side wall portion 870 of the cover member 861. The configuration of the hole 881 is the same as that of the hole 341 of the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 (a) to 61 (c) are explanatory views for explaining a procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 102 is opened, and FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d) are cuts of the seal seal 844 by the breaking member 810. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating, and is sectional drawing at the time of seeing the sticking base 135 from the back surface side.

  As already described, sliding the other of the constituent members 111 and 112 in the separating direction for opening is the screw fixing of the front side fixing base portion 133 and the back side fixing base portion 134 constituting the sticking base 135. In addition, it is limited by the cover member 861 and is blocked by the seal seal 844. For this reason, as a pre-process for performing the slide movement, the separation operation of the cover member 861, the screw fixing is released, and the inhibition by the seal seal 844 is released.

  Since the cover member 861 is connected to the breaking member 810 by the first engagement and the second engagement, and the breaking member 810 is fixed to the pasting base 135 by screw fixing, the cover member The screw fixing of the breaking member 810 is released as a pretreatment for the separation of 861. Specifically, the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted from the fixing release hole 881 of the cover member 861. Then, the seal seal 844 covering the head of the screw 153 is pierced by the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver, and the tip is inserted into the head of the screw 153. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the screw 153 To leave. As already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the through-hole 152 for inserting the screw 153, when the tip of the tool is inserted into the head of the screw 153, the seal seal 844 Not only a part of the damage but also a part of the antenna member 172 is broken.

  When the screw 153 is detached as described above, the breaking member 810 can be separated from the sticking base 135, and accordingly, the cover member 861 can be separated from the sticking base 135. In this case, since the cover member 861 and the breaking member 810 are engaged, if the cover member 861 is moved with the direction opposite to the mounting direction at the time of installation as the separation direction (the removal direction), The member 810 also moves integrally in the separation direction.

  Here, in order to reduce the gap formed between the breakage base portion 811 and the sticking base 135, the play is set small in the design stage, and the gap is formed between the cover member 861 and the surrounding portion 850. Since the play at the design stage is set small in order to reduce the gap, when the cover member 861 is moved in the removal direction, in addition to the interference between the breaking member 810 and the seal seal 844, the breaking member 810 Interference between the adhesive base 135 and the cover base 135, interference between the cover member 861 and the surrounding portion 850, and the like, making it difficult for the cover member 861 to move. For this reason, the cover member 861 is separated while repeating the operation of inclining the other end side with the one end side of the both ends of the cutting edge 851 as a fulcrum so that the fulcrum side is alternately replaced. In this case, since the regulation structure described above is provided, the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction while maintaining a parallel state with respect to the sticking base 135 at the start of separation, and the sealing seal 844 of the cutting edge 851 is obtained. The contact with respect to is preferably guided. In the following description, the operation of inclining the other end side with one end side as a fulcrum of both ends of the cutting edge 851 is also referred to as a unit operation.

  As already described, since the cutting edge 851 and the tip of the saw portion 854 are arranged at positions close to the seal seal 844, when the separation operation of the cover member 861 is started, the contact with the seal seal 844 is started from these. Is started. In this case, in order to perform the separation operation while repeating the operation of inclining the one end side as described above, the leading side of both ends of the cutting edge 851 comes into contact with the seal seal 844 and starts cutting. In this case, the pressing force against the seal seal 844 is increased by the lever principle. After that, although depending on the degree of rotation, cutting by the center side is started, and cutting of the other end is started by setting the rotation to the opposite side.

  In particular, since the first inclined portion 852 and the second inclined portion 853 are provided, the seal seal 844 is cut regardless of the direction of rotation. Accordingly, since the stroke amount required for cutting the seal seal 844 is small, the seal seal 844 can be easily cut.

  Further, since both ends of the cutting edge 851 are arranged outside the seal seal 844, the cutting edge 851 abuts against both ends of the seal seal 844, and the seal seal 844 is cut from both ends. As a result, uncut residue is less likely to occur in the seal seal 844.

  Further, since the position of the saw portion 854 is set so that the saw portion 854 contacts the antenna member 172, when the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction, the antenna member 172 is first cut and communication is performed. It becomes impossible. Thereby, even when the cover member 861 is moved to an intermediate position, the fact can be grasped.

  The strength of the seal seal 844 at the location where the antenna member 172 is disposed is increased by the amount corresponding to the antenna member 172, but the saw portion 854 formed by an inclined portion having a relatively large inclination angle with respect to the location. Because of contact, the contact range between the saw portion 854 and the antenna member 172 is reduced. Thereby, the cutting | disconnection of the said range can be performed easily.

  The relative position between the breaking member 810 and the antenna member 172 is defined by a restriction structure provided inside the sticking base 135. Thereby, the position shift of the saw part 854 with respect to the antenna member 172 is difficult to occur. Further, the two blades 855 and 856 were formed so that the saw portion 854 abuts over the range Z including the clearance of the sticking position generated between the seal seal 844 and the surrounding portion 850. This ensures that the saw portion 854 abuts against the antenna member 172.

  While the IC chip 171 is disposed in the extended region 808, the end of the first slit portion 174 opposite to the IC chip 171 side is disposed on the surface region 137 side relative to the expanded region 808. . For this reason, the area | region in which the 1st slit part 174 was formed is cut | disconnected. As a result, the IC tag 163 cannot perform normal communication.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, a taper region 841 is formed in the fracture base portion 811 of the breaking member 810, and the cutting edge 851 is moved in the direction of removing the breaking member 810 by the taper region 841. Pointed. When the breaking member 810 is separated, the cutting edge 851 is the front side in the separation direction. Therefore, a sharp point comes into contact with the seal seal 844, and the sealing seal 844 can be easily cut.

  Returning to the description of the opening operation, after the separation operation is started and the cutting by the saw portion 854 and both ends of the cutting edge 851 is started, the cutting by the breaking protrusion 817 is started. That is, as already described, the breaking projection 817 moves along the breaking portion opening 818 with the movement of the breaking member 810 in the removal direction, and the distance from the breaking projection 817 to the sealing seal 844. The distance from both ends of the cutting edge 851 to the seal seal 844 and the distance from the tip of the saw portion 854 to the seal seal 844 are set to be larger. As a result, the cutting start timing by the break protrusion 817 is later than the cutting start timing by the cutting edge 851. In other words, the cutting start timing by the breaking protrusion 817 and the cutting start timing by the cutting edge 851 are shifted. Therefore, since the load related to the start of cutting is distributed, the sealing seal 844 can be easily cut.

  In this case, the portion of the seal seal 844 covering the rupture portion opening 818 is broken by the rupture protrusion 817. Therefore, the seal seal 844 that is affixed to a part different from the part pasted over the boundary 809 in the seal seal 844, specifically, the seal seal 844 affixed to the surface region 137 is destroyed. Therefore, since a part of different surfaces in the seal seal 844 is destroyed, it is easy for an administrator to confirm the destruction location.

  Further, when the separation operation of the cover member 861 is continued, the restriction by the restriction structure is loosened. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), the second inclined surface 826 is formed from the end opposite to the open end of the restricting opening 824 to the open end, while the first The inclined surface 825 is formed from the end opposite to the open end of the restriction opening 823 to the middle position on the open end. Thus, when the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction, the first inclined surface 825 and the restricting convex portion 821 do not come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. The restriction by the part 821 is released. As a result, the backlash of the breaking member 810 with respect to the sticking base 135 increases, and the amount of displacement per unit operation increases accordingly.

  Note that the movement of the breaking member 810 in the front and back direction of the sticking base 135 (the overlapping direction of the front side fixed base portion 133 and the back side fixed base portion 134) is maintained in a state regulated by the regulation structure. Thereby, the position shift of the member for destruction 810 of the said direction is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 62C, when the breaking member 810 is further moved, the restriction by the second inclined surface 826 and the restricting convex portions 821 and 822 is released, and the displacement amount is further increased. That is, since the displacement amount per unit operation increases stepwise as the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction, the cutting range of the seal seal 844 per unit operation increases. Therefore, the seal seal 844 can be more suitably cut.

  Further, when the cover member 861 is moved in the removal direction, the gaps formed between the wall portions 864 and 865 and the opposing plate portions 801, 802, 806, and 807 gradually increase. Accordingly, the unit operation is not easily inhibited by the interference between the cover member 861 and the pasting base 135. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the displacement amount of the unit operation is increased, and therefore the cutting range per unit operation is increased, and the seal seal 844 can be suitably cut.

  Here, the breaking portion 815 moves along the breaking portion opening 818, but does not hinder the separation operation of the cover member 861. Specifically, the length of the opening 818 for the breaking portion in the direction in which the arm portions 812 and 813 face each other is set larger than that of the breaking base portion 816 and the breaking protrusion 817. Thus, a predetermined gap is formed between the fracture portion 815 and the peripheral edge of the fracture portion opening 818 in the direction in which the arm portions 812 and 813 face each other. Therefore, when the other end is tilted with one end of the cutting edge 851 as a fulcrum, interference between the fracture portion 815 and the peripheral edge of the fracture portion opening 818 hardly occurs. Therefore, the separation operation of the cover member 861 is not easily hindered by the breaking portion 815.

  Thereafter, as the cover member 861 is separated, the entire cutting edge 851 including the valleys 857 and 858 moves outside the boundary 809, so that the cutting by the cutting edge 851 is completed.

  Here, in the cutting edge 851, the distance in the removal direction of the breaking member 810 between the shortest distance (both ends) and the longest distance (the valleys 857 and 858) with respect to the boundary 809 is the first inclined portion 852. Compared to the case only, it is shorter. Thereby, the stroke amount from the cutting start of the cutting edge 851 to the completion of cutting is reduced.

  By performing further separation operation after the cutting by the cutting edge 851 is completed, the sealing seal 844 is broken by the fracture base portion 816. Specifically, the breaking portion opening 818 is opened in the removal direction, and the boundary 809 and the breaking portion opening 818 communicate with each other. The fracture base portion 816 disposed in the fracture portion opening 818 is formed to be tapered toward the sealing seal 844 side by the inclined surface 816a, and the tip thereof is disposed on the fracture base portion 811 side. (See FIG. 60). The distance between the tip of the fracture base portion 816 and the seal seal 844 in the removal direction of the fracture member 810 is set to be larger than the distance between the valleys 857 and 858 of the cutting edge 851 and the seal seal 844. Thereby, after the cutting by the cutting edge 851 is completed, the breakage by the fracture base portion 816 is started. Thereby, the cutting by the fracture base portion 816 is started after the cutting by the cutting edge 851 is completed. In this case, the fracture base portion 816 breaks the seal seal 844 so as to widen the portion cut by the cutting edge 851 (tapered region 841).

  Further, in synchronism with the timing or before or after the timing, expansion of the cut portion already formed by the expansion portion 814 is started. Specifically, when the expansion portion 814 passes through the expansion region 808, a portion corresponding to a portion extending in the front-back direction in the peripheral portion of the expansion region 808 is cut in the seal seal 844. In this case, the cutting by the cutting edge 851 is completed at a timing before the extended portion 814 passes through the extended region 808, and the extended portion 814 extends the cutting portion cut by the cutting edge 851. Destroy. Thereby, as shown in FIG.61 (c), the area | region destroyed in the seal seal 844 becomes large, and it can confirm easily the fact that the seal seal 844 was destroyed.

  In particular, from the viewpoint of ease of cutting, if the contact area is narrowed by providing a tapered region 841 or the like, the unevenness of the cut surface becomes small and the cut portion becomes inconspicuous, so it is confirmed whether or not the opening operation has been performed. There is a concern that workability will be reduced. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the cut portion is expanded by the expansion unit 814, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  In addition, after the seal seal 844 is broken by the cutting edge 851, the seal seal 844 is broken by the extended portion 814, so that the load required for each break is distributed. As a result, the seal seal 844 can be easily broken as compared with a configuration that breaks at once.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 62, etc., the extended portion 814 is provided with an inclined surface 814a that is inclined so that the thickness dimension of the extended portion 814 becomes smaller toward the removal direction of the breaking member 810. The extended portion 814 is tapered toward the direction in which the breaking member 810 is removed. The tapered tip is disposed on the cutting edge 851 side. As a result, when the breaking member 810 is moved in the removal direction, the expanded portion 814 comes into contact with the portion cut by the cutting edge 851 and is sealed so as to spread the portion cut by the cutting edge 851. Break seal 844. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform destruction that expands the portion cut by the cutting edge 851.

  The antenna member 172 is disposed across the expansion region 808, and the IC chip 171 is disposed in the expansion region 808. For this reason, when cutting by the extended portion 814 is performed, portions on both sides of the antenna member 172 sandwiching the IC chip 171 are cut. Therefore, since the length dimension of the antenna member 172 becomes small, the communication possible range becomes larger and narrower than the normal range after fraud. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the opening operation has been performed. Furthermore, since the several location of the antenna member 172 will be cut | disconnected and a several trace will be formed, it can confirm easily that opening operation was performed.

  From the above, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), by moving the breaking member 810 in the removal direction, the region pasted on the boundary 809 and the breaking portion opening 818 in the seal seal 844 is cut. The obstruction of the opening operation by the seal seal 844 is released. Therefore, both the constituent members 111 and 112 can be slid and the internal space of the substrate box 102 can be opened. Therefore, it is possible to inspect the CPU chip 103 and the like. That is, the breaking member 810 is moved in accordance with the separation operation of the cover member 861, and the seal seal 844 is cut, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when performing the opening operation.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A breaking member 810 for cutting the seal seal 844 along the boundary 809 was provided. Thereby, since the sealing seal | sticker 844 can be cut | disconnected easily, the improvement of workability | operativity of opening operation can be aimed at. Further, when the seal seal 844 is cut by the breaking member 810, the cut portion remains as a trace, so that it can be easily confirmed that the opening operation has been performed.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the surrounding portion 850 is provided from the viewpoint of suppressing the positioning of the seal seal 844 and the unauthorized act of peeling the seal seal 844, there is a concern that workability may be reduced in the opening operation. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the breaking member 810 for cutting the seal seal 844 is separately provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability. Thereby, coexistence with suppression of the fraud to the seal seal 844 and suppression of the fall of workability | operativity at the time of opening operation can be aimed at.

  The arm portions 812 and 813 of the breaking member 810 are formed so as to constitute a part of the surrounding portion 850. Accordingly, the breaking member 810 can be attached to the inside of the sticking base 135 without the interference between the breaking member 810 and the portion constituting the surrounding portion 850.

  The cutting edge 851 is provided with a first inclined portion 852 inclined with respect to the seal seal 844 attached to the side surface region 139, and a second inclined portion 853 inclined in a direction different from the first inclined portion 852. It was. Accordingly, the breakage base portion 811 can be reduced in size, and the sealing seal 844 can be suitably cut by starting cutting from a predetermined location.

  In the cutting edge 851, the distance in the removal direction of the breaking member 810 between the shortest distance (both ends) and the longest distance (the valleys 857 and 858) with respect to the boundary 809 is only the first inclined portion 852. The second inclined portion 853 is formed so as to be shorter than in the case. Accordingly, the stroke amount of the breaking member 810 required for cutting the boundary 809 is reduced, so that the seal seal 844 can be easily cut.

  The breaking member 810 is provided with an expansion portion 814 that breaks the seal seal 844 so as to expand the cutting portion after the cutting by the cutting edge 851 is performed. Thereby, since it becomes easy to see a cutting | disconnection location, it can confirm easily that the cutting | disconnection was performed.

  Further, the breaking member 810 is provided with a breaking portion 815 that cuts a part of the surface on the surface region 137 side that is orthogonal to the surface on the side surface region 139 side that is cut by the cutting edge 851. Thereby, since the broken part in the seal seal | sticker 844 is easy to see, the fact that opening operation was performed can be confirmed easily.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 861 can be slid in the removal direction by setting the gap between the cover member 861 and the surrounding portion 850 and the gap between the arm portions 812 and 813 and the pasting base 135 large. It is good. Even in this configuration, since the cutting edge 851 is formed, the sealing seal 844 can be easily cut. However, in this case, since an illegal act such as inserting a jig through the gap can be performed, the above embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of suppressing the illegal act.

  In the present embodiment, the breaking protrusion 817 may be formed so as to constitute a part of the surrounding portion 850. As a result, the breaking protrusion 817 can be made multifunctional, and the cutting area by the breaking protrusion 817 can be increased by reducing the length of the cutout recess 859.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which the fracture | rupture protrusion 817 engages with the recessed part 871 for engagement, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is not necessary to engage. In this case, since the cover member 861 can be separated separately, a simple inspection can be suitably performed.

  As a specific configuration for preventing the engagement, for example, a configuration in which the projecting dimension of the breaking projection 817 is reduced or the engaging recess 871 is opened toward the opening 863 can be considered.

  Moreover, although it was set as the structure which provided the 1st inclination part 852 and the 2nd inclination part 853 so that the both ends of the cutting edge 851 may protrude to the seal seal 844 side, it is not restricted to this, For example, it shows to Fig.63 (a) As described above, the tip portion 892 sharpened toward the sealing seal 844 side may be formed by the two inclined portions 891a and 891b. Thereby, since the contact location of the destruction base part 811 and the sealing sticker 844 decreases, a pressing force can be raised.

  In this case, the positional relationship between the two may be set so that the tip portion 892 contacts the antenna member 172. Thereby, since the location where the strength is increased by the antenna member 172 can be easily cut, the sealing seal 844 can be easily cut.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the first inclined portion 893a and the second inclined portion 893b having the same inclination direction with respect to the sealing seal 844 attached to the side surface region 139 and different inclination angles are provided. In addition, a third inclined portion 893c and a fourth inclined portion 893d that are inclined in a direction different from those of the inclined portions 893a and 893b and have different inclination angles are provided, and an inclination having a large inclination angle is provided on the arm portions 812 and 813 side. It is good also as a structure which installs a part (1st inclination part 893a, 3rd inclination part 893c). In this case, at the initial stage of cutting the seal seal 844, the first inclined portion 893a and the third inclined portion 893c abut on the seal seal 844. Since the contact range is narrower than the second inclined portion 893b and the fourth inclined portion 893d, the pressing force against the seal seal 844 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the later stage of cutting the seal seal 844, the second inclined portion 893b and the fourth inclined portion 893d abut against the seal seal 844. In this case, the seal seal 844 can be cut with a small stroke amount.

  From the above, the external force and stroke amount required for cutting are adjusted.

  In addition, since the second inclined portion 893b and the fourth inclined portion 893d are provided, the width dimension of the fracture base portion 811 is ensured. Thereby, the strength of the breaking member 810 is increased as compared with the configuration of only the first inclined portion 893a and the third inclined portion 893c.

  Moreover, although the saw part 854 is provided corresponding to the range Z in which the antenna member 172 is disposed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the saw part 854 may not be provided. Even in this case, the seal seal 844 including the antenna member 172 can be cut by moving the cover member 861. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the antenna member 172 is cut first and the ease of cutting, the configuration in which the saw portion 854 is provided is superior. Further, the number of blades of the saw portion 854 is arbitrary.

  In addition, the antenna member 172 may be disposed so as to straddle the opening for broken portion 818. Thereby, since the destruction location of the antenna member 172 increases, the fact that it has been destroyed can be easily confirmed, and the length of the antenna member 172 can be further reduced. As a specific configuration, a configuration in which the breaking portion 815 and the breaking portion opening 818 are provided on the arm portion 812 side can be considered.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the extension region 894 may be defined such that the first slit portion 174 straddles the boundary 809 and straddles the peripheral portion of the extension region 894. In this case, since the 1st slit part 174 is cut | disconnected by multiple places, the destruction of the 1st slit part 174 can be performed more reliably.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, the extended portion 814 is provided with inclined surfaces 895a and 895b having different inclination directions with respect to the seal seal 844 attached to the side surface region 139, and the expanded surfaces 895a and 895b extend the inclined portions 895a and 895b. The end of the portion 814 opposite to the destruction base portion 811 side may be arranged closer to the seal seal 844 than the end of the destruction base portion 811 side. In this case, a portion on the back surface region 138 side can be suitably cut at the peripheral edge of the extended region 808.

  Although the tapered region 841 is provided so that the cutting edge 851 is sharpened in the direction in which the breaking member 810 is removed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tapered region 841 may not be provided. However, from the viewpoint of easy cutting of the seal seal 844, the configuration in which the tapered region 841 is provided is superior.

  Although the extended part 814 and the fracture | rupture part 815 were provided, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which provides either one.

  In addition, although the breaking member 810 is configured to be screw-fixed, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the screw is not fixed may be employed. Even in this case, the breaking member 810 is attached to the front side sticking plate by the restriction structure (the restriction convex portions 821, 822 and the restriction opening portions 823, 824, the protrusions 830, 831 and the protrusion grooves 832, 833). Since it is attached to the portion 141, the destruction member 810 is prevented from moving by mistake. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing fraudulent acts on the breaking member 810, the configuration in which the breaking member 810 is screwed is superior.

  In the present embodiment, the cutting by the breaking projection 817 is set to start after the cutting of the sealing seal 844 by the cutting edge 851 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured that the cutting of the cutting edge 851 is started after the cutting is started.

  In addition, with the movement of the breaking member 810 in the removal direction, the restriction of the movement between the arm portions 812 and 813 of the breaking member 810 due to the restriction structure was released in stages. For example, the movement restriction between the arm portions 812 and 813 of the breaking member 810 by the restriction structure may be loosened stepwise as the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction. Specifically, the clearance between the restricting convex portions 821 and 822 and the corresponding inclined surfaces 825 and 826 may be gradually increased as the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction. Even in this case, the operation range of the unit operation gradually increases as the breaking member 810 moves in the removal direction.

  Although the first inclined portion 852 and the second inclined portion 853 are formed in the opposite directions, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the first inclined portion 852 and the second inclined portion 853 may be configured in the same inclination direction. In this case, it is preferable to provide a third inclined portion that is continuous with the end portion on the center side of the first inclined portion 852 and the end portion on the center side of the second inclined portion 853. Even if it is the said structure, while being able to form the front-end | tip part sharpened toward the removal direction of the member 810 for destruction, the member 810 for destruction can be made compact. In short, it is only necessary that the cutting edge 851 be provided with a plurality of inclined portions that come into contact with the sealing seal 844 in an inclined state. However, the configuration in which the inclination angle or the inclination direction is different can cut the seal seal 844 more preferably, and the breaking member 810 can be downsized.

  Further, as shown in the following fifth or sixth embodiment, the breaking member 810 is attached to the sticking base 135 in a rotatable state, and the sealing seal 844 is cut by rotating the breaking member 810. It is good also as composition to do. In this case, the cutting edge 851 may be formed in parallel to the seal seal 844 attached to the side surface region 139. Even in such a configuration, when the breaking member 810 is rotated, the cutting edge 851 is in contact with the sealing seal 844 in an inclined state, and the sealing seal 844 is gradually cut with the rotation. Is called. That is, when the breaking member 810 rotates, the portion formed in parallel in the cutting edge 851 functions as an inclined portion.

  Further, in such a configuration, an inclined portion that is inclined so as to approach the seal seal 844 may be provided on a part of the cutting edge 851. Accordingly, the contact range between the cutting edge 851 and the seal seal 844 can be further reduced, so that the seal seal 844 can be more suitably cut.

  When the breaking member 810 is moved in the removal direction, a portion corresponding to a portion extending in the front and back direction of the sticking base 135 in the peripheral portion of the expansion region 808 may not be cut by the expansion portion 814. Even in this case, the extended portion 814 comes into contact with a portion around the boundary 809, and the portion of the contact portion is deformed so that the boundary 809 is expanded. Thereby, a trace location becomes conspicuous and the fact that the seal seal 844 has been broken can be easily confirmed.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the following other forms with respect to embodiment different from embodiment illustrated as application object.

  (1) In the second to seventh embodiments, the cover members 331, 411, 511, 611, 721, 861 (hereinafter simply referred to as the cover member 331) are attached to the substrate box 102. Although it was set as the structure, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which does not comprise the cover member 331 grade | etc.,. Even in this case, the seals 160, 844 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “breaking members 311, 401, 501, 701, 810” (hereinafter also simply referred to as “breaking members 311”) are slid or rotated. It is possible to cut a sealing seal 160 or the like. However, it is preferable that the cover member 331 or the like is provided from the viewpoint of protecting the seal seal 160 or the like and the breaking member 311 or the like.

  (2) In the second to seventh embodiments, the breaking member 311 and the like are arranged inside the sticking base 135. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the first embodiment. It is good also as a structure arrange | positioned on the outer side of the sticking base 135.

  (3) According to the second to sixth embodiments, the boundary 306 is formed in a straight line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the boundary 306 is formed so that a bent portion is generated. Also good. In this case, the breaking member 311 and the like may be formed so as to correspond to the bent portion so as to pass through the boundary 306. Thereby, since a cutting area becomes large compared with the case of a straight line, it can be confirmed that the opening operation has been performed more suitably.

  (4) In the second to seventh embodiments, the breaking member 311 and the like are fixed with screws. However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the breaking member 311 and the like are arranged on the front side fixed base portion 133 and the back side. It is good also as a structure fixed to either the front side fixed base part 133 or the back side fixed base part 134 using a coupling tool different from the screw 153 used for the connection with the fixed base part 134. In this case, when assembling the main control device 63, the timing at which the breaking member 311 and the like are fixed is arbitrary. For example, the breaking member 311 is preceded by the timing at which the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined. It is good also as a structure by which fixation etc. are performed.

  The fixing of the breaking member 311 or the like is not limited to the configuration performed by the screw 153. For example, the breaking member 311 is broken by a locking portion formed on at least one of the front-side fixed base portion 133 or the back-side fixed base portion 134. It is good also as a structure to which the member 311 grade | etc., Is latched.

  Furthermore, in each said embodiment, it is good also as a structure which does not perform screw fixation of the member 311 for destruction to the sticking base 135. FIG. Even in this case, the rattling of the breaking member 311 can be suppressed to a predetermined level by the contact between the sticking base 135 and the breaking member 311, the contact between the cover member 331 and the sticking base 135, or the like. .

  In the sixth embodiment, even if the breaking member 701 is not screw-fixed, the breaking member 701 is attached to the sticking base 135 in a state that is difficult to remove. Unauthorized destruction or removal of the working member 701 can be suppressed.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the destruction members 210, 311, 401, 501, 601, 701, and 810 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the destruction member 210) that cut the seal seal 160 and the like are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, an easy-to-cut part that is intermittently formed in an annular shape so as to have a perforation through the front-side structure 111 that constitutes the substrate box 102 is provided. In a configuration in which the portion formed by the easy-cutting portion is removed by cutting along the portion and the internal space of the substrate box 102 is opened, the breakage for cutting the easy-cutting portion by applying an external force It is good also as a structure which provides a member.

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, the cover member 191 and the like limit the opening operation of the substrate box 102 and cover the sealing seal 160 and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may have.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the easy-to-cut portion formed to be easier to cut than other portions is provided on the seal seal 160 or the like so that the breaking member 210 or the like can easily cut the seal seal 160 or the like. Also good. Thereby, the sealing seal | sticker 160 grade | etc., Can be performed more suitably.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, the breaking member 210 and the like are formed between the opposing plate portions 142, 143, 146, and 147, and the breaking member 210 and the like slide or rotate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least a part of the above-mentioned portion is cut. It only has to be. In this case, the sealing seals 160 and 844 are cut from the cut portion in accordance with the opening operation. In other words, the force that obstructs the opening operation by the seal seals 160 and 844 is weakened by the formation of the cut portion. As a result, the opening operation can be performed. However, from the viewpoint of workability when performing the opening operation, a configuration in which the entire portion where the breaking member 210 and the like straddle the boundaries 140, 306, and 809 is cut is preferable.

  (9) In each of the above embodiments, the attachment direction of the cover member 191 etc. to the board box 102 is defined as one direction by sliding between the surrounding portion 180 and the inner wall surface of the cover member 191 etc. However, for example, after guiding in a predetermined direction, the attachment direction may be defined in two stages so as to guide in a direction different from the predetermined direction. In short, it suffices if the attachment path of the cover member 191 or the like to the board box 102 is defined.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the boundary 140, 306, 809 between the front-side fixed base portion 133 and the back-side fixed base portion 134 is limited to a configuration in which only the side surface region 139 is formed in the pasting region 136. It may be configured only in the front surface region 137, or may be configured only in the back surface region 138. Further, the boundaries 140, 306, and 809 may be formed over both the front surface region 137 and the side surface region 139, and the boundaries 140, 306, and 809 are formed over both the back surface region 138 and the side surface region 139. May be. Furthermore, boundaries 140, 306, and 809 may be formed over all of the front surface region 137, the side surface region 139, and the back surface region 138. In any of the above configurations, the seal seals 160 and 844 are pasted across the boundaries 140, 306, and 809, and the breaking member 210 and the like are pasted to the pasting base 135 via the boundaries 140, 306, and 809. What is necessary is just to be able to displace from the inside to the outside.

  (11) In the second to seventh embodiments, the connection between the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 and the like is performed by the engagement between the claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339 and the like. The cover member 331 or the like and the breaking member 311 or the like may be connected using a screw or the like, or may be connected using an adhesive or a binding band. Good. The cover member 331 and the destruction member 311 may be integrally formed. However, in the configuration in which the destruction member 311 and the like are accommodated in the sticking base 135 and the cover member 331 and the like are provided so as to cover the seal seals 160 and 844, the installation of both the members 311 and 331 is facilitated. Above, it is preferable that both members 311 and 331 are connected by engagement as in the second embodiment.

  In addition, about the structure regarding connection with the cover members 411 and 511 and the members for destruction 401 and 501 in 3rd and 4th embodiment, it is good also as a structure connected using a screw etc. similarly. In this case, it is necessary to perform a separate connection work. On the other hand, in the third and fourth embodiments, since the connection is performed as the cover members 411 and 511 are attached to the substrate box 102, the deterioration of workability is suppressed. Can do.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, a break screw or a one-way screw may be used instead of the detachable screw 153 as a coupling member for coupling the front side fixed base portion 133 and the back side fixed base portion 134.

  (13) In the second to fifth embodiments, a transparent sheet may be attached to the surface side of the seal seal 160 so as to cover the seal seal 160. In this case, the sealing seal 160 can be protected by the transparent sheet. However, in each of the above embodiments, it is preferable that the strength of the transparent sheet is set so that the seal seal 160 may be broken when the cover member 331 and the like are separated.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, the restricting means for restricting the separation direction when separating the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 so as to open the internal space of the substrate box 102 is the both structures 111, 112. It is not limited to the configuration that restricts the movement in two stages, that is, the sliding movement along the mating surface and the movement in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102, and only one of the former or the latter or three or more stages. It is good also as a structure restrict | limited to the movement by. In this case, the sealing seals 160 and 844 are pasted over both the components 111 and 112 so as to inhibit at least one stage of movement, and a breaking member capable of breaking the straddling portion in a predetermined case is provided. What is necessary is just composition.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the breaking member 210 or the like may be made of metal. However, when the breaking member 210 is made of metal, it is necessary to affix the seal seals 160 and 844 to the sticking base 135 so that the breaking member 210 and the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 do not contact each other. There is. Specifically, a configuration in which the breaking member 210 and the antenna member 172 are separated from each other or a resin-made interposing member is provided between the breaking member 210 and the antenna member 172 can be considered.

  For example, when the antenna member 172 contacts the metal breaking member 210, the set operating frequency (for example, 2.45 GHz) changes, and communication through the antenna member 172 may not be performed satisfactorily. In this case, there is a possibility that the ID information stored in the IC chip 171 may not be read even if it is read by the reader device R. However, as described above, the antenna member 172 and the metal breaking member 210 are not in contact with each other. By doing so, the occurrence of the inconvenience is suppressed.

  (16) In the second embodiment, a wall portion may be provided so as to sandwich the claw portion 336 as an engagement portion with the sticking base 135. As a result, access to the engagement portion between the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 is restricted, and thus the engagement is difficult to be released. Therefore, as shown in the fourth embodiment, the act of illegally releasing the integration of the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 can be suppressed. However, if attention is paid to the fact that only the cover member 331 can be separated without separating the breaking member 311, the configuration in which the wall portion is not provided is preferable.

  (17) In the sixth embodiment, the cover member 721 is attached to the board box 102 by engaging with the breaking member 701. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board box 102 is separately provided. It is good also as a structure engaged with. Accordingly, after the breaking member 701 is rotated, it is necessary to separately release the engagement with the substrate box 102. Therefore, since the separation operation of the cover member 721 becomes complicated, an unauthorized separation operation can be suppressed.

  In this case, the cover member 721 can be attached to the substrate box 102 from which the breaking member 701 is separated. Thereby, the versatility of the cover member 721 can be improved.

  (18) In the sixth embodiment, the first engagement and the second engagement are generated between the breaking member 701 and the cover member 721. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Either one is fine. In short, it is only necessary that the engagement is released or the engagement becomes loose as the breaking member 701 rotates.

  (19) In the sixth embodiment, the shaft portion 711 is provided on the front side structure 111. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and may be provided on the back side structure 112, for example. In this case, in a situation where the breaking member 701 is attached to the substrate box 102, the sliding movement as the opening operation in both the components 111 and 112 is restricted by the breaking member 701. As a result, it becomes necessary to separate the breaking member 701 as a previous stage of the opening operation, so that the opening operation can be complicated. Therefore, an unauthorized opening operation can be suppressed. However, if attention is paid to the ease of the opening operation, the configuration in which the shaft portion 711 is attached to the front side structure 111 is superior.

  (20) In the sixth embodiment, the second arm opening 733 may be opened toward the second combined body 132 side. As a result, the cover member 721 can be easily removed from the breaking member 701. However, in this case, since the engaging portion of the second arm portion 704 and the first hook portion 741 is exposed, the engaging portion is easily released illegally. For this reason, if it pays attention to the point which can perform unauthorized cancellation | release of an engagement location, the said 6th Embodiment is more excellent.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which newly provides the opening part for protrusion parts in the side wall part 731 in the position facing the 2nd arm part 704 in the state which the member 701 for destruction rotated. Accordingly, the cover member 721 can be removed from the breaking member 701 by sliding the cover member 721 in the removal direction with respect to the sticking base 135, so that the cover member 721 can be easily removed. However, in view of the simplification of the configuration of the cover member 721 and the possibility of an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig from the opening, the sixth embodiment is superior.

  (21) In the sixth embodiment, the breaking member 701 is pivotally supported while being rotatable with respect to the sticking base 135. However, the invention is not limited thereto. The seal seal 160 may be cut by sliding movement. In this case, an opening may be provided in the cover member 721 so that the breaking member 701 can slide in a state where the cover member 721 is attached. However, if attention is paid to the point that the seal seal 160 can be easily cut, the configuration in which the breaking member 701 is pivotally supported in a rotatable state is superior.

  (22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the wall portion or the like defining the internal space 192 is configured not to form a gap with the surrounding portions 180, 321, and 850. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the cover member 191 or the like may be formed so that the wall portion or the like is disposed at a predetermined distance from the wall. In this case, the reading position when the identification information is read by the reader device R is limited to be a position away from the IC tag 163 than the predetermined distance. Thus, by setting the predetermined distance to be shorter than the communicable distance, the identification information can be read by the reader device R at the normal time. On the other hand, the antenna member 172 is temporarily disconnected and thus the communicable distance. Is shorter than the predetermined distance, ID information cannot be read by the reader device R, so that the fact that the antenna member 172 is disconnected can be grasped, and an unauthorized opening operation is performed. Can be identified.

  (23) The long antenna member 172 is not limited to the configuration in which the long antenna member 172 is linearly arranged with respect to the base sheet 161, and may be configured in a substantially linear shape or a curved shape. Moreover, you may arrange | position so that it may have a single or several bending part in the middle position of the length direction.

  (24) The easily breakable portion that makes the slit 173 easily broken when the seal seal 160 is peeled off is not limited to the slit shape like the antenna cut 176, but is a broken line shape extending intermittently. It may be. Moreover, an opening part may be sufficient and the thin film part formed thinner than the surrounding area | region may be sufficient. Furthermore, a recess that is recessed from the end of the antenna member 172 toward the slit 173 may be used. Thus, in the structure which forms an easily breakable part as a recessed part, the said easily breakable part will be formed in the antenna member 172 instead of the base sheet 161. In this case, as the easily breakable portion, the easily breakable portion exemplified above may also be formed on the base sheet 161 in addition to the recess. With such a configuration, the slit 173 is easily broken when the seal seal 160 is peeled off.

  (25) Instead of the long antenna member 172, a loop antenna member may be used. In this case, when the loop part is cut, it is configured so that communication is impossible or difficult to communicate, and the loop part is equivalent to the slit 173 in each of the above embodiments, and the boundary 140, 306, 809 The positional relationship and the positional relationship with the antenna cut 176 may be set. For example, by forming an easily breakable portion that extends toward the loop portion, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off, the loop portion is expected to be cut. Further, by disposing the seal sticker 160 so that the loop part straddles the boundary 140, the loop part is cut when the seal sticker 160 is cut to expose the border 306 or when the seal sticker 160 is peeled off. There is expected.

  The disabled state generation unit is not limited to the slit 173 or the loop unit of each of the above embodiments, and if the IC tag 163 cannot communicate or becomes difficult to communicate due to its own destruction, it is specifically The configuration is arbitrary. However, in the configuration in which the unusable state generating portion is formed by the slit 173 and the loop portion, the unusable state generating portion can be provided as a simple structure.

  (26) In the configuration in which the substrate box 102 is formed of a box body having an opening formed in one wall portion and a plate-like lid body covering the opening portion, the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion and the lid body Seal seals 160 and 844 may be affixed so as to cover a part of the boundary, and seal seals 160 and 844 may be affixed so as to cover all of the boundary.

  (27) The sticking target of the seal seals 160 and 844 is not limited to the main control device 63, and may be another control device such as the payout control device 82. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the sealing seal | stickers 160 and 844 were affixed with respect to the some control apparatus. Further, seal seals 160 and 844 may be attached to devices other than the control device such as the dispensing device 78, and the seal seals 160 and 844 are attached so as to straddle the boundary between the control device and the mounting base. May be. In any of these configurations, the inventions described in the above embodiments can be applied.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, the IC tag 163 is configured to transmit the identification information as a response wave by receiving the ringing wave from the reader device R. Instead of this, the radio wave including the identification information is used. It is good also as an IC tag which always transmits.

  (29) It is not limited to the configuration in which the substrate box 102 is formed by combining the two structural bodies 111 and 112, and the substrate box 102 is formed by combining three or more structural bodies. Also good. In addition, the seal members 160 and 844 are not limited to the configuration in which the antenna member 172 is disposed obliquely, and may be configured in a direction other than the oblique direction. Moreover, the base sheet 161 of the seal seals 160 and 844 is not limited to a rectangular shape, and may be a square shape, another polygonal shape, or a circular shape.

  (30) In the first to seventh embodiments, instead of the cover member 191 and the like covering the entire seal seals 160 and 844, the entire seal seals 160 and 844 are not covered but are adjacent to a part or It is good also as a structure which provides the member which restrict | limits the complete peeling from the sticking area | region 136 of the said sealing seal | sticker 160,844 by arrange | positioning facing a part. In this case, the seals 160 and 844 or the IC tag 163 may be destroyed as the member is displaced from the position where the peeling is restricted to a position where the restriction is released.

  (31) In each of the above-described embodiments, the trace means that releases the inhibition of the opening operation and becomes a trace state by being destroyed is not limited to the seal seal 160 having the IC tag 163, and the IC The seal seal 160 which does not have the tag 163 may be sufficient, and the IC tag 163 in the state where the seal seal 160 is not provided may be sufficient. Further, the seal is not limited to the seal sticker 160 or the IC tag 163 as long as a trace can be left.

  (32) In the fifth embodiment, the breaking member 311 is difficult to separate from the substrate box 102 unless the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are separated from each other. For example, when the breaking member 311 is disposed at a predetermined position in the rotation direction, the configuration may be such that it can be pulled out from the sticking base 135. As a result, the breaking member 311 can be replaced without opening the substrate box 102.

  (33) In the sixth embodiment, a part of the surface side wall portion 751 is in contact with the surface region 137. However, the present invention is not limited to this, or in addition to this, the side surface side wall portion 731 includes the side surface region 139. You may form so that it may contact | abut. Specifically, a part of the side wall portion 731 may be recessed toward the sticking base 135 so as to contact the side surface region 139. Thereby, since the seal seal | sticker 160 is pinched | interposed by the sticking base 135 and the cover member 721, the shear force which arises when the member 701 for destruction can contact | abut can be heightened. Therefore, the seal seal 160 can be easily cut.

  (34) In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the tapered regions 315 and 705 are formed to be inclined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the tapered regions 315 and 314 may be formed along the direction in which the arm portions 313 and 314 face each other. . Even in this case, when the breaking member 311 or the like is rotated, the tapered region 315 comes into contact with the sealing seal 160 in an inclined state, and the sealing seal 160 is gradually cut with the rotation. Is called.

  (35) In each of the above embodiments, the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with the upper plate 57a and the lower plate 58a as the outer storage unit, but instead of this, a single outer storage unit is provided. The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine. Further, by providing the power failure monitoring device separately from the main control device 63, the main control board 101 may be configured to have only the function of the main control circuit 251.

  (36) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which the electric game object is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special apparatus, or games in the specific area of the special apparatus The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (the seal seal 160 in the first to sixth embodiments, the seal seal in the seventh embodiment) that leaves a trace of the specific operation being performed. 844),
Release means for releasing the inhibition state (breaking member 210 in the first embodiment, destruction member 311 in the second and fifth embodiments, destruction member 401 in the third embodiment. The destruction member 501 in the fourth embodiment, the destruction member 701 in the sixth embodiment, and the destruction member 810 in the seventh embodiment;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, by providing the release means, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Thereby, when performing specific operation for an inspection etc., the said specific operation can be performed suitably.

Feature A2. A substrate box (substrate box 102) that is formed by combining a plurality of components (front-side component 111 and back-side component 112) and accommodates a control substrate (main control substrate 101);
Provided in the substrate box and provided to inhibit a specific operation for opening the internal space of the substrate box, and when the inhibition state is released, leaves a trace that the specific operation has been performed. Trace means to be in a trace state (the seal seal 160 in the first to sixth embodiments, the seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment),
Release means for releasing the inhibition state (breaking member 210 in the first embodiment, destruction member 311 in the second and fifth embodiments, destruction member 401 in the third embodiment. The destruction member 501 in the fourth embodiment, the destruction member 701 in the sixth embodiment, and the destruction member 810 in the seventh embodiment;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A2, since the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, the inhibition state of the trace means is released when the specific operation is performed. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, by providing the release means, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. By this. This can be suitably handled when a specific operation is performed for an inspection or the like.

  Feature A3. The releasing means is formed so as to be displaceable in a predetermined specific direction from a predetermined initial position, destroys the trace means by the displacement in the specific direction, and releases the inhibition state. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that.

  According to the feature A3, by moving the release means in the specific direction from the initial position, the trace means is destroyed and the inhibition state is released. In this case, since it is only necessary to displace the release means, the trace means can be easily destroyed by the release means.

  Note that “displaceable in a specific direction” includes not only a configuration capable of sliding in a specific direction but also a configuration capable of rotating in a specific direction.

Feature A4. The release means includes a breaking portion that contacts the trace means when the release means is displaced in the specific direction (the cutting portion 212 in the first embodiment, the breakage in the second and fifth embodiments). In the third embodiment, the destruction base portion 402 in the third embodiment, the destruction base portion 502 in the fourth embodiment, the destruction base portion 702 in the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. Has a destruction base part 811),
The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein the destruction unit destroys the trace means by pressing the trace means.

  According to feature A4, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the destruction portion and the trace means come into contact with each other, and a pressing force based on the displacement of the release means is applied from the destruction portion to the trace means. Thereby, the trace means is destroyed and the inhibition state is released.

  Feature A5. The destruction portion is formed so that a part of the destruction portion abuts when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, and gradually, as the release means is displaced in the specific direction, The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the abutting portion with the trace means is formed to be displaced.

  According to the feature A5, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, a part of the destruction portion comes into contact with the trace means. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the trace means increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Thereby, it becomes possible to easily destroy the trace means.

Feature A6. The destruction portion is disposed as an initial position inside the installation location (the pasting base 135) where the trace means is installed, and on the opposite side of the side where the trace means is provided with reference to the installation location. And
The gaming machine according to Feature A4 or Feature A5, wherein the game machine is configured to be displaceable toward the side where the trace means is installed outside the installation location as the specific direction.

  According to the feature A6, the trace means is destroyed by displacing the destruction portion from the inside to the outside of the installation location. In this case, since the destructive part has only to be pulled outward, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released.

  In addition, since the destruction part is arranged inside the trace means, the destruction part is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and it is possible to suppress fraud to the release means such as destroying the destruction part. it can. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing the cancellation | release means can be suppressed.

  Feature A7. The release means includes an operating portion (an operating member in the first embodiment) that is exposed outward from the installation location of the trace means in a situation where the destruction portion is disposed inside the installation location of the trace means. 213, the arm portions 313, 314 in the second and fifth embodiments, the arm portions 403, 404 in the third embodiment, the arm portions 503, 504, the sixth in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, further comprising a handle 714 in the embodiment, and arm portions 812 and 813 in the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature A7, since the operation unit is exposed outside the installation place of the trace unit, it is necessary for the release unit to be displaced with respect to the release unit by hooking or holding a tool on the operation unit. It becomes possible to give power. Thereby, even if it is the state which the destruction part has arrange | positioned inside the installation location of the trace means, the cancellation | release means can be displaced easily.

Feature A8. Enclosures provided so as to define an attachment surface to which the trace means is attached and guide the attachment position of the trace means to the attachment surface (enclosed parts 321 and 7 in the second to sixth embodiments). In the embodiment of the present invention, an enclosure 850) is provided,
The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the operation unit is formed to constitute a part of the enclosure.

  According to the feature A8, since the surrounding portion that guides the trace means to the attachment position is provided, it is possible to improve workability when attaching the trace means. In this case, the operation unit is also used as a part of the enclosure.

  In addition, since the surrounding portion is provided so as to define the mounting surface, the trace means and the surrounding portion do not interfere with each other. Thereby, the operation part which comprises a part of enclosure part does not interfere with a trace means. Therefore, a force can be applied to the operation unit without interfering with the trace means.

Feature A9. The release means is pivotally supported at a predetermined location, and the pivot support location (the shaft portion 601 and the bearing hole 602 in the fifth embodiment, the shaft portion 711 and the bearing hole in the sixth embodiment). 713) is formed to be rotatable from the initial position toward the specific direction,
Any one of the features A4 to A8, wherein the destruction portion contacts the trace means and destroys the trace means when the release means rotates in the specific direction. Game machines.

  According to the feature A9, the breaking portion comes into contact with the trace means as the release means rotates. And since a pressing force is provided with respect to a trace means with rotation of a cancellation | release means, a trace means will be destroyed and an inhibition state will be cancelled | released. In this case, compared with the configuration in which the release means is slid, it is easy to apply a force for displacing the release means to the release means, so that the trace means can be easily destroyed. Thereby, cancellation | release of the inhibition state of a trace means can be performed easily.

Feature A10. The release means includes an operation part (an arm part 313 in the fifth embodiment, a handle 714 in the sixth embodiment) exposed toward the outside of the installation place of the trace means,
The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the destruction part is formed so as to be positioned between the operation part and the pivot support part.

  According to the feature A10, by the lever principle, it is possible to increase the pressing force applied to the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released.

Feature A11. The pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location of the trace means,
A feature A9 or a feature comprising: a restricting means (affixing base 135 in the fifth embodiment) for restricting separation of the releasing means in a situation where the releasing means is disposed at the initial position. A gaming machine according to A10.

  According to the feature A11, since the pivot support portion is arranged outside the installation place of the trace means, the release means can be easily mounted as compared with the configuration in which the pivot support portion is arranged inside the installation place. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the release means is pivotally supported.

  In this case, since the release means can be easily mounted, the access to the pivot support is easy, and therefore, the illegal action of illegally releasing the state where the release means is supported and illegally separating the release means. There is concern about what is done.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, separation of the release means is restricted at the initial position. Thereby, the fraudulent act which illegally separates the release means at the initial position can be suppressed.

Feature A12. The release means is attached in the axial direction with respect to the pivot support location,
The destruction portion is disposed as an initial position inside the installation place of the trace means and on the side opposite to the side where the trace means is provided with reference to the installation place,
As the specific direction, the outer side of the installation place of the trace means and is formed to be rotatable toward the side where the trace means is installed,
The restriction means restricts movement of the release means in the axial direction by contact between the destruction portion and the installation location of the trace means at the initial position. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A12, with the configuration limited in the feature A6, the installation place of the trace means functions as the regulation means. That is, separation of the release means can be regulated by a configuration that easily rotates the release means and restricts access to the destruction portion.

Feature A13. The pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location of the trace means,
Specific restriction means provided to restrict the specific operation and requires a predetermined release operation to release the restriction state (the cover member 331 in the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment) Cover member 721) in the form, and cover means provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means and restrict access to the trace means (cover member 331, sixth in the fifth embodiment) In the embodiment of the present invention, a limiting means having at least one of the cover members 721) is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A12, wherein the limiting means is formed so as to cover the pivot support portion.

  According to the feature A13, since the pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location of the trace means, it is easier to mount the release means compared to the configuration in which the pivot support location is arranged inside the installation location. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the release means is pivotally supported.

  In this case, since the pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location, it is easy to access the pivot support location. For this reason, it is easy to perform an illegal act with respect to a pivot support location.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the pivot support location is covered by the limiting means. This restricts access to the pivot support location. Therefore, the illegal act with respect to a pivot support location can be suppressed.

Feature A14. The release means is arranged so as to restrict the restriction means from being displaced to a position that does not cover the pivot support portion at the initial position.
The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein the gaming machine is arranged at a position where the restriction is released or a position where the restriction is easily released by rotating in the specific direction.

  In the case where there is a restriction means for restricting access to the pivot support location, it is assumed that in order to access the pivot support location, an illegal act of displacing the restriction means to a position where the restriction means does not cover the pivot support location is assumed. Is done.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the displacement of the restricting means to a position not covering the shaft support location is restricted by the releasing means. The regulation is released or easily released by rotating the release means in a specific direction. This makes it difficult to access the pivot support location without destroying the trace means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of accessing the pivot support location and destroying the release means without destroying the trace means.

  Note that the configuration shown in the following features A35 to A39 may be applied to the configuration of this feature.

  Feature A15. The gaming machine according to Feature A9 or Feature A10, wherein the pivot support portion is disposed inside an installation location of the trace means.

  According to feature A15, since the pivot support location is arranged inside the trace means, the pivot support location is protected by the installation location of the trace means, thereby suppressing illegal acts such as destroying the pivot support location. can do.

Feature A16. An attachment portion (attachment base 135) to which the release means is attached;
The releasing means is disposed at a position where the separation from the mounting portion is impossible or difficult to separate at the initial position, and is disposed at a position where it is easily separated from the mounting portion by rotating in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A15.

  According to the feature A16, the release means can be separated from the mounting portion by rotating the release means. As a result, it is possible to deal with the case where the release means is replaced. Therefore, versatility can be improved.

  Here, from the viewpoint of versatility, when the release means is configured to be separable from the mounting portion, an illegal act of illegally separating the release means can be considered. On the other hand, according to this feature, since it is necessary to rotate the release means in a stage before separating the release means, it is necessary to destroy the trace means in order to separate the release means. As a result, the trace means will be destroyed when an unauthorized separation of the release means is attempted, so that the fraudulent act can be suppressed, and if the fraudulent act is performed, the fact is It can be easily confirmed.

Feature A17. It is attached to the monitoring object so as to restrict the specific operation, and specific restriction means that requires a predetermined release operation when releasing the restriction state (a cover member 331 for the second embodiment, A cover member 411 for the third embodiment, a cover member 511 for the fourth embodiment,
The release means is formed so as to be displaceable to a position where the trace means is destroyed when the release operation is performed on the specific restriction means. A gaming machine according to any one of A16.

  According to the feature A17, since the inhibition state is released by performing the release operation, it is possible to prevent the workability when the regular specific operation is performed during maintenance or the like from being deteriorated.

  In addition, when a release operation by the specific restriction unit is performed, the trace unit is destroyed, and a trace of the release operation is formed. As a result, when the fraudster performs an illegal release operation as a step before performing the illegal specific operation, a trace that is not intended for the fraudster is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal release operation and an illegal specific operation, and it is possible to easily confirm the fact when the illegal act is performed.

Feature A18. The specific restriction means and the release means are provided separately, and the specific restriction means is configured to require a separation operation for separating from the monitoring target as the release operation,
Further, when the separation operation is performed on the specific restriction means, a connection means (second means for connecting the release means to the specific restriction means so as to displace the trace means to a position where the trace means is destroyed accordingly. The claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339, and the hook portions 409 and 410 in the third embodiment.
The connection means releases the connection by performing a predetermined connection release operation, and the specific restriction means is not separated from the monitoring target, and the release means performs the release. The gaming machine according to Feature A17, wherein the gaming machine is provided so that the disconnection operation can be performed in an undisclosed situation.

  As a configuration in which the specific restriction unit and the release unit are linked, for example, a configuration in which the specific restriction unit and the release unit are integrally formed is conceivable. However, when the specific restricting means and the releasing means are integrally formed, only one of them cannot be separated, so that it is not possible to deal with a case where individual replacement is performed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific restricting means and the releasing means are provided separately, and both are connected via the connecting means. The connection can be released by performing a connection release operation. The connection release operation can be performed in a situation where the specific restriction unit is not separated from the monitoring target and is not released by the release unit. As a result, the release means and the specific restriction means can be separated separately by performing the connection release operation in this situation. Therefore, it is possible to deal with individual exchange between the two.

  On the other hand, when the separation operation of the specific restriction means is performed in a state where both are connected, the specific restriction means is separated and the release means is displaced. Thereby, the inhibition state by the trace means is also released.

  In particular, it is preferable that “the specific restriction unit can perform the separation operation without displacing the release unit in the specific direction when the connection release operation is performed”. Thereby, the specific limiting means can be separated without destroying the trace means. Therefore, it is possible to replace the specific restricting means without destroying the trace means.

Feature A19. The specific limiting means is a cover means provided to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The game according to Feature A18, wherein the cover means is provided so that the separation operation can be performed without displacing the release means in the specific direction when the connection release operation is performed. Machine.

  According to the feature A19, the trace means is protected by the cover means as the specific restriction means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means.

  In such a configuration, since the state of the trace means is directly confirmed, there arises a situation where it is desired to remove only the cover means. That is, while the access to the trace means is restricted by the cover means, there is a disadvantage that it is difficult to confirm the state of the trace means. In this case, if the cover means is removed, the trace means is destroyed, and an inspection for confirming the state of the trace means cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to separate only the cover means by performing the connection release operation of the release means. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm the state of the trace means directly. Therefore, when it is desired to perform an inspection for removing the cover means and confirming the state of the trace means, the inspection can be suitably handled. Therefore, inconveniences that can be caused by providing the cover means can be avoided.

  In addition, since the cover means and the release means are provided separately, it is possible to easily protect the trace means by the cover means while disposing the destruction portion inside the installation place of the trace means. It becomes.

  Feature A20. The gaming machine according to Feature A19, wherein the release means is disposed within a range protected by the cover means.

  According to feature A20, the release means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, fraudulent acts on the release means such as destruction of the release means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress new fraud that can occur due to the provision of the release means.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, a configuration in which “the cover means includes a wall portion that partitions and forms an accommodation region capable of accommodating at least a part of the trace means and the release means” is conceivable. .

Feature A21. The trace means includes a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information, and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) having a predetermined length and transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. Provided with a tag (IC tag 163),
The electronic tag is attached such that when the specific operation is performed, the antenna unit can be cut at a midpoint in the length direction,
The cover means reads the identification information by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag during a reading operation using the reader device that reads the identification information by receiving the radio wave. The gaming machine according to Feature A19 or Feature A20, characterized in that the position of the reader device is defined such that the reading position is at a position separated from the electronic tag by a predetermined distance or more. .

  According to the feature A21, since the monitoring target is provided with the electronic tag, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be suitably managed.

  In this configuration, when a specific operation is performed, the antenna unit may be cut at an intermediate position in the length direction. In this case, the communication of the electronic tag becomes impossible, so that the manager of the game hall can recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping the fact. .

  In addition, when the antenna portion is cut at an intermediate position in the length direction, communication is possible with the electronic tag, but it is assumed that the communicable distance is shortened. In this case, if the reading operation by the reader device is performed outside the communicable distance after the shortening, the fact of the fraudulent act can be recognized through the reading operation, but the reading operation is performed within the communicable distance after the shortening. If this happens, the fact of fraud cannot be recognized through the reading work.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, the reading position when the identification information is read by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag by the cover unit is greater than or equal to a predetermined distance with respect to the electronic tag The position of the reader device is defined so as to be separated from each other. As a result, if the game hall manager or the like decides to read the electronic tag with a reader device from a specific direction, if the antenna section is cut and the communicable distance becomes short, By grasping the fact that the identification information cannot be read by the reader device, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target.

Feature A22. The connecting means includes
A first engaging portion (claw portions 336 and 337 in the second embodiment, hook portions 409 and 410 in the third embodiment) provided in the specific restriction means;
A second engagement portion provided in the release means and engageable with the first engagement portion (receiving portions 338 and 339 in the second embodiment, slit 432 in the third embodiment) , 433), and
With
The specific restricting means and the releasing means are connected by the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion,
At least one of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is formed so as to be displaceable to the side where the engagement is released by applying an external force. A18 to A21 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A22, the engagement can be released by displacing at least one of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion to the side where the engagement is released as the connection release operation. As a result, the connection between the specific restricting means and the releasing means can be released without breaking. Therefore, for example, after the specific restriction means is once released, the same specific restriction means can be attached again.

Feature A23. When the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restriction unit guides the specific restriction unit so that the specific restriction unit passes through a predetermined specific route (the peripheral portion and the surrounding portion of the opening 413). 321)
When the specific restricting means is attached to the monitoring target via the specific path, the relative positional relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is set so that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. The gaming machine according to Feature A22, wherein:

  According to the feature A23, the route when the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target is defined as the specific route by the guide unit, and the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target via the specific route. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are naturally engaged. Thereby, when the specific restricting unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restricting unit and the releasing unit are naturally connected, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability associated with the connection.

  "The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are formed so as to be elastically deformable, and at least one of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion includes the specific restricting means. Is moved along the specific path, the first engagement portion slides with the second engagement portion, and one of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion takes the other. It is preferable that a guide surface that is guided so as to be elastically deformed is formed on the overcoming side. According to this configuration, the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is likely to occur, so that the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be suitably performed.

  Feature A24. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A23, wherein the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target by being connected to the release unit.

  According to the feature A24, the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target by being connected to the release unit. This eliminates the need for a configuration for attaching the specific restricting means to the monitoring target, thereby simplifying the configuration. Moreover, only the specific restriction means can be easily separated by releasing the connection by the connection means.

Feature A25. The connecting means connects the release means to the specific restricting means so that when the separation operation is performed on the specific restricting means, the trace means is displaced to a position to be destroyed accordingly. Connecting means (hook portions 409, 410 in the third embodiment),
Separately from the first connecting means, second connecting means for connecting the specific restricting means to the monitoring target so as to restrict the separation operation of the specific restricting means (claw portions 421 and 422 in the third embodiment). And box side receiving portions 423, 424),
The first connection means is configured to release the connection by performing a predetermined first connection release operation.
The second connection means is configured to release the connection by performing a predetermined second connection release operation.
The first connection means and the second connection means may be configured to perform the first connection release operation and the second connection in a situation where the specific restriction means is not separated from the monitoring target and is not released by the release means. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A23, wherein the gaming machine is provided so as to be able to perform a two-link release operation.

  According to the feature A25, when only the specific restriction means is separated, it is necessary to perform the first connection release operation and the second connection release operation, so that the separation of only the specific restriction means is complicated. Thereby, unauthorized separation of the specific restriction means can be suppressed.

Feature A26. The specific restriction means and the release means are provided separately,
The connecting means (the hook portions 509 and 510 and the engaging member 531 in the fourth embodiment) for connecting the specific restricting means and the releasing means is provided, and both are integrally connected by being connected by the connecting means. A displacement structure,
Protecting means (fourth protection means) that is provided so as to protect the connecting means around the connecting means, and that makes it difficult or difficult to perform an action of applying an external force to the connecting means to release the connected state. The gaming machine according to Feature A17, comprising a cover member 511) according to the embodiment.

  According to the feature A26, since the connecting means for connecting the specific restricting means and the releasing means is provided, the two can be integrally displaced.

  Here, when the connection between the two is released, the inhibition state is not released along with the release operation, and the trace means is not changed to the trace state. For this reason, since it becomes possible to perform cancellation | release operation, without destroying a trace means, it is unpreferable from a viewpoint of fraud suppression.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the protection means is provided, the act of releasing the connection can be suppressed. Thereby, the act of illegally releasing the connection by the connecting means can be suppressed.

Feature A27. The specific restricting means includes a wall part (wall part defining the internal space 512) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 512) that can accommodate the connecting means as the protection means,
The gaming machine according to Feature A26, wherein the connecting means is accommodated in the accommodation area.

  According to feature A27, the connecting means is housed in the housing area. Thereby, since the access with respect to a connection means is restrict | limited, the unauthorized cancellation | release of a connection can be suppressed. In this case, since the specific restriction unit functions as a protection unit, the specific restriction unit can be multi-functional and the configuration can be simplified.

Feature A28. The specific restriction means includes an opening (opening 513) for opening the accommodation area, and is attached by moving the monitoring target from the opening side in the attachment direction.
The connecting means includes
A first engagement portion (hook portions 509, 510) provided in the release means and protruding in a direction opposite to the attachment direction;
A second engagement portion (engagement member 531) provided in the accommodation region of the specific restriction means and formed to be engageable with the first engagement portion;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A27, wherein the first restricting portion and the second engaging portion are engaged to connect the specific restricting means and the releasing means.

  According to the feature A28, since the first engaging portion protrudes on the opposite side to the attaching direction of the specific restricting means, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion in a situation where the specific restricting means is attached. Will be arranged on the back side with respect to the opening. As a result, an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig from the opening and releasing the engagement can be suppressed.

Feature A29. When the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restriction unit guides the specific restriction unit so that the specific restriction unit passes through a predetermined specific path (periphery and surrounding portion of the opening 513). 321)
When the specific restricting means is attached to the monitoring target via the specific path, the relative positional relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is set so that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. A gaming machine according to Feature A28, wherein

  According to the feature A29, a route when the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target is defined as the specific route by the guide unit, and the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target via the specific route. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are naturally engaged. Thereby, when the specific restricting unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restricting unit and the releasing unit are naturally connected, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability associated with the connection.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the engagement portion is provided in the accommodation area, an external force cannot be applied from the outside, and thus there is a disadvantage that the engagement work is difficult to perform. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is naturally performed, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  "The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are formed so as to be elastically deformable, and at least one of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion includes the specific restricting means. Is moved along the specific path, the first engagement portion slides with the second engagement portion, and one of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion takes the other. It is preferable that a guide surface that is guided so as to be elastically deformed is formed on the overcoming side. According to this configuration, the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is likely to occur, so that the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be suitably performed.

Feature A30. Cover means (cover member 331 for the second embodiment, cover for the third embodiment) that is attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means A member 411, a cover member 511) for the fourth embodiment,
The release means is formed to be displaceable to a position where the trace means is destroyed in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A16.

  According to feature A30, the trace means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means.

  In such a configuration, the cover means may become an obstacle when the release means is displaced in order to destroy the trace means. In this case, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation on the cover means and then displace the release means, and there is a concern that workability may be lowered when the inhibition state of the trace means is released.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released, thereby reducing the workability when the inhibition state of the trace means is released. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the cover means is illegally separated in order to illegally access the trace means, an unintended trace is formed. Thereby, unauthorized access to the trace means can be suppressed.

  Note that the configuration described in any one of the features A20 to A29 may be applied to this feature. In this case, “specific restriction means” is replaced with “cover means”.

Feature A31. The cover means and the release means are provided separately,
Connection means (second embodiment) for connecting the release means to the cover means so as to displace the trace means to a position to destroy the trace means when the separation operation is performed on the cover means. Claw portions 336, 337 and receiving portions 338, 339, and hook portions 409, 410) for the third embodiment,
The connection means releases the connection by performing a predetermined connection release operation, and the specific restriction means is not separated from the monitoring target, and the release means performs the release. The gaming machine according to Feature A30, wherein the gaming machine is provided so that the connection release operation can be performed in an undisclosed situation.

  As a configuration in which the cover unit and the release unit are interlocked, for example, a configuration in which the cover unit and the release unit are integrally formed can be considered. However, when the cover means and the release means are integrally formed, only one of them cannot be separated, so that it is not possible to deal with the case of individual replacement.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the cover means and the release means are provided separately, and both are connected via the connection means. The connection can be released by performing a connection release operation. The connection release operation can be performed in a situation where the specific restriction unit is not separated from the monitoring target and is not released by the release unit. As a result, the release means and the cover means can be individually separated by performing the connection release operation in this situation. Therefore, it is possible to deal with individual exchange between the two.

  On the other hand, when the cover means is separated in a state where both are connected, the cover means is separated and the release means is displaced. Thereby, the inhibition state by the trace means is also released.

  In addition, since the cover means and the release means are provided separately, it is possible to easily protect the trace means by the cover means while disposing the destruction portion inside the installation place of the trace means. It becomes.

  Feature A32. The game according to Feature A31, wherein the cover means is provided so that the separation operation can be performed without displacing the release means in the specific direction when the connection release operation is performed. Machine.

  When the cover means is provided, access to the trace means is restricted by the cover means, but there is a disadvantage that it is difficult to confirm the state of the trace means. In this case, if the cover means is separated, the trace means is destroyed, and an inspection for directly confirming the state of the trace means cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to separate only the cover means by performing the connection release operation of the release means. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm the state of the trace means directly. Therefore, it is possible to suitably cope with an inspection in which the cover means is separated and the state of the trace means is confirmed. Therefore, inconveniences that can be caused by providing the cover means can be avoided.

Feature A33. The specific operation preventing means (first operation unit) is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and in order to release the restriction state, a release operation for displacing the restriction state to a release position for releasing the restriction state. Cover member 191 in the sixth embodiment, cover member 721 in the sixth embodiment,
The release means is disposed at a position that restricts the release operation of the specific operation blocking means at the initial position, and is displaced in the specific direction, thereby releasing the restriction or a position at which the restriction is easily released. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A16, wherein

  According to the feature A33, since the specific operation blocking means is provided, it is necessary to perform a release operation prior to the specific operation. The release operation is restricted by the release means. The restriction is released by displacing the release means from the initial position in a specific direction. Thereby, the trace means is destroyed in the stage before the release operation. Therefore, the release operation can be easily performed as compared with the configuration in which the trace means is destroyed along with the release operation.

  Moreover, since it is impossible or difficult to perform the release operation without destroying the trace means, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of performing the specific operation without leaving a trace.

  Feature A34. The gaming machine according to Feature A33, wherein the specific operation blocking means is a cover means provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means.

  According to the feature A34, the trace means is protected by the cover means as the specific operation blocking means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the functionality of the specific operation blocking means.

  In addition, the configuration limited by the feature A20 and the feature A21 may be applied to this feature.

Feature A35. The release means is displaced as the release means is displaced in the specific direction, and a destruction portion that destroys the trace means by contacting the trace means (destruction base portion 702 in the sixth embodiment). )
The cover means includes a wall portion that defines at least a part of the installation location of the trace means and an accommodation area (internal space 722) capable of accommodating the destruction portion, and at least one of the trace means is included in the accommodation area. Part and the destruction part,
The cover means includes an opening (slit 732, second arm opening 733, rotation opening 735) formed in the wall and through which the destruction portion can pass. The gaming machine according to Feature A34, wherein

  According to the feature A35, at least a part of the trace means and the destruction portion are accommodated in the accommodation area of the cover means. Thereby, access to the trace means and the destruction part can be limited.

  In this case, by restricting access to the trace means and the destructive portion, it is possible to suppress illegal acts against these, while there is a disadvantage that the displacement of the destructive portion is restricted by the cover means. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the opening part through which the destruction part can pass is provided in the wall part that defines the accommodation region, the displacement of the destruction part is not hindered by the cover means. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to restrict access to the trace means and the destruction portion while allowing the destruction portion to be displaced.

Feature A36. The release means is arranged inside the installation location where the trace means is installed and opposite to the side where the trace means is provided with respect to the installation location as the initial position, and the release means Comprises a destruction part (destruction base part 702) that is displaced in accordance with the displacement in the specific direction and destroys the trace means by contacting the trace means,
The destruction part is arranged in a state in which displacement in the specific direction is possible inside the installation place of the trace means as the initial position,
The cover means includes a wall portion that defines an accommodation area (internal space 722) capable of accommodating at least a part of the installation location of the trace means, and at least a part of the trace means and the destruction are included in the accommodation area Part of the house,
In the wall portion, when the destruction portion is displaced in the specific direction, an opening portion (slit 732, second arm portion opening portion 733, rotation portion) through which the destruction portion can pass is provided at the front side portion of the displacement. The gaming machine according to Feature A34, wherein an opening 735) is provided.

  According to the feature A36, since at least a part of the installation place of the trace means is accommodated by the cover means, the access to the trace means and the destruction portion arranged inside the installation place of the trace means is restricted. Can do.

  Further, since the destruction part is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means, compared to the configuration in which the destruction part is arranged outside the installation place of the trace means, the cover means can be formed small, Space can be saved.

  In this case, there may be a disadvantage that the displacement of the destruction portion is limited by the cover means. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the opening portion through which the destruction portion can pass is provided in the portion on the front side of the displacement of the destruction portion in the wall portion that defines the accommodation region, the displacement of the destruction portion is provided. Is not disturbed by the cover means. Thereby, the destruction part can be displaced while ensuring the above-mentioned effect.

Feature A37. Guide means (such as a combination of the peripheral edge of the opening 723 and the surrounding portion 321) for defining the cover means to move in a predetermined route in the attaching operation of the cover means;
A release-side engagement portion (second arm portion 704, protrusion 753) provided in the release means;
A cover-side engagement portion (first hook portion) that is provided on the cover means and regulates displacement of the cover means to the release position by contacting the release-side engagement portion from the front side of the specific path. 741, second hook portion 752),
When the cover means is disposed at the initial position through the specific path, when the cover side engagement part comes into contact with the release side engagement part from the original side of the specific path, the engagement parts An auxiliary surface (such as a hook-side inclined surface 741a) that assists the movement of the cover-side engagement portion to the front side of the specific path from the release-side engagement portion,
With
The game according to Feature A35 or Feature A36, wherein the release side engaging portion is displaced to a side where the restriction is released or loosened with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. Machine.

  Displacement of the release means in a specific direction allows the cover means to be displaced to the release position. Normally, after the cover means is attached first, the release of the cover means is restricted so as to restrict the displacement to the release position. A configuration in which the means is arranged can be considered. In this case, it becomes difficult to accommodate the destruction part in the accommodation area of the cover means or inside the installation place of the trace means, and there is a concern about an increase in size. However, if the mounting structure avoids the above inconvenience, there is a concern that the configuration is complicated and the workability of the cover means mounting work is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, when the cover means is attached, the cover means is guided by the guide means so as to pass through the specific path, and the cover side engaging portion is moved to the release side engaging portion from the original side of the specific path. Abut. In this case, the cover side engaging portion moves to the front side of the specific path while being assisted by the auxiliary surface. And the cover side engaging part contacts the cancellation | release side engaging part from the front side of a specific path | route. The displacement of the cover means to the release position is restricted by the contact from the front side of the specific path. The restriction is released or relaxed by displacing the release means in a specific direction. Thus, the release means is attached first, and then the displacement to the release position is regulated by the release means, and the cover means is attached so that the restriction is released by the displacement of the release means in a specific direction. Work can be done easily. Therefore, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  Note that “releasing the engagement” may be, for example, a configuration in which a predetermined play can occur in the engagement between the engagement portion and the release means.

  Feature A38. The release means includes an operation part (handle 714) exposed to the outside from the cover means through the opening in a state where the destruction part is accommodated by the cover means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A38, since the operation unit exposed to the outside from the cover unit is provided, the release unit can be displaced by gripping the operation unit or hooking the operation unit with a tool. Thereby, in the situation where the release means is accommodated by the cover means, an external force necessary for displacement can be easily applied to the release means. Therefore, in the situation where the destruction part is accommodated by the cover means, the release means can be easily displaced.

  In particular, since the operation portion is exposed to the outside through the opening that allows the release means to be displaced, it is not necessary to provide a separate opening in the cover means for the operation portion. Thereby, the structure of a cover means can be simplified.

  Feature A39. The wall portion is formed so as to sandwich at least a part of the trace means between the trace means when the trace means is installed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to feature A39, in a situation where the cover means is attached, at least a part of the trace means is sandwiched between the installation location and the wall of the cover means. Thereby, since the shearing force applied when the release means is displaced increases, the trace means is easily destroyed. Therefore, destruction of the trace means can be easily performed.

  Moreover, since it is hard to produce a clearance gap between a trace means and a wall part, the fraudulent act which inserts a jig | tool from the said clearance gap can be suppressed.

Feature A40. The trace means includes a first installation part (front-side fixed base part 133) formed on a first component (front-side structure 111) that constitutes the monitoring object, and a second component (back side) that constitutes the monitoring object. A boundary (in the second to sixth embodiments, a boundary 306) with a second installation part (back side fixed base part 134) formed on the structural body 112) and arranged to face the first installation part. In the seventh embodiment, it is provided so as to cross the boundary 809),
The release means is provided so as to be sandwiched between the first installation part and the second installation part, and the first installation part and the second installation part are coupled by a coupling tool (screw 153). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A39, wherein separation from both installation parts is prevented.

  According to the feature A40, the release unit can be fixed using the configuration in which the first installation unit and the second installation unit are coupled by the coupling tool.

Feature A41. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
When the cancellation state is canceled, the canceling unit is likely to cause the electronic tag to be damaged so that it is difficult to read the identification information from the electronic tag or the identification information cannot be read. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A41, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by checking whether or not the regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, when the inhibition state of the trace means is released by the release means, it becomes difficult to read the identification information from the electronic tag, or the identification information cannot be read. A manager of the game hall can recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping the fact.

Feature A42. The antenna unit includes a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
The game machine according to Feature A41, wherein the release means makes it easier to cause breakage in the disabled state generation unit when the inhibition state is released.

  According to the feature A42, when the inhibition state is released, the unusable state generation unit in the antenna unit is easily destroyed. In this case, it is possible for a game hall manager or the like to easily recognize that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping that the identification information cannot be read.

Feature A43. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
It has an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side and has a brittleness such that when it is peeled off from the pasting area, the base sheet (base sheet 161) has a brittleness so that it is destroyed. A seal member to which an electronic tag is attached (a seal seal 160 in the first to sixth embodiments; a seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment);
The seal member includes a predetermined boundary (the boundary 140 in the first embodiment, the boundary 306 in the second to sixth embodiments, and the seventh embodiment) of the monitoring target (main control device 63). Is pasted across the boundary 809),
The release means cuts the seal member along the boundary,
A surrounding frame (in the first embodiment, surrounding portion 180, second to second) is formed so as to protrude from the pasting region to which the seal member is pasted and further surround the pasting region, and guides the pasting position of the seal member. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A42, further comprising a surrounding portion 321 in the sixth embodiment and a surrounding portion 850 in the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature A43, since the sealing member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary, the specific operation is hindered by the sealing member. For this reason, when performing a specific operation, it is necessary to cut or peel off the sealing member along the boundary. In this case, if the seal member is to be peeled off, the seal member may be torn, and if the seal member is torn, it is expected that the antenna portion is cut accordingly. Therefore, according to this structure, the fraud detection effect by sticking the sealing member with an electronic tag is heightened.

  In this configuration, by sticking the seal member to the region surrounded by the surrounding frame, the positional relationship between the boundary and the sealing member and the positional relationship between the boundary and the antenna portion are naturally set to a predetermined positional relationship. Thereby, workability | operativity in the case of sticking a sealing member can be improved.

  In addition, since the surrounding frame is formed so as to protrude from the pasting region, even if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing member for fraud, it is difficult to perform the peeling action by the surrounding frame. Thereby, it is difficult to cancel the inhibition state by the seal member. Moreover, since complicated stress is easily applied to the seal member when the seal member is peeled off, the seal member is easily broken and the antenna portion is easily cut accordingly. Therefore, the act of peeling off the sealing member without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

  In this case, fraudulent acts can be suitably suppressed, but there is a concern that workability may deteriorate when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the release means for cutting the seal member along the boundary of the monitoring target is provided, it is possible to avoid a decrease in workability. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably suppress the act of illegally peeling off the seal member, and to suppress a decrease in workability when a specific operation is properly performed.

  Further, it is preferable that “the releasing means is arranged so as to constitute a part of the surrounding frame”. In this case, it becomes possible to arrange the release means at a predetermined installation location without interference between the release means and the surrounding frame.

  Note that the following features D1 to D11, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1, the following features G1 and G2, the following features H1 and H2, the following features I1 to I33, and the following feature J1 with respect to the configurations of the above features A1 to A43. A configuration limited by any one of J9 to J9, the following features K1 to K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature B1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (first member) that is pivotally supported at a predetermined location and abuts against the trace means when rotating from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined direction with the pivotal support as a center. 5 has a destruction base portion 312, and in the sixth embodiment has a destruction base portion 702), and the destruction portion destroys the trace means, thereby releasing the inhibition state. (Destructive member 311 in the fifth embodiment, destructive member 701 in the sixth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, the release means is pivotally supported with respect to the monitoring target, and the destruction portion contacts the trace means as the release means rotates. Along with the rotation of the release means, a pressing force based on the rotation of the release means is applied to the trace means, and the trace means is destroyed. In this case, since the pressing force is easily applied to the trace means as compared with the configuration in which the trace means is destroyed by sliding the release means, the trace means can be easily destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  Note that the configuration limited in any one of the features A10 to A16 may be applied to the configuration of the feature B1. Further, the configuration limited by any one of the features A4 to A8 and A17 to A43 may be applied. In this case, “displacement” is replaced with “rotation”.

  Further, the following feature C1, the following features D1 to D11, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1, the following features G1 and G2, the following features H1 and H2, the following features I1 to I33, the following features J1 to J9, and the following features K1 to A configuration limited by any one of K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature C1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If it is, a gaming machine provided with a trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
It is formed so as to be displaceable from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined specific direction, and the release means (first embodiment) destroys the trace means by the displacement in the specific direction and releases the inhibition state. Breaking member 210 in the form, breaking member 701 in the sixth embodiment,
The specific operation preventing means (first operation unit) is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and in order to release the restriction state, a release operation for displacing the restriction state to a release position for releasing the restriction state. Cover member 191 in the embodiment, cover member 721 in the sixth embodiment,
With
The release means is disposed at a position that restricts the release operation of the specific operation blocking means at the initial position, and is displaced in the specific direction, thereby releasing the restriction or a position at which the restriction is easily released. A gaming machine that is arranged in

  According to the feature C1, since the specific operation blocking means is provided, it is necessary to perform a release operation prior to the specific operation. The release operation is restricted by the release means. The restriction is released or easily released by displacing the release means from the initial position in a specific direction. As a result, the trace means is destroyed in the stage before the release operation is performed. Therefore, the force required for the release operation is reduced compared to the configuration in which the trace means is destroyed along with the release operation, so that the release operation can be easily performed. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  Moreover, since it is impossible or difficult to perform the release operation without destroying the trace means, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of performing the specific operation without leaving a trace.

  The features A4 to A16, A34 to A43, the feature B1, the following features D1 to D11, the following features E1 to E15, the following features F1, the following features G1 and G2, the following features H1 and H2, A configuration limited by any one of the following features I1 to I33, the following features J1 to J9, the following features K1 to K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature D1. An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
The electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one surface, so that a seal member (sealed in the first to sixth embodiments) The seal 160, a seal seal 844) in the seventh embodiment is configured, and the seal member is attached to the monitoring target (main control device 63),
Furthermore, an inability state generating part (slit 173) that is provided in the antenna part and disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
A region provided in at least one of the base sheet or the antenna portion, and the unusable state generating portion is formed in the antenna portion as it is destroyed by the stress when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting region An easily destructible part (antenna notch 176) that destroys
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately monitor the object to be monitored by confirming whether regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In this configuration, when the seal member is peeled off to perform fraud with respect to the monitoring target, it is expected that the impossible state generating portion is destroyed through the easy-to-break portion. Then, when the disabled state generation unit is destroyed, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of the illegal act by grasping that the game hall manager or the like cannot read the identification information.

  The “easily destructible portion” is “provided on at least one of the base sheet or the antenna portion, extends toward the incapable state generating portion, and stress is removed when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting region. Even if it is a destruction cut (antenna cut 176) that destroys the region where the unusable state generation portion is formed in the antenna portion as it concentrates on the end on the generation portion side and is destroyed. Good.

  Feature D2. The seal member has a predetermined boundary in the monitoring target (the boundary 140 in the first embodiment, the boundary in the second to sixth embodiments, the region where the unusable state generating portion is provided in the antenna unit). 306, the gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is pasted across the boundary 809) in the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature D2, since the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the predetermined boundary in the monitoring target, the border should be exposed when performing fraud by performing the work on the monitoring target boundary. It becomes necessary to cut the seal member along the boundary or peel off the seal member. In this case, if the seal member is cut along the boundary, the impossible state occurrence part will be destroyed accordingly, and it will be understood that the game hall manager etc. can not read the identification information By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of fraud. Further, even when the seal member is peeled off to expose the boundary, it is necessary to peel off the region where the unusable state generating portion is arranged on the seal member in order to expose the entire boundary. If this happens, it is expected that the impossible state occurrence part will be destroyed through the breaking cut, and it will be easy to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent activity by knowing that the game hall manager etc. cannot read the identification information. it can.

  The “predetermined boundary” includes a boundary between a plurality of component parts, and an easy-to-cut section that is formed on the surface of the monitoring target and allows the internal space of the monitoring target to be opened by cutting. included. The same applies to the following.

  Feature D3. In the sealing member, the easily breakable portion has a predetermined boundary in the monitoring target (the boundary 140 in the first embodiment, the boundary 306 in the second to sixth embodiments, and the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, wherein the gaming machine is pasted across the boundary 809).

  According to the feature D3, even if the seal member is peeled off from either of the opposing end portions facing each other across the boundary in the seal member, the impossible state generating portion can be destroyed through the easy-to-break portion. Thereby, when the seal member is peeled off so as to expose the boundary, the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken.

Feature D4. The antenna part is formed in a long shape, and the incapable state generating part is formed in the middle of the width direction of the antenna part,
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the easily breakable portion is formed on one end side in the width direction of the antenna portion and also on the other end side.

  According to the feature D4, since the easily breakable part is formed with respect to both ends of the antenna part in the width direction, when the seal member is peeled off, the failure state generating part is easily broken through the easily breakable part.

  Feature D5. The seal member is affixed so that at least a part of a predetermined boundary (boundaries 140, 306, 809) in the monitoring target is sandwiched between the easily breakable portion on one end side and the easily breakable portion on the other end side. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein:

  According to the feature D5, even if the seal member is peeled off from either of the opposing end portions that are opposed to each other across the boundary in the seal member, the impossible state generating portion can be destroyed through the easy-to-break portion. Thereby, when the seal member is peeled off so as to expose the boundary, the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken.

  Feature D6. The game machine according to feature D4 or D5, wherein the easily breakable parts on the one end side and the easily breakable parts on the other end side are formed so as not to line up in the width direction.

  According to the feature D6, in the configuration in which the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken through the easy breakage portion, the failure state occurrence portion is accidentally broken when the seal member is properly attached to the application region. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

  Feature D7. The easily breakable portions are formed from the midway position in the width direction of the antenna portion to the outside of the antenna portion in a region of the base sheet where the antenna portion is disposed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature D7, when the seal member is torn through the easily breakable portion, the torn region easily reaches the region where the unusable state generating portion is provided in the seal member. It becomes easy to cause destruction.

  Feature D8. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the easily breakable portion is formed on the base sheet and is not formed on the antenna portion.

  According to the feature D8, in the configuration in which the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken through the easy breakage portion, the failure state occurrence portion is accidentally broken when the seal member is properly attached to the application region. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

  Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the easy-to-break portion is formed in a region different from a region in which the unusable state generating portion is formed in the antenna unit. .

  According to the feature D9, when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting area, not only is the destruction of the area where the unusable state generating part is formed in the antenna part through the easily destructible part, but also the antenna through the easily destructible part. Cutting other than the region where the unusable state generating portion is formed is also expected.

Feature D10. The electronic tag includes a control unit that transmits radio waves including identification information read from the storage unit from the antenna unit,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the disabled state generating unit constitutes a circuit that performs impedance matching between the antenna unit and the control unit.

  According to the feature D10, the impedance matching is performed between the antenna unit and the control unit through the disabled state generating unit, so that the radio wave including the identification information is transmitted well, and the disabled state generating unit is destroyed. In this case, since impedance matching is not performed, it is impossible to transmit radio waves including identification information.

  Feature D11. Enclosed portions (enclosed portion 180 in the first embodiment, enclosed portions in the second to sixth embodiments) that are formed so as to surround the attaching region to which the seal member is attached and guide the attaching position of the seal member. 32. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, further comprising: an enclosure portion 850) according to the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature D11, by sticking the seal member to the region surrounded by the surrounding portion, the positional relationship between the boundary and the sealing member and the positional relationship between the boundary and the antenna portion are naturally set to a predetermined positional relationship. Thereby, workability | operativity in the case of sticking a sealing member can be improved.

  The “enclosure” may be formed as an enclosing frame protruding from the pasting area. In this case, even if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing member for fraud, it is difficult to perform the peeling action by the surrounding frame. If it does so, it will become easy to apply complicated stress to a seal member, and while it becomes easy to produce a tear to a seal member, it becomes easy to cut an antenna part in connection with it.

  Invention D group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such fraud, for example, the control board is housed in a transparent board box so that the state of the control board can be easily seen from the outside. The board box is sealed (so-called caulking structure). When opening the board box, leave a history of opening due to breakage, etc., or fragile seals that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle multiple case bodies that make up the board box and leave traces when peeled off Fraud countermeasures such as sticking a sticker are adopted. These fraud countermeasures assist the verification work when visually confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the control board has been replaced. There is an effect to make.

  Each of the above-described various fraud countermeasures is to visually check the control board and the board box, and daily confirmation work is complicated. In addition, it is a difficult task to find a cleverly restored restoration that is difficult to visually confirm the sealed location. In particular, such a problem becomes conspicuous in a large game hall with a large number of gaming machines.

  On the other hand, as a new fraud countermeasure other than a fraud countermeasure by visual confirmation, for example, an electronic tag including an IC chip portion and an antenna portion in which identification information such as a unique ID is stored in a control board or a board box containing the control board A configuration in which is attached is disclosed.

  If an electronic tag is attached, an administrator of the game hall or the like reads the identification information with the reader device, thereby confirming whether or not the control board is illegally exchanged. Such fraud countermeasures using an electronic tag allow fraud detection based on the reading result of the reader device. Therefore, the labor for fraud detection is less than the visual confirmation of the sealed portion, and fraud is not overlooked. Is expected to be.

  As a specific configuration for the fraud detection, for example, a configuration in which an electronic tag is attached so that the antenna unit is cut when the internal space of the board box is opened can be considered. Since the antenna part is formed to be optimal according to the operating frequency, if the antenna part is cut off due to unauthorized opening of the internal space of the board box, the antenna part is properly It is expected that the unauthorized release can be easily discovered by the fact that the function does not function and the identification information cannot be read.

  However, if the antenna unit is not cut well when the substrate box is illegally opened, the illegal discovery operation through the identification information reading operation cannot be performed suitably.

  Incidentally, the configuration limited by any one of the features D1 to D11 is the features A1 to A43, the features B1, the features C1, the features H1 and H2, the features I1 to I33, the features J1 to J9, The present invention may be applied to any one of the following features K1 to K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature E1. Provided with respect to a predetermined monitoring target (main control device 63) and being in a trace state, it is either a partial separation operation of the monitoring target or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target In a gaming machine provided with trace means for leaving a trace that a specific operation has been performed (the seal seal 160 in the first to sixth embodiments, the seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment),
When the specific operation is performed, the monitoring target is provided so as to require a predetermined preliminary operation prior to the specific operation, and the trace unit is set to the trace state when the specific operation is performed. A gaming machine comprising pre-operating means (a combination of the destruction member 210 and the cover member 191) provided as described above.

  According to the feature E1, since the pre-operation means is provided, it is necessary to perform the pre-operation prior to the specific operation on the monitoring target. Therefore, the work for performing the specific operation becomes complicated and illegal. It is possible to prevent or hesitate to perform a specific operation.

  Further, since the pre-operation means is provided so that the trace means is in the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed, the trace means is likely to be in the trace state when the specific operation is performed. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E2. A substrate box (substrate box 102) that is formed by combining a plurality of components (front-side component 111 and back-side component 112) and accommodates a control substrate (main control substrate 101);
Trace means (in the first to sixth embodiments, a seal seal is provided on the substrate box and leaves a trace that the specific operation for opening the internal space of the substrate box has been performed. 160, in a gaming machine provided with a seal seal 844) in the seventh embodiment,
When the specific operation is performed, the substrate box is provided so as to require a predetermined preliminary operation prior to the specific operation, and the trace means is set to the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed. A gaming machine comprising provided prior operation means (a combination of the destruction member 210 and the cover member 191).

  According to the feature E2, since the pre-operation means is provided, it is necessary to perform a pre-operation prior to opening the internal space of the substrate box, so that the internal space of the substrate box is opened. The work becomes complicated, and it becomes possible to prevent or hesitate to open the substrate box illegally.

  Further, since the pre-operation means is provided so that the trace means is in the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed, the trace means is likely to be in the trace state when the substrate box is illegally opened. . Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E3. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
The pre-operation means destroys the electronic tag so that it is difficult to read the identification information from the electronic tag or the identification information cannot be read when the pre-operation is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the game machine is easily generated.

  According to the feature E3, since the electronic tag is provided as the trace means, the manager of the game hall or the like can check whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be suitably managed. In addition, since the configuration of the prior operation means is applied to the configuration, the function of the electronic tag can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E4. The antenna unit includes a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein the preliminary operation means is configured to easily cause a breakage in the disabled state generation unit when the preliminary operation is performed.

  According to the feature E4, when a specific operation is performed on the monitoring target, the disabled state generation unit in the antenna unit is easily destroyed. In this case, it is possible for a game hall manager or the like to easily recognize that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping that the identification information cannot be read.

Feature E5. The prior operation means includes:
Specific restriction means provided to restrict the specific operation and to require a release operation to release the restriction state as the preliminary operation (the cover member 331 in the second embodiment, the first Cover member 411 in the third embodiment, cover member 511 in the fourth embodiment, cover member 721 in the seventh embodiment, and
When the release operation is performed with respect to the specific restriction unit, the state is generated along with the release operation, and the trace state generation unit (second state) that makes the trace unit the trace state by contacting the trace unit. Breaking member 311 in the embodiment, breaking member 401 in the third embodiment, breaking member 501 in the fourth embodiment, breaking member 701 in the seventh embodiment,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, comprising:

  According to the feature E5, the function of limiting the specific operation by the prior operation means and the function of setting the trace means to the trace state are performed.

Feature E6. The monitoring target is a substrate box (substrate box 102) that is formed by combining a plurality of structural bodies (front-side structural body 111 and back-side structural body 112) and accommodates a control board (main control board 101).
The trace means leaves a trace that a specific operation has been performed to open the internal space of the substrate box by being in the trace state,
Further, the prior operation means includes:
Even if at least the first structure and the second structure are separated from each other among the plurality of structures to open the internal space, the separation of the first structure and the second structure is limited. Specific restricting means (cover member 331 in the second embodiment, cover in the third embodiment) provided so as to require a release operation for releasing the restriction state as the prior operation. A member 411, a cover member 511 in the fourth embodiment, a cover member 721 in the seventh embodiment, and
When the release operation is performed with respect to the specific restriction unit, the state is generated along with the release operation, and the trace state generation unit (second state) that makes the trace unit the trace state by contacting the trace unit. Breaking member 311 in the embodiment, breaking member 401 in the third embodiment, breaking member 501 in the fourth embodiment, breaking member 701 in the seventh embodiment,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, comprising:

  According to the feature E6, the function of limiting the opening of the internal space of the substrate box by the prior operation means and the function of setting the trace means to the trace state are performed.

Feature E7. The specific restriction means is displaced to a position where the restriction state is released when the release operation is performed, and the trace state generating means is connected to the specific restriction means so that the release operation is performed. Is displaced along with the trace means,
Furthermore, an act of releasing the connected state by applying an external force to the connection part provided to protect the connection part around the connection part between the specific restriction unit and the trace state generation unit. The gaming machine according to feature E5 or E6, further comprising a protection unit (cover member 511 in the fourth embodiment) that makes it difficult or difficult to perform.

  According to feature E7, when the restricted state by the specific restricting unit is released, the specific restricting unit may be displaced to a position to release the restricted state. It is possible to prevent the workability in the process from being extremely lowered. In addition, since the trace state generating unit is displaced with the displacement of the specific limiting unit and abuts against the trace unit, the trace unit is set to the trace state, so that the configuration of the trace state generation unit is prevented from being complicated. It is done.

  However, in the configuration in which the specific restricting means and the trace state generating means are provided as described above, if the connection between the two is released, the trace means is changed to the trace state along with the release operation of the restricted state by the specific restricting means. It becomes impossible to do. On the other hand, by providing the protection means, it is possible to prevent an action to release the connection between the specific restriction means and the trace state generation means.

Feature E8. The trace means is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and is provided so as to be in the trace state when the restriction state of the specific operation is released.
The preliminary operation means is provided so as to prevent the restriction state from being released by the trace means, and the prevention means is provided so as to require a release operation to release the blocking state as the preliminary operation ( A cover member 331 according to the second embodiment, a cover member 411 according to the third embodiment, a cover member 511 according to the fourth embodiment, and a cover member 721 according to the seventh embodiment. When the release operation is performed with respect to the blocking means, the displacement means is displaced along with the release operation, and the trace means is brought into the trace state by coming into contact with the trace means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

  According to the feature E8, in order to perform the specific operation, it is necessary to release the blocking state by the preliminary operation unit and to release the restriction state of the trace unit. As a result, the work for performing the specific operation becomes complicated, and the act of performing the specific operation illegally can be prevented or hesitant.

  Further, since the pre-operation means is provided so that the trace means is in the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed, the opportunity for the trace means to be in the trace state causes the trace means to release the restricted state. It exists not only when an operation is performed, but also when a prior operation is performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, a trace means becomes easy to become a trace state, and it becomes possible to exhibit the function of a trace means suitably.

  Feature E9. The blocking means is a cover means that is provided so as to cover the trace means and is provided so as to require a displacement operation to displace the trace means from an installation location to a position that does not cover the trace means as the preliminary operation. The gaming machine according to Feature E8, wherein:

  According to the feature E9, the function of protecting the trace means by the prior operation means is performed. Further, accompanying the function to be protected, it is necessary to displace the cover means as a preliminary operation for the specific operation. And the trace means will be in a trace state with the said displacement. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably realize the function of the trace means in accordance with practical use.

  The trace means has a base sheet having an adhesive layer formed on one surface, and is affixed to the monitoring target, and is destroyed due to the stress when it is peeled off from the affixing area. In the configuration provided with the sealing member, the cover means may be provided so as to cover the sealing member.

  Further, in the configuration including the electronic tag having the storage unit storing the unique identification information and the antenna unit transmitting the radio wave including the identification information, the trace unit covers the electronic tag. The cover means may be provided.

  Feature E10. The pre-operation means is provided so as to cover the trace means, and a cover provided so as to require a displacement operation for displacing from the installation location to a position not covering the trace means as the preliminary operation. Means (cover member 331 in the second embodiment, cover member 411 in the third embodiment, cover member 511 in the fourth embodiment, cover member 721 in the seventh embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein:

  According to the feature E10, not only the function requiring the pre-operation and the function of setting the trace means to the trace state but also the function of protecting the trace means are performed by the preliminary operation means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the means for preliminary operation is achieved, and it can be satisfactorily realized that the function of the trace means is suitably exhibited.

Feature E11. When the displacement operation is performed on the cover unit, the pre-operation unit is displaced along with the displacement operation, and abuts on the trace unit to bring the trace unit into the trace state. Trace state generating means (destructive member 311 in the second embodiment, destructive member 401 in the third embodiment, destructive member 501 in the fourth embodiment, destructive member in the seventh embodiment Member 701),
The gaming machine according to Feature E9 or E10, wherein the trace state generating means is provided within a range covered by the cover means.

  According to the feature E11, by providing the trace state generating means, the trace means can be changed to the trace state in accordance with the displacement operation to the cover means. However, in this configuration, if the act of destroying the trace state generating means is performed, the trace means cannot be set to the trace state. On the other hand, since the trace state generating means is provided within the range covered by the cover means, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of destroying the trace state generating means.

  Feature E12. The pre-operation means is disposed on the inner side of the installation place (the pasting base 135) where the trace means is installed and on the opposite side of the side where the trace means is provided with reference to the installation place. When the displacement operation is performed on the cover means, the displacement means is displaced toward the side where the trace means is installed on the outside of the installation location, and comes into contact with the trace means. Trace state generating means (the destruction member 311 in the second embodiment, the destruction member 401 in the third embodiment, the destruction member 501 in the fourth embodiment, which makes the trace means the trace state) A gaming machine according to Feature E9 or E10, characterized in that it includes a breaking member 701) according to the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature E12, the trace state generating means is configured to be displaced in a direction in which the trace means is in contact with the trace means from the inside to the outside of the installation place of the trace means. Tends to come into contact with the trace means, and the trace means tends to be in a trace state. In addition to this, since the trace state generating means is disposed inside the installation place, the trace state generating means is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and the act of destroying the trace state generation means is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do.

Feature E13. The cover means and the trace state generation means are provided separately, and either one of the cover means and the trace state generation means is fixed or engaged with the other, so that they are integrally displaced. Configuration,
Further, an act of releasing the connected state by applying an external force to the connection part provided to protect the connection part around the connection part where the fixing or the engagement is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature E12, further comprising protection means (cover member 511) that makes it difficult or difficult to perform.

  According to the feature E13, the cover means and the trace state generating means are provided separately, so that the trace means is covered by the cover means while the trace state generating means is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means. Can be performed without difficulty. Also, the cover means and the trace state generating means provided separately are connected, and the trace state generating means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cover means, and the trace means is traced by contacting the trace means. Since it is a state, the complication of the structure for displacing a trace state generation means is suppressed.

  However, in the configuration in which the cover means and the trace state generating means are connected as described above, if the connection between the two is released, the trace means is changed to the trace state in accordance with the displacement of the cover means. Will not be able to. On the other hand, by providing the protection means, it is possible to prevent an act of releasing the connection between the cover means and the trace state generation means.

Feature E14. The trace means includes a first installation part (front-side fixed base part 133) formed on a first component (front-side structure 111) that constitutes the monitoring object, and a second component (back side) that constitutes the monitoring object. The structure 112) is provided so as to straddle the boundary with the second installation part (the back side fixed base part 134) arranged to face the first installation part,
The trace state generating means is provided so as to be sandwiched between the first installation part and the second installation part, and the first installation part and the second installation part are coupled by a coupling tool (screw 153). The gaming machine according to Feature E12 or E13, wherein separation from both installation parts is prevented.

  According to the feature E14, the means for preliminary operation can be fixed using the structure which couple | bonds a 1st installation part and a 2nd installation part with a coupling tool.

Feature E15. The trace means includes a first installation part (front-side fixed base part 133) formed on a first component (front-side structure 111) that constitutes the monitoring object, and a second component (back side) that constitutes the monitoring object. The structure 112) is provided so as to straddle the boundary with the second installation part (the back side fixed base part 134) arranged to face the first installation part,
Further, when the first component and the second component are separated, the two components are moved relative to each other in a direction that intersects the juxtaposed direction of the first installation portion and the second installation portion. Provided with regulating means (hook portion 118, slit 119) for regulating the separation direction as necessary,
The pre-operation means is provided between the first installation portion and the second installation portion, and the first installation portion in the case where both the component parts are relatively moved by being restricted by the restriction means. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E14, further comprising a locking portion provided so as to protrude on a movement path of the second installation portion.

  According to the feature E15, separation of both components can be prevented by the prior operation means itself, and when separating both the components, a tool or the like is passed through the boundary between the first installation portion and the second installation portion. Need to be inserted and the locking portion to be cut. Since the trace means is provided so as to straddle the boundary between the two installation portions, it is expected that the trace means is destroyed and becomes in a trace state during the cutting operation of the locking portion.

  The feature E group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such illegal acts, for example, a sealing structure (so-called caulking structure) is provided in the substrate box so that an opening history due to destruction or the like is left when the substrate box is opened, or a plurality of components constituting the substrate box are configured. Fraud countermeasures such as attaching a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle the case body and leave a trace when peeled off are employed. These fraud countermeasures assist the verification work when visually confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the control board has been replaced. There is an effect to make.

  In addition, as a new fraud countermeasure other than the fraud countermeasure that assists visual confirmation as described above, for example, an IC chip portion in which identification information such as a unique ID is stored in a control board or a board box that accommodates the control board, and The structure which attached the electronic tag containing an antenna part is disclosed.

  If an electronic tag is attached, an administrator of the game hall or the like reads the identification information with the reader device, thereby confirming whether or not the control board is illegally exchanged. Such fraud countermeasures using an electronic tag allow fraud detection based on the reading result of the reader device. Therefore, the labor for fraud detection is less than the visual confirmation of the sealed portion, and fraud is not overlooked. Is expected to be.

  As a specific configuration for the fraud detection, for example, a configuration in which an electronic tag is attached so that the antenna unit is cut when the internal space of the board box is opened can be considered. Since the antenna part is formed to be optimal according to the operating frequency, if the antenna part is cut off due to unauthorized opening of the internal space of the board box, the antenna part is properly It is expected that the unauthorized release can be easily discovered by the fact that the function does not function and the identification information cannot be read.

  However, even if a fraud countermeasure that assists the visual confirmation as described above or a fraud countermeasure using an electronic tag is applied, the configuration for assisting the visual confirmation when the board box is illegally opened is broken, etc. Otherwise, the fraud detection work cannot be performed suitably. In the latter case, fraud detection work cannot be suitably performed unless the identification information can be satisfactorily read from the electronic tag when the board box is illegally opened.

  In addition, for any one of the configurations of the features E1 to E15, the features A1 to A43, the feature B1, the features C1, the features D1 to D11, the following features H1 and H2, the following features I1 to I33, A configuration limited by any one of the features J1 to J9, the following features K1 to K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature F1. A part of the predetermined monitoring target (main control device 63) is separated or moved from the predetermined installation location of the monitoring target by applying an external force to the trace state. In the gaming machine provided with the trace means (the seal seal 160 in the second to fourth embodiments, the seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment) to leave a trace of
It is provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means, and is provided so that an external force can be applied to the trace means when it is removed from the installation location so as to release the state opposed to the trace means. A gaming machine comprising a cover means (a combination of the destruction member 311 and the cover member 331).

  According to the feature F1, by providing the cover means, it is possible to protect the trace means when the gaming machine is transported. In addition, when the cover unit is removed from the installation location in order to perform fraud on the monitoring target, it is expected that an external force is applied to the trace unit by the cover unit itself. Thereby, when an illegal act is performed with respect to the monitoring target, the trace means is likely to be in a trace state. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Note that the features A1 to A43, the features B1, the features C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the following features I1 to I33, the following features J1 to J9, and the following A configuration limited by any one of the features K1 to K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature G1. A part of the predetermined monitoring target (main control device 63) is separated or moved from the predetermined installation location of the monitoring target by applying an external force to the trace state. In a gaming machine provided with trace means for leaving a trace of that (sealing seal 160 in the second to fourth embodiments, sealing seal 844 in the seventh embodiment)
Cover means provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means and provided so as to hit the trace means when removed from the installation location so as to release the state opposed to the trace means A gaming machine comprising a member 311 for destruction and a cover member 331).

  According to the feature G1, since the cover means is provided, it is possible to protect the trace means when the gaming machine is transported. In addition, when the cover unit is removed from the installation location in order to perform fraud on the monitoring target, it is expected that an external force is applied to the trace unit by the cover unit itself. Thereby, when an illegal act is performed with respect to the monitoring target, the trace means is likely to be in a trace state. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Note that the features A1 to A43, the features B1, the features C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the following features I1 to I33, the following features J1 to J9, and the following A configuration limited by any one of the features K1 to K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature H1. A part of the predetermined monitoring target (main control device 63) is separated or moved from the predetermined installation location of the monitoring target by applying an external force to the trace state. In a gaming machine provided with trace means (a seal seal 160 in the second to sixth embodiments) for leaving a trace of
It is provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means, and is provided so as to require displacement in a predetermined specific direction when being removed from the installation location so as to release the facing state. Cover means (such as a cover member 331);
A rear-side arrangement portion (breaking member 311 or the like) provided on the cover means and arranged on the opposite side of the specific direction from at least a part of the trace means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, by providing the cover means, it becomes possible to protect the trace means when the gaming machine is transported. In addition, when the cover unit is removed from the installation location in order to perform fraud on the monitoring target, it is expected that an external force is applied to the trace unit by the cover unit itself. Thereby, when an illegal act is performed with respect to the monitoring target, the trace means is likely to be in a trace state. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature H2. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the rear side arrangement portion is arranged on the opposite direction side of the end portion on the opposite direction side in the trace means.

  According to the feature H2, when the cover unit is removed from the installation location, the cover unit easily applies an external force to the trace unit.

  Note that the features A1 to A43, the feature B1, the feature C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the features I1 to I33, and the features J1 to J9 are compared to the configuration of the feature H1 or H2. The configuration limited by any one of the following features K1 to K8, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature I1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (destructive base portion 811 in the seventh embodiment) that comes into contact with the trace means when displaced from a predetermined initial position toward a predetermined specific direction; A release means (breaking member 810 in the seventh embodiment) that contacts the surface to be destroyed (side region 139) formed on the trace means and breaks the trace means to release the inhibition state; ,
With
An edge (cutting edge 851) that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the surface to be destroyed from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion,
A first inclined portion (first inclined portion 852) that contacts the surface to be destroyed in an inclined state when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A second inclined portion (second inclined portion 853) that is provided separately from the first inclined portion and abuts in a state inclined with respect to the surface to be destroyed when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic I1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided at the edge of the breaking portion, that is, the edge portion, if the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, one of the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion is provided. The part comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the surface to be broken increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided in addition to the first inclined portion, for example, a predetermined portion can be intentionally cut, or the destruction portion can be reduced in size. In addition, the inclination angle can be increased. Thereby, destruction of a desired trace means can be performed.

Feature I2. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (destructive base portion 811 in the seventh embodiment) that comes into contact with the trace means when displaced from a predetermined initial position toward a predetermined specific direction; A release means (breaking member 810 in the seventh embodiment) that contacts the surface to be destroyed (side region 139) formed on the trace means and breaks the trace means to release the inhibition state; ,
With
An edge (cutting edge 851) that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the surface to be destroyed from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion,
A first inclined portion (first inclined portion 852) that contacts the surface to be destroyed in an inclined state when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A second inclined portion (second inclined portion 853) that comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed in an inclined state or an angle different from the first inclined portion when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I2, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation. When the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided at the edge of the breaking portion, that is, the edge portion, if the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, one of the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion is provided. The part comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the surface to be broken increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion having a different inclination direction or angle with respect to the surface to be broken compared to the first inclined portion are provided, for example, a predetermined location is intentionally Can be cut, or the inclination angle can be increased while reducing the size of the destruction portion. Thereby, destruction of a desired trace means can be performed.

Feature I3. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (destructive base portion 811 in the seventh embodiment) that comes into contact with the trace means when displaced from a predetermined initial position toward a predetermined specific direction; A release means (breaking member 810 in the seventh embodiment) that contacts the surface to be destroyed (side region 139) formed on the trace means and breaks the trace means to release the inhibition state; ,
With
An edge (cutting edge 851) that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the surface to be destroyed from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion,
A first inclined portion (first inclined portion 852) formed to be inclined so that a portion relatively near and a portion far from the surface to be broken is generated;
A second slope formed by inclining to form a portion that is relatively close to and far from the surface to be broken and inclined at a different angle or in a different direction from the first inclined portion. Part (second inclined part 853),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I3, the trace unit is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace unit is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided at the edge of the breaking portion, that is, the edge portion, if the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, one of the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion is provided. The part comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the surface to be broken increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion having a different inclination direction or angle with respect to the surface to be broken compared to the first inclined portion are provided, for example, a predetermined location is intentionally Can be cut, or the inclination angle can be increased while reducing the size of the destruction portion. Thereby, destruction of a desired trace means can be performed.

  Feature I4. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are formed on the same plane.

  According to the feature I4, the destruction portion can be reduced in size.

  Feature I5. When the edge is formed only by the inclination of the first inclined portion, the dimension in the specific direction between the shortest distance portion of the edge with respect to the fracture surface and the longest distance portion with respect to the fracture surface. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the second inclined portion is formed so as to be smaller.

  According to the feature I5, the amount of displacement of the release means in the specific direction required for the destruction of the trace means can be small. Thereby, destruction of a trace means can be performed easily.

Feature I6. In the breaking portion, a tip portion (tip portion 892) pointed in the specific direction is formed by the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion,
The relative position of the tip portion with respect to the specific location is set so that the tip portion abuts against a specific location predetermined in the trace means when the release means is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5.

  According to the feature I6, the tip end portion comes into contact with the specific portion, and thus the contact range is reduced. Thereby, since the pressing force given to a specific location is raised, a specific location can be destroyed easily.

  Moreover, since a specific location can be destroyed preferentially, the trace means can be suitably destroyed.

  Note that, for example, when the high strength portion and the low strength portion are formed so that the strength is relatively high on the surface to be broken, the high strength portion may be a “specific portion”. When there is a place where the trace is easy to confirm when it is destroyed in comparison with other places on the surface, the place may be a “specific place”.

Feature I7. The edge is formed such that both end portions are formed between intermediate portions in a direction intersecting the specific direction,
The first inclined portion is inclined so as to enter a direction opposite to the specific direction from one end portion of the both end portions toward the intermediate portion,
Any of the features I1 to I5, wherein the second inclined portion is inclined so as to enter a direction opposite to the specific direction from the other end portion of the both end portions toward the intermediate portion. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the characteristic I7, the protrusion of the destruction part in the specific direction can be suppressed, and the downsizing of the destruction part can be achieved. In this case, since both end portions of the destruction portion are the front side in the specific direction, the trace means is destroyed from both end portions of the destruction portion.

Feature I8. The first inclined portion has an outer end at the same position in the intersecting direction with respect to the corresponding end of the both ends in the intersecting direction on the surface to be broken or a position outside the same. It is formed to become,
The second inclined portion is located at the same position in the intersecting direction with respect to the corresponding end portion of the both end portions in the intersecting direction on the surface to be broken or at a position outside the second inclined portion. The gaming machine according to Feature I7, wherein the gaming machine is formed to be

  According to the feature I8, the trace means is destroyed from both ends in the direction in which the edge is formed on the surface to be broken by the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. Thereby, the inconvenience that the end portion of the trace means remains without being destroyed and the inhibition state is not released can be avoided.

  Feature I9. The operation of inclining the other end side with the one end side as a fulcrum in the both end portions of the edge is a unit operation, and the release means is repeated while repeating the unit operation so that the fulcrum side is alternately changed. The gaming machine according to Feature I7 or Feature I8, wherein the gaming machine has a structure for unit operation that can be displaced in a specific direction.

  According to the characteristic I9, by performing the unit operation, one end portion is a fulcrum, the other end portion is a power point, and the contact portion between the inclined portion provided on the other end side and the trace means is a point of action. Therefore, the pressing force on the contact portion is increased. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

  Further, since both end portions of the destruction portion are on the front side in the specific direction, destruction by the first inclined portion and destruction by the second inclined portion are alternately performed for each unit operation. Thereby, since the unit operation that does not cause the destruction of the trace means is unlikely to occur, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability that may be caused by the unit operation.

Feature I10. Walls (front-side pasting plate portion 141, back-side pasting plate portion 144, each facing plate) that form an accommodation area in which the destruction portion can be accommodated are installed at the installation location (the pasting base 135) where the trace means is placed. Parts 801, 802, 806, 807),
The breaking portion is disposed in the accommodating area as the initial position, in a state displaceable toward the outside of the accommodating area as the specific direction,
The game machine according to Feature I9, wherein an inner wall surface of the wall portion and the destruction portion are in contact with each other or in close proximity via a predetermined gap.

  According to the characteristic I10, the trace means is destroyed by displacing the destruction part from the inside to the outside of the accommodation area. In this case, since the destructive part has only to be pulled outward, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released.

  Further, since the destruction part is accommodated in the accommodation area, the destruction part is in a protected state, and it is possible to suppress illegal actions to the release means such as destruction of the destruction part and to save space. it can.

  In such a configuration, the wall portion and the destruction portion that define the accommodation region are in contact with each other or close to each other with a predetermined gap, so that it is difficult to insert a jig between the wall portion and the destruction portion. It has become. Thereby, the illegal act which inserts a jig | tool from between a wall part and a destruction part can be suppressed. In this case, when the destructive part is displaced in a specific direction, the destructive part and the inner wall surface of the wall part interfere with each other, and it is difficult to perform the displacement.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature I9, the trace means can be suitably destroyed even when the interference occurs.

Feature I11. Cover means (cover member 861 in the seventh embodiment) attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The release means is formed so as to be displaced in a specific direction in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target and to be displaced to a position to destroy the trace means. And
The cover means includes
A wall portion (wall portion 864, 865, etc.) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 862) that can accommodate the installation location of the trace means;
An opening for opening the accommodation region (opening 863);
It is attached by moving in the attachment direction from the opening side with respect to the monitoring target,
The game machine according to Feature I9 or Feature I10, wherein an inner wall surface of the wall portion and an installation location of the trace means are in contact with or close to each other through a predetermined gap.

  According to the feature I11, by storing the trace means in the storage area, the trace means is protected by the cover means. As a result, access to the trace means is restricted, so that illegal acts on the trace means can be prevented or hesitant.

  Further, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released. Thereby, the fall of workability | operativity when canceling the inhibition state of a trace means can be suppressed.

  In such a configuration, since the gap between the inner wall surface of the wall portion forming the accommodation region and the installation location of the trace means is set small, it is possible to suppress fraud such as inserting a jig through the gap. it can. In this case, when performing the separation operation of the cover means, the inner wall surface of the wall portion and the installation location of the trace means may interfere with each other, resulting in inconvenience that it is difficult to perform the separation operation.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature I9, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  Feature I12. The gaming machine according to Feature I11, wherein a gap between the installation location of the trace means and the wall portion is set to gradually increase as the separation operation is performed.

  According to the feature I12, since the interval between the installation place of the trace means and the wall portion is set to gradually increase as the separation operation is performed, the operating range of the destruction portion in the release means interlocking with the cover means is large. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suitably destroy the trace means by the release means while achieving the effect of the feature I10.

Feature I13. Guide means (regulating convex portions 821, 822 and restricting opening portions 823, 824) for regulating displacement of the destruction portion in the specific direction,
The guide means is displaced in the specific direction so that an operation range of the unit operation is increased until the release means is displaced from the initial position to a release position for releasing the trace state of the trace means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I9 to I12, wherein the regulation is canceled or gradually relaxed.

  In view of the workability of destruction of the trace means, it is preferable that the operation range is large. However, if the operating range is enlarged, the position of the destruction part with respect to the trace means may be displaced, and a part different from the desired part may be destroyed and the inhibition state may not be released. In particular, when the destruction is performed from both ends of the to-be-destructed surface as in the feature I8, the destruction from the both ends is not performed due to the position shift, and the effect as shown in the feature I8 may not be obtained. obtain.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, in a situation in which the release means is disposed closer to the initial position, the displacement of the release means is defined in a specific direction, so that the displacement of the destruction portion with respect to the trace means hardly occurs. .

  On the other hand, as the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the regulation in the specific direction is released or loosened in stages, thereby increasing the operating range. Thereby, the workability | operativity which concerns on destruction of a trace means can be aimed at, avoiding the said inconvenience.

Feature I14. The guide means allows the displacement of the breaking portion in the specific direction, the displacement of the edge in both directions, and the displacement in a direction perpendicular to both the specific direction and the both directions. Is to regulate
As the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, the displacement in both directions is canceled so that the range in which the edge can be displaced in both directions increases while restricting the displacement in the orthogonal direction. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to Feature I13, which is loosened in stages.

  According to the feature I14, the restriction of the displacement of the destruction portion in the both end directions is released or gradually loosened, so that the displaceable range of the destruction portion in the both end directions becomes large. Thereby, since the operation range of the destruction part in unit operation becomes large, the effect of feature I13 can be acquired.

  On the other hand, the displacement of the fractured portion in the direction orthogonal to both the specific direction and the direction between the both ends of the edge is maintained in a regulated state, and thus the displacement of the fractured portion in that direction occurs. Hateful. As a result, it is possible to achieve both of the effects of optimizing the destruction of the trace means through the unit operation and suppressing the displacement of the destruction portion.

Feature I15. A convex portion (saw portion 854) that is provided between the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion and is convex toward the specific direction is formed by a pair of inclined portions having different inclination directions. And
The relative positions of both of the features I7 to I14 are set such that, when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the convex portion is in contact with a predetermined specific place in the trace means The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature I15, since the tip of the convex portion comes into contact with the specific portion, the contact range is reduced. Thereby, the pressing force given to a specific location is raised. Therefore, a specific location can be destroyed suitably.

  In addition, it is good for the inclination angle of the inclination part which forms a convex part to be larger than the 1st inclination part and the 2nd inclination part. Thereby, destruction of a specific location can be performed easily.

  In addition, for example, when a high-strength location and a low-strength location are formed so that the strength is relatively high on the fracture surface, the high-strength location may be a “specific location”. When there is a place where the trace is easy to confirm when it is destroyed in comparison with other places on the surface, the place may be a “specific place”.

Feature I16. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) including a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) that transmits a radio wave including the identification information;
A sealing member (sealing seal 844) in which the electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one surface;
With
The seal member is affixed to an affixing surface (affixing region 136) provided on the monitoring target,
An enclosure portion (enclosed portion 850) that is provided corresponding to the application surface and guides the application position of the seal member so that the surface to be destroyed of the seal member faces the edge of the destruction portion;
When the seal member is affixed to the affixing surface, the encircling part is arranged so that the affixed surface is wider than the area of the seal member within a range in which the fractured surface does not deviate from the position facing the edge Forming,
When the sticking position of the seal member varies within the range of the surrounding portion, the position of the specific portion varies within the specific range,
Further, the feature I15 is characterized in that a plurality of the convex portions are arranged along the edge so that a region where the convex portion is formed at the edge is opposed to the whole or substantially the entire region of the specific range. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I16, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by confirming whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  Here, the enclosing position guides the seal member so that the seal member is attached to the position where the surface to be destroyed of the seal member faces the edge of the destruction portion. Thereby, the workability | operativity at the time of sticking a sealing member can be aimed at.

  Further, since the enclosing portion is formed such that the application surface is larger than the area of the seal member within a range where the surface to be destroyed and the edge face each other, a space is created in the application position of the seal member with respect to the application surface. Thereby, the sticking operation | work of a sealing member can be performed easily. In this case, the clearance may cause the inconvenience that the sticking position of the seal member fluctuates within the range of the encircling portion, and the convex portion does not contact the specific portion. However, if the inclination angle of the inclined portion that forms the convex portion is reduced in order to increase the region of the convex portion, the contact range between the specific portion and the convex portion increases, and the ease of destruction of the trace means decreases. To do.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the convex portion is formed along the edge so that the region in which the convex portion is formed is opposed to the entire or substantially entire region of the specific range corresponding to the change in the position of the specific portion. Are arranged side by side, it is possible to cope with the above-mentioned positional deviation while ensuring the ease of destruction of the trace means.

  Feature I17. The releasing means, when displaced in the specific direction, makes contact with a place different from the broken part and leaves a trace that an external force has been given to the different part (a broken part 815, an extended part 814). ). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I16.

  According to the feature I17, when the release unit is displaced in a specific direction, a trace by the trace applying unit is formed in addition to the portion to be broken by the broken part. Thereby, since a plurality of trace locations are formed, it can be easily confirmed visually that the inhibition state of the trace means has been released.

  Feature I18. The trace imparting means is configured so that when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the trace is in contact with the trace means at a timing different from the timing when the edge is in contact with the surface to be broken. The gaming machine according to Feature I17, wherein a positional relationship with the means is set.

  According to feature I18, since the start timing of destruction by the destruction portion and the start timing of external force application by the trace applying means are different, the load related to the start of destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion and the external force application by the trace application means The load related to the start of is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means etc. which may arise by providing a trace provision means can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the shortest distance from the trace imparting unit to the trace unit in the specific direction is set to be different from the shortest distance from the edge to the trace unit” Can be considered.

  Feature I19. The trace imparting means abuts on the surface to be destroyed after the destruction means is destroyed by the destruction part by the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, and the part destroyed by the destruction part The gaming machine according to Feature I18, wherein the gaming machine is an expansion unit (expansion unit 814) that expands.

  According to the feature I19, after the trace means is destroyed by the destruction part, the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part. Thereby, since the range of a destruction location becomes large, it can confirm easily that the destruction of the trace means was performed.

Feature I20. The trace means includes a sealing member (sealing seal 844) having a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) formed on one surface thereof,
The seal member is affixed to an affixing surface (affixing region 136) provided on the monitoring target,
The destructive portion is to release the inhibition state by cutting the seal member so that a first region and a second region sandwiching a predetermined boundary on the surface to be destructed of the seal member,
The game machine according to Feature I19, wherein the expansion unit is configured to expand the boundary in a direction intersecting a direction in which the boundary extends.

  According to the feature I20, the obstructed state is released by cutting the broken surface of the seal member by the breaking portion. In this case, a boundary is formed as a trace of destruction. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether the release means has been displaced and whether the specific operation has been performed by confirming whether the boundary is formed.

  In such a configuration, the boundary extends in a direction intersecting with the extending direction by the extension portion. Thereby, the boundary as a broken part becomes conspicuous, and the boundary can be easily confirmed. Therefore, the workability of the confirmation work can be improved.

  Feature I21. The extension portion is formed so as to gradually contact the seal member in a direction intersecting the boundary from the boundary and away from the boundary in accordance with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to Feature I20, wherein:

  According to the feature I21, when the release unit is displaced in a specific direction, the boundary is pushed and widened in the direction intersecting by the extension portion. In this case, since the contact range between the expansion portion and the seal member is narrow, the pressing force applied to the seal member is increased. Thereby, the boundary can be easily expanded.

  Feature I22. In any one of the characteristics I19 to I21, the extension portion is provided at a site on the original side in the specific direction with respect to the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion in the destruction portion. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I22, the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided on the front side in the specific direction in the destruction portion, the extended portion is provided on the original side, and the positional relationship between the two is defined. Displacement in a specific direction is performed. Thereby, by displacing the release means, after the destruction by the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion is naturally performed, the expanded portion is expanded by the expanding portion. Therefore, the complexity of work can be avoided.

Feature I23. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features I19 to I22, wherein the extension portion is in contact with at least a part of the antenna portion.

  According to the feature I23, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately monitor the object to be monitored by confirming whether the regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, at least a part of the antenna part comes into contact with the extension part and is destroyed by the contact. Thereby, since the length dimension of an antenna part becomes short, communicable distance becomes short or communication becomes impossible. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the specific operation has been performed by performing the above confirmation work.

Feature I24. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
A sealing member (sealing seal 844) in which the electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one surface;
With
The seal member is attached to the monitoring target;
The antenna unit is provided with a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
When the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the positional relationship between the destruction part and the seal member is set so that the destruction part destroys the impossible state generation part,
The expanding portion is applied to a portion around the unusable state generating portion in the seal member so as to expand a broken portion destroyed by the breaking portion when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features I19 to I23, wherein the gaming machine is in contact with each other.

  According to the feature I24, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by confirming whether or not regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the disabling state generating part is destroyed by the destroying part, and radio waves cannot be transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to recognize that the release means has been displaced and the specific operation has been performed by grasping that the identification information reading operation cannot be performed.

  In addition, when the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part, the destruction part becomes conspicuous. Thereby, it can be easily confirmed that the displacement of the release means and the specific operation have been performed visually.

Feature I25. The extension portion is disposed inside the installation location (the sticking base 135) where the trace means is installed and on the opposite side of the side where the trace means is provided with respect to the installation location as the initial position. ,
In the case where the extension portion is displaced at the installation location of the trace means so that the extension portion is displaceable toward the side where the trace means is installed outside the installation location as the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features I19 to I24, wherein an opening (expansion region 808) through which the extension portion can pass is formed in a portion on the front side of the displacement.

  According to the feature I25, since the extended portion is arranged inside the trace means, the extended portion is protected by the installation location of the trace means, and it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as destroying the extended portion. it can. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing an extended part can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the extended portion is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means, the overall size becomes compact as compared with the configuration in which the extended portion is arranged outside the installation place of the trace means. Thereby, space saving can be achieved.

  In such a configuration, an opening through which the extension part can pass is provided so that the movement of the release means in the specific direction is not hindered by the extension part. Thereby, interference with the installation part of an extended part and a trace means is avoided.

Feature I26. The destruction part is a first destruction part;
The trace means includes a part defining a first outer peripheral surface (side surface region 139) facing a predetermined direction as an outer peripheral surface of the trace means, and a second outer peripheral surface (surface region) facing a direction different from the first outer peripheral surface. 137) is provided, and
The first destructive portion is for destructing a portion defining the first outer peripheral surface when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction.
Any of the features I1 to I16, wherein the release means includes a second destruction portion (breaking portion 815) for breaking a portion defining the second outer peripheral surface separately from the first destruction portion. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature I26, when the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, a destruction location by the second destruction portion is formed separately from the destruction location by the first destruction portion. These broken portions are formed on different outer peripheral surfaces in the trace means. Thereby, since the destruction location as a trace location is easy to see, it can confirm easily visually that the inhibition state of the trace means was cancelled | released.

  Feature I27. The second destructive portion is configured such that when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the edge contacts the trace means at a timing different from the timing when the edge contacts the destroyed surface. The gaming machine according to Feature I26, wherein a positional relationship with the trace means is set.

  According to feature I27, since the start timing of the destruction by the first destruction portion and the start timing of the destruction by the second destruction portion are different, the load relating to the start of destruction of the trace means by the first destruction portion, The load related to the start of destruction of the trace means by the destruction part is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means which may arise by providing the 2nd destruction part can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “in the specific direction, the shortest distance from the second fracture portion to the trace means is set to be different from the shortest distance from the edge to the fracture surface. "A configuration is possible.

Feature I28. The first destructive portion is disposed as an initial position inside the installation location (the pasting base 135) where the trace means is installed in a state capable of displacement in the specific direction,
In the situation where the first destructive portion is disposed at the initial position, the second destructive portion is provided with the trace means through an opening (breaking portion opening 818) provided at an installation location of the trace means. Is provided so as to protrude in a direction intersecting the specific direction outside the installation location of
The opening is formed to extend in the specific direction so that the second destruction portion can be displaced in the specific direction,
The part that defines the first outer peripheral surface is installed at a position in the middle of the displacement in the specific direction of the first destruction part at the installation location of the trace means,
The gaming machine according to Feature I26 or Feature I27, wherein the part that defines the second outer peripheral surface is installed so as to straddle the opening.

  According to feature I28, since the first destruction portion is arranged inside the trace means, the first destruction portion is protected by the installation location of the trace means, and the first destruction portion is released to be destroyed. It is possible to suppress cheating on the means. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing the cancellation | release means can be suppressed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, a part of the part that defines the first outer peripheral surface that is installed on the front side in the specific direction with respect to the first destruction part is destroyed. Further, the second breaking portion is also displaced in a specific direction along the opening in accordance with the displacement of the release means. In this case, the site | part which straddles the opening part among the site | parts which prescribe | regulate a 2nd outer peripheral surface is destroyed by the 2nd destruction part. Thereby, the site | part which prescribes | regulates a 2nd outer peripheral surface will be destroyed.

  In addition, in the structure provided with the mounting part by which the said monitoring object is mounted, and the said monitoring object is mounted with respect to the said mounting part, the said 2nd destruction part is provided with the said mounting part. It is good to protrude on the opposite side to the side. Thereby, since it is easy for a manager of a game hall or the like to visually confirm the location where the second destruction portion is provided, it is possible to improve the workability of the confirmation work.

Feature I29. The opening is a first opening;
A second opening (boundary 809) through which the first destructive portion can pass is provided at a position on the front side of the displacement when the first destructive portion is displaced in the specific direction at the installation location of the trace means. And
The first opening and the second opening communicate with each other;
The gaming machine according to Feature I28, wherein the part defining the first outer peripheral surface is disposed across both the first opening and the second opening.

  According to the feature I29, when the second destruction part is displaced in a specific direction along the first opening, the destruction part by the second destruction part and the destruction part by the first destruction part are continuous. Thereby, the destruction location by the 1st destruction part will be expanded. Therefore, the destruction location becomes conspicuous, and the visual confirmation of whether or not the specific operation has been performed can be suitably performed.

Feature I30. The first destructive portion is formed such that both end portions are formed between intermediate portions in a direction intersecting the specific direction,
The releasing means performs the unit operation so that the side serving as a fulcrum is alternately changed, with the operation of inclining the other end side in the state where one end side is the fulcrum of both ends of the first destruction portion as a unit operation. Comprising a unit operation structure that allows the release means to be displaced in the specific direction while repeating;
The gaming machine according to Feature I28 or Feature I29, wherein a predetermined gap is formed between a peripheral edge of the opening and the second destruction portion so as to enable the unit operation.

  According to the feature I30, by performing the unit operation, one end portion is a fulcrum, the other end portion is a power point, and the contact portion between the inclined portion provided on the other end side and the trace means is a point of action. Therefore, the pressing force on the contact portion is increased. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

  Here, since a predetermined gap is generated between the opening and the second destruction portion, when the unit operation is performed, the second destruction portion and the periphery of the opening are unlikely to interfere with each other. Thereby, the inconvenience that the unit operation is hindered by the second destruction portion can be avoided.

Feature I31. It is attached to the monitoring target so as to restrict the specific operation, and includes a specific restriction means (cover member 861) that requires a predetermined release operation when releasing the restriction state,
The release means and the specific restriction means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engaging recess 871) provided in the specific restricting means,
When the release operation is performed on the specific restriction unit, the release unit is configured to be displaced in the specific direction in conjunction with the release operation and destroy the trace unit. The gaming machine according to any one of I30.

  According to the feature I31, since the inhibition state is released by performing the release operation, it is possible to prevent the workability when the regular specific operation is performed during maintenance or the like from being deteriorated.

  In addition, when a release operation by the specific restriction unit is performed, the trace unit is destroyed, and a trace of the release operation is formed. As a result, when the fraudster performs an illegal release operation as a step before performing the illegal specific operation, a trace that is not intended for the fraudster is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal release operation and an illegal specific operation, and it is possible to easily confirm the fact when the illegal act is performed.

  In such a configuration, the release means and the specific restriction means are connected via engagement between the second destruction part and a receiving part provided in the specific restriction means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

Feature I32. The specific restriction means includes
A wall portion (wall portion 864, 865, etc.) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 862) that can accommodate the installation location of the trace means;
An opening for opening the accommodation region (opening 863);
It is attached by moving in the attachment direction from the opening side with respect to the monitoring target,
The gaming machine according to Feature I31, wherein the receiving portion is formed in a portion on the back side of the accommodation area with respect to the opening.

  According to the feature I32, the receiving portion is formed on the back side of the accommodation area with the opening as a reference. Thereby, the engaging part of a 2nd destruction part and a receiving part will be arrange | positioned in the back | inner side on the basis of an opening part. Thereby, an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig from the opening and releasing the engagement can be suppressed.

Feature I33. Cover means (cover member 861) attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The release means and the cover means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engaging recess 871) provided in the cover means,
The release means is configured to displace the trace means by displacing in the specific direction in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target. The gaming machine according to any one of I26 to I30.

  According to the feature I33, the trace means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means. In this case, when the release means is displaced in order to destroy the trace means, the cover means may become an obstacle. In this case, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation on the cover means and then displace the release means, and there is a concern that workability may be lowered when the inhibition state of the trace means is released.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released, thereby reducing the workability when the inhibition state of the trace means is released. Can be suppressed. Further, when the cover means is illegally separated in order to illegally access the trace means, an unintended trace is formed. Thereby, unauthorized access to the trace means can be suppressed.

  Here, the release means and the cover means are connected through engagement between the second breaking portion and a receiving portion provided in the cover means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

  Note that the configuration described in the feature I32 may be applied to this feature. In this case, “specific restriction means” is replaced with “cover means” and “release operation” is replaced with “separation operation”.

  Further, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features I1 to I33, the features A1 to A43, the feature B1, the feature C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the features F1, and the features G1. The configuration limited by any one of the above features H1 to H2, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature J1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A release means (destroy member 810 in the seventh embodiment) for destroying the trace means by displacing from a predetermined initial position toward a predetermined specific direction, and releasing the inhibition state;
With
The release means is
A destruction part (a destruction base part 811 in the seventh embodiment) which causes the destruction of the trace means to be brought into contact with the trace means by displacing in the specific direction and to release the inhibition state;
Provided separately from the destructive part, and by applying a displacement in the specific direction, trace imparting means (a fracture part 815 for contacting an area different from the destructive part and leaving an external force applied to the different part) , Extension 814),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Further, since the release means having the destruction portion is provided, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Thereby, when performing specific operation for an inspection etc., the said specific operation can be performed suitably.

  In such a configuration, since the trace imparting means is provided, the trace by the trace imparting means is formed in the trace means separately from the portion to be destroyed by the destruction portion. Thereby, since a plurality of trace locations are formed, it can be easily confirmed visually that the inhibition state of the trace means has been released. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature J2. The trace imparting means is configured such that when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the trace is in contact with the trace means at a timing different from the timing when the destruction portion is in contact with the trace means. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein a positional relationship with the means is set.

  According to the feature J2, since the start timing of the destruction by the destruction portion and the start timing of the external force application by the trace applying means are different, the load relating to the start of the destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion and the external force application by the trace application means The load related to the start of is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means etc. which may arise by providing a trace provision means can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the shortest distance from the trace imparting means to the trace means in the specific direction is set to be different from the shortest distance from the destruction portion to the trace means” Configuration is conceivable.

  Feature J3. The trace imparting means abuts on the trace means after the destruction means is destroyed by the destruction portion by the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, and a portion destroyed by the destruction portion is detected. The gaming machine according to Feature J2, which is an expansion unit (expansion unit 814) to be expanded.

  According to the feature J3, after the trace means is destroyed by the destruction part, the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part. Thereby, since the range of a destruction location becomes large, it can confirm easily that the destruction of the trace means was performed.

Feature J4. The trace means includes a sealing member (sealing seal 844) having a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) formed on one surface thereof,
The seal member is affixed to an affixing surface (affixing region 136) provided on the monitoring target,
The breaking portion is to release the inhibition state by cutting the seal member so that a first region and a second region sandwiching a predetermined boundary are generated in the seal member,
The game machine according to Feature J3, wherein the expansion unit is configured to expand the boundary in a direction intersecting a direction in which the boundary extends.

  According to the feature J4, the inhibition state is released by the sealing member being cut by the breaking portion. In this case, a boundary is formed as a trace of destruction. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether the release means has been displaced and whether the specific operation has been performed by confirming whether the boundary is formed.

  In such a configuration, the boundary is widened in the direction intersecting with the extending direction by the extension portion. Thereby, the boundary as a broken part becomes conspicuous, and the boundary can be easily confirmed. Therefore, the workability of the confirmation work can be improved.

  Feature J5. The extension portion is formed so as to gradually contact the seal member in a direction intersecting the boundary from the boundary and away from the boundary in accordance with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. A gaming machine according to Feature J4, wherein

  According to the feature J5, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the boundary is pushed and expanded in the direction intersecting by the extension portion. In this case, since the contact range between the expansion portion and the seal member is narrow, the pressing force applied to the seal member is increased. Thereby, the boundary can be easily expanded.

  Feature J6. The extension portion is provided at a site on the original side in the specific direction with respect to an edge that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the trace means from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5, wherein:

  According to the feature J6, an edge is provided on the front side in the specific direction in the destruction part and an extension part is provided on the original side, and the displacement in the specific direction is performed in a state where the positional relationship between the two is specified. . Thereby, by displacing the release means, the destruction portion is expanded by the expansion portion after the destruction by the edge is naturally performed. Therefore, the complexity of work can be avoided.

Feature J7. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, wherein the extension portion is in contact with at least a part of the antenna portion.

  According to the feature J7, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall and the like can appropriately monitor the object to be monitored by confirming whether regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, at least a part of the antenna part comes into contact with the extension part and is destroyed by the contact. Thereby, since the length dimension of an antenna part becomes short, communicable distance becomes short or communication becomes impossible. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the specific operation has been performed by performing the above confirmation work.

Feature J8. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
A sealing member (sealing seal 844) in which the electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one surface;
With
The seal member is attached to the monitoring target;
The antenna unit is provided with a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
When the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the positional relationship between the destruction part and the seal member is set so that the destruction part destroys the impossible state generation part,
The expanding portion is applied to a portion around the unusable state generating portion in the seal member so as to expand a broken portion destroyed by the breaking portion when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J7, wherein the gaming machine is in contact with each other.

  According to the feature J8, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately monitor the object to be monitored by confirming whether the regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the disabling state generating part is destroyed by the destroying part, and radio waves cannot be transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to recognize that the release means has been displaced and the specific operation has been performed by grasping that the identification information reading operation cannot be performed.

  In addition, when the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part, the destruction part becomes conspicuous. Thereby, it can be easily confirmed that the displacement of the release means and the specific operation have been performed visually.

Feature J9. The extension portion is arranged inside the installation location (the pasting base 135) where the trace means is installed, and the opposite side of the side where the trace means is provided with respect to the installation location as an initial position,
In the case where the extension portion is displaced at the installation location of the trace means so that the extension portion is displaceable toward the side where the trace means is installed outside the installation location as the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J8, wherein an opening (expansion region 808) through which the extension portion can pass is formed in a portion on the front side of the displacement.

  According to the feature J9, since the extended portion is arranged inside the trace means, the extended portion is protected by the installation location of the trace means, and it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as destroying the extended portion. it can. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing an extended part can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the extended portion is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means, the overall size becomes compact as compared with the configuration in which the extended portion is arranged outside the installation place of the trace means. Thereby, space saving can be achieved.

  In such a configuration, an opening through which the extension part can pass is provided so that the movement of the release means in the specific direction is not hindered by the extension part. Thereby, interference with the installation part of an extended part and a trace means is avoided.

  The feature J group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such illegal acts, for example, a sealing structure (so-called caulking structure) is provided in the substrate box so that an opening history due to destruction or the like is left when the substrate box is opened, or a plurality of components constituting the substrate box are configured. Fraud countermeasures such as attaching a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle the case body and leave a trace when peeled off are employed. These fraud countermeasures assist the verification work when visually confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the control board has been replaced. There is an effect to make.

  In addition, as a new fraud countermeasure other than the fraud countermeasure that assists visual confirmation as described above, for example, an IC chip portion in which identification information such as a unique ID is stored in a control board or a board box that accommodates the control board, and The structure which attached the electronic tag containing an antenna part is disclosed.

  If an electronic tag is attached, an administrator of the game hall or the like reads the identification information with the reader device, thereby confirming whether or not the control board is illegally exchanged. Such fraud countermeasures using an electronic tag allow fraud detection based on the reading result of the reader device. Therefore, the labor for fraud detection is less than the visual confirmation of the sealed portion, and fraud is not overlooked. Is expected to be.

  As a specific configuration for the fraud detection, for example, a configuration in which an electronic tag is attached so that the antenna unit is cut when the internal space of the board box is opened can be considered. Since the antenna part is formed to be optimal according to the operating frequency, if the antenna part is cut off due to unauthorized opening of the internal space of the board box, the antenna part is properly It is expected that the unauthorized release can be easily discovered by the fact that the function does not function and the identification information cannot be read.

  However, even if a fraud countermeasure that assists the visual confirmation as described above or a fraud countermeasure using an electronic tag is applied, the configuration for assisting the visual confirmation when the board box is illegally opened is broken, etc. Otherwise, the fraud detection work cannot be performed suitably. In the latter case, fraud detection work cannot be suitably performed unless the identification information can be satisfactorily read from the electronic tag when the board box is illegally opened.

  A configuration limited to any one of the features I1 to I16 and I26 to I33 may be applied to the configuration of the feature J group.

  Further, with respect to the configuration of the feature J group, the features A1 to A43, the features B1, the features C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the features F1, the features G1, and the features H1 to H1. A configuration limited by any one of H2, the following features K1 to K7, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature K1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (seal seal 844 in the seventh embodiment) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A release means (destroy member 810 in the seventh embodiment) for destroying the trace means by displacing from a predetermined initial position toward a predetermined specific direction, and releasing the inhibition state;
With
The trace means includes a part defining a first outer peripheral surface (side surface region 139) facing a predetermined direction as an outer peripheral surface of the trace means, and a second outer peripheral surface (surface region) facing a direction different from the first outer peripheral surface. 137) is provided, and
The release means is
A first destructive portion (destructive base portion 811 in the seventh embodiment) that destroys a site defining the first outer peripheral surface by displacing in the specific direction;
A second destruction part (breaking part 815) that is provided separately from the first destruction part and breaks a part that defines the second outer peripheral surface by displacing in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic K1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Further, since the release means having the first destruction portion is provided, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Thereby, when performing specific operation for an inspection etc., the said specific operation can be performed suitably.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, a destruction location by the second destruction portion is formed separately from the destruction location by the first destruction portion. These broken portions are formed on different outer peripheral surfaces in the trace means. Thereby, since the destruction location as a trace location is easy to see, it can confirm easily visually that the inhibition state of the trace means was cancelled | released.

  Feature K2. When the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the second destructive portion and the trace are so arranged that the destruction by the second destructive portion is started at a timing different from the start timing of the destruction by the first destructive portion. The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein a positional relationship with the means is set.

  According to the feature K2, since the start timing of the destruction by the first destruction part and the start timing of the destruction by the second destruction part are different, the load relating to the start of destruction of the trace means by the first destruction part, The load related to the start of destruction of the trace means by the destruction part is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means which may arise by providing the 2nd destruction part can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the shortest distance from the second destruction portion to the trace means in the specific direction is set to be different from the shortest distance from the first destruction portion to the trace means. Is possible. "

Feature K3. The first destructive portion is disposed as an initial position inside the installation location (the pasting base 135) where the trace means is installed in a state capable of displacement in the specific direction,
In the situation where the first destructive portion is disposed at the initial position, the second destructive portion is provided with the trace means through an opening (breaking portion opening 818) provided at an installation location of the trace means. Is provided so as to protrude in a direction intersecting the specific direction outside the installation location of
The opening is formed to extend in the specific direction so that the second destruction portion can be displaced in the specific direction,
The part that defines the first outer peripheral surface is installed at a position in the middle of the displacement in the specific direction of the first destruction part at the installation location of the trace means,
The gaming machine according to Feature K1 or Feature K2, wherein the part that defines the second outer peripheral surface is installed so as to straddle the opening.

  According to the feature K3, the first destruction part is disposed inside the trace means, so that the first destruction part is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and the first destruction part is destroyed. It is possible to suppress cheating on the means. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing the cancellation | release means can be suppressed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the first destruction portion comes into contact with a portion installed on the front side in the specific direction with respect to the first destruction portion among the portions defining the first outer peripheral surface, The part is destroyed. Further, the second breaking portion is also displaced in a specific direction along the opening in accordance with the displacement of the release means. In this case, the site | part which straddles the opening part among the site | parts which prescribe | regulate a 2nd outer peripheral surface is destroyed by the 2nd destruction part. Thereby, the site | part which prescribes | regulates a 2nd outer peripheral surface will be destroyed.

  In addition, in the structure provided with the mounting part by which the said monitoring object is mounted, and the said monitoring object is mounted with respect to the said mounting part, the said 2nd destruction part is provided with the said mounting part. It is good to protrude on the opposite side to the side. Thereby, since it is easy for a manager of a game hall or the like to visually confirm the location where the second destruction portion is provided, it is possible to improve the workability of the confirmation work.

Feature K4. The opening is a first opening;
A second opening (boundary 809) through which the first destructive portion can pass is provided at a position on the front side of the displacement when the first destructive portion is displaced in the specific direction at the installation location of the trace means. And
The first opening and the second opening communicate with each other;
The gaming machine according to Feature K3, wherein the portion defining the first outer peripheral surface is disposed across both the first opening and the second opening.

  According to the feature K4, when the second destruction part is displaced in a specific direction along the first opening, the destruction part by the second destruction part and the destruction part by the first destruction part are continuous. Thereby, the destruction location by the 1st destruction part will be expanded. Therefore, the destruction location becomes conspicuous, and the visual confirmation of whether or not the specific operation has been performed can be suitably performed.

Feature K5. The first destructive portion is formed such that both end portions are formed between intermediate portions in a direction intersecting the specific direction,
The releasing means performs the unit operation so that the side serving as a fulcrum is alternately changed, with the operation of inclining the other end side in the state where one end side is the fulcrum of both ends of the first destruction portion as a unit operation. Comprising a unit operation structure that allows the release means to be displaced in the specific direction while repeating;
The gaming machine according to Feature K3 or Feature K4, wherein a predetermined gap is formed between a peripheral edge of the opening and the second destruction portion so as to enable the unit operation.

  According to the feature K5, by performing the unit operation, one end portion serves as a fulcrum, the other end portion serves as a power point, and the contact portion between the other end side portion and the trace means functions as an action point. The pressing force against the contact point is increased. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

  Here, since a predetermined gap is generated between the opening and the second destruction portion, when the unit operation is performed, the second destruction portion and the periphery of the opening are unlikely to interfere with each other. Thereby, the inconvenience that the unit operation is hindered by the second destruction portion can be avoided.

Feature K6. It is attached to the monitoring target so as to restrict the specific operation, and includes a specific restriction means (cover member 861) that requires a predetermined release operation when releasing the restriction state,
The release means and the specific restriction means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engaging recess 871) provided in the specific restricting means,
When the release operation is performed on the specific restriction unit, the release unit is displaced in the specific direction in conjunction with the release operation, and destroys the trace unit. The gaming machine according to any one of K5.

  According to the feature K6, since the inhibition state is released by performing the release operation, it is possible to suppress deterioration in workability when performing the regular specific operation during maintenance or the like.

  In addition, when a release operation by the specific restriction unit is performed, the trace unit is destroyed, and a trace of the release operation is formed. As a result, when the fraudster performs an illegal release operation as a step before performing the illegal specific operation, a trace that is not intended for the fraudster is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal release operation and an illegal specific operation, and it is possible to easily confirm the fact when the illegal act is performed.

  In such a configuration, the release means and the specific restriction means are connected via engagement between the second destruction part and a receiving part provided in the specific restriction means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

Feature K7. The specific restriction means includes
A wall portion (wall portion 864, 865, etc.) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 862) that can accommodate the installation location of the trace means;
An opening for opening the accommodation region (opening 863);
It is attached by moving in the attachment direction from the opening side with respect to the monitoring target,
The gaming machine according to Feature K6, wherein the receiving portion is formed in a portion on the back side of the accommodation area with respect to the opening.

  According to the characteristic K7, the receiving part is formed on the back side of the accommodation area with the opening as a reference. Thereby, the engaging part of a 2nd destruction part and a receiving part will be arrange | positioned in the back | inner side on the basis of an opening part. Thereby, an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig from the opening and releasing the engagement can be suppressed.

Feature K8. Cover means (cover member 861) attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The release means and the cover means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engaging recess 871) provided in the cover means,
The release means is configured to displace the trace means by displacing in the specific direction in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K5.

  According to the feature K8, the trace means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means. In this case, when the release means is displaced in order to destroy the trace means, the cover means may become an obstacle. In this case, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation on the cover means and then displace the release means, and there is a concern that workability may be lowered when the inhibition state of the trace means is released.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released, thereby reducing the workability when the inhibition state of the trace means is released. Can be suppressed. Further, when the cover means is illegally separated in order to illegally access the trace means, an unintended trace is formed. Thereby, unauthorized access to the trace means can be suppressed.

  Here, the release means and the cover means are connected through engagement between the second breaking portion and a receiving portion provided in the cover means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

  Note that the configuration described in the feature K7 may be applied to this feature. In this case, “specific restriction means” is replaced with “cover means” and “release operation” is replaced with “separation operation”.

  The feature K group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such illegal acts, for example, a sealing structure (so-called caulking structure) is provided in the substrate box so that an opening history due to destruction or the like is left when the substrate box is opened, or a plurality of components constituting the substrate box are configured. Fraud countermeasures such as attaching a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle the case body and leave a trace when peeled off are employed. These fraud countermeasures assist the verification work when visually confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the control board has been replaced. There is an effect to make.

  In addition, as a new fraud countermeasure other than the fraud countermeasure that assists visual confirmation as described above, for example, an IC chip portion in which identification information such as a unique ID is stored in a control board or a board box that accommodates the control board, and The structure which attached the electronic tag containing an antenna part is disclosed.

  If an electronic tag is attached, an administrator of the game hall or the like reads the identification information with the reader device, thereby confirming whether or not the control board is illegally exchanged. Such fraud countermeasures using an electronic tag allow fraud detection based on the reading result of the reader device. Therefore, the labor for fraud detection is less than the visual confirmation of the sealed portion, and fraud is not overlooked. Is expected to be.

  As a specific configuration for the fraud detection, for example, a configuration in which an electronic tag is attached so that the antenna unit is cut when the internal space of the board box is opened can be considered. Since the antenna part is formed to be optimal according to the operating frequency, if the antenna part is cut off due to unauthorized opening of the internal space of the board box, the antenna part is properly It is expected that the unauthorized release can be easily discovered by the fact that the function does not function and the identification information cannot be read.

  However, even if a fraud countermeasure that assists the visual confirmation as described above or a fraud countermeasure using an electronic tag is applied, the configuration for assisting the visual confirmation when the board box is illegally opened is broken, etc. Otherwise, the fraud detection work cannot be performed suitably. In the latter case, fraud detection work cannot be suitably performed unless the identification information can be satisfactorily read from the electronic tag when the board box is illegally opened.

  A configuration limited to any one of the features I1 to I25 may be applied to the configuration of the feature K group.

  Further, with respect to the configuration of the feature K group, the features A1 to A43, the feature B1, the feature C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the feature F1, the feature G1, and the features H1 to H1. A configuration limited by any one of H2, the above-described features J1 to J7, the following features L1 to L11, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature L1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If it is done, the trace means (the seal seal 160 in the first embodiment) to leave the trace,
A release means (destroy member 210 in the first embodiment) for destroying the trace means and releasing the inhibition state;
With
The release means is
It is provided at a predetermined initial position, and at least a part of the trace means is pushed in the specific direction by displacing from the initial position in a predetermined specific direction, thereby destroying the trace means and causing the inhibition state. A destruction part (cutting part 212) to be released;
At least in a situation where the trace means is pushed by the destruction portion, the contact with the trace means from a direction opposite to the specific direction, and the pushed portion escapes in the specific direction when breaking by the destruction portion A suppressor (paste base 135) for suppressing this,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, when the destruction part is displaced in the specific direction from the initial position, the trace means is pushed in the specific direction by the destruction part, and the trace means is destroyed. In this case, the restraining part comes into contact with the trace means from the direction opposite to the specific direction, and the part pushed by the destruction part is difficult to escape in the specific direction, so the force related to the destruction is applied to the trace means. It becomes possible to give suitably. Thereby, destruction of a trace means can be performed easily and cancellation | release of the inhibition state of a trace means can be performed easily. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

Feature L2. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If left, the trace is left, and the trace means formed in the form of a sheet (the seal seal 160 in the first embodiment),
A release means (destroy member 210 in the first embodiment) for destroying the trace means and releasing the inhibition state;
With
The release means is
Provided at a predetermined initial position, and by displacing at least a part of the trace means in the specific direction by displacing from the initial position in a predetermined specific direction, the trace means is destroyed and the inhibition state Breaking part (cutting part 212) to release
At least in a situation where the trace means is pressed by the destruction portion, the contact is made with the trace means from a direction opposite to the specific direction, and the pressed portion is bent in the specific direction at the time of destruction by the destruction portion. A restraining part (affixing base 135) that suppresses running away,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L2, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Moreover, since the trace means is formed in a sheet shape, the trace means can be easily installed and the space occupied by the trace means can be reduced.

  Here, when the destruction part is displaced in the specific direction from the initial position, the trace means is pushed in the specific direction by the destruction part, and the trace means is destroyed. In this case, the restraining part comes into contact with the trace means from a direction opposite to the specific direction, and the place pressed by the destruction part in the trace means is less likely to bend in the specific direction. It becomes possible to give suitably. Thereby, destruction of a trace means can be performed easily and cancellation | release of the inhibition state of a trace means can be performed easily. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

Feature L3. The suppressor is
The breaking portion is formed so as to be able to enter, and an opening (boundary 140) disposed on the front side in the specific direction with respect to the breaking portion,
An intersection surface (side surface region 139) provided so as to sandwich the opening, and intersecting the specific direction;
With
The trace means is in contact with the crossing surface so as to cover or straddle the opening,
When the destruction portion is displaced in the specific direction, the destruction portion breaks the region covering the opening portion or the region straddling the opening portion by entering the opening portion, and releases the inhibition state. The gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2, wherein

  According to the feature L3, when the destruction part is displaced in a specific direction, the destruction part enters the opening. In this case, the region that covers or straddles the opening in the trace means is caused by the destruction portion and the crossing surface, and the region is sheared. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

Feature L4. In the installation place of the trace means, the opening is formed so as to be exposed on the surface thereof, and the intersecting surface is formed so as to sandwich the opening.
The trace means is installed from the outside with respect to the installation location of the trace means, so as to cover or straddle the opening and is in contact with the intersecting surface,
When the destructive portion is displaced in the specific direction, the position of the trace means that touches the location covering or straddles the opening and the position where the trace portion enters the opening due to the destruction of the trace means is The gaming machine according to Feature L3, wherein the gaming machine is provided at an initial position.

  According to the feature L4, when the destructive part is displaced in a specific direction, the destructive part comes into contact with a place covering or straddling the opening provided in the installation place of the trace means. In this case, the installation location of the trace means functions as a suppression unit that suppresses the escape of the destruction unit in a specific direction. Thereby, simplification of a structure can be achieved.

  Feature L5. The gaming machine according to feature L4, further comprising holding means (a cover member 191) that holds the destruction portion in a state where the removal of the destruction portion is restricted.

  According to the feature L5, since the holding means is provided, even if the destruction portion is arranged with the outside of the installation place of the trace means as an initial position, unauthorized removal of the destruction portion is suppressed. be able to.

  Feature L6. The holding means has wall portions (wall portions 194, 195, etc.) that define an accommodation region (internal space 192) capable of accommodating at least a part of the destruction portion, and the destruction portion is disposed in the accommodation region. The gaming machine according to Feature L5, characterized in that the destruction portion is held in a state in which at least a portion is accommodated.

  According to the feature L6, since at least a part of the destruction part is accommodated in the accommodation area, access to the destruction part can be restricted. Thereby, removal of a destruction part can be controlled.

  Feature L7. The holding means is formed such that the restriction is released from the state where the removal of the destruction part is restricted by the displacement of the destruction part in the specific direction. Or the game machine as described in the characteristic L6.

  According to the feature L7, the removal restriction of the destruction part by the holding means is released by displacing the destruction part from the initial position in a specific direction. Thereby, since it becomes impossible or difficult to remove a destruction part, without destroying a trace means, the fraud which performs specific operation without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

Feature L8. The holding means includes a holding side engaging portion (claw portions 201 and 202) that engages with a monitoring target side engaging portion (receiving portion 204.205) provided on the monitoring target, and the monitoring target side By engaging the engaging portion and the holding-side engaging portion, the breaking portion is held at the initial position in a state where removal of the breaking portion is restricted,
At least one of the monitoring target side engaging portion and the holding side engaging portion is displaced to a position where the engagement is released or loosened when the breaking portion is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to Feature L7.

  According to the feature L8, the destruction portion is naturally arranged at the initial position by the engagement of the holding side engaging portion and the monitoring target side engaging portion. Thereby, the operation | work which arrange | positions a destruction part in an initial position can be performed easily.

  Further, when the destruction portion is displaced in a specific direction, at least one of the monitoring target side engagement portion and the holding side engagement portion is displaced toward the side where the engagement is released. Thereby, the restriction | limiting of the removal of a destruction part is cancelled | released and removal of a destruction part is attained.

Feature L9. The holding means abuts against the destruction part from the front side in the specific direction, thereby restricting the displacement of the destruction part in the specific direction, and when the destruction part is pressed in the specific direction. Are provided with restricting portions (engaging inclined portions 221 and 222) that are elastically deformed in a direction in which the restriction is released or relaxed
The holding side engaging part is configured to elastically deform the holding side engaging part in a direction in which the engagement with the monitoring target side engaging part is released along with elastic deformation of the restricting part. The game machine according to Feature L8, wherein the game machine is formed integrally with the game machine.

  According to the feature L9, the displacement of the destruction part in the specific direction is restricted by the restriction part. The restricting portion is elastically deformed in a direction in which the breaking portion is released or loosened by being pressed in a specific direction. As a result, the destructive portion can be displaced in a specific direction, and the holding side engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the monitoring target side engaging portion is released, and the engagement between both is released or loosened. It is done. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration in which the engagement between the holding-side engaging portion and the monitoring target-side engaging portion is released as the destruction portion is pressed in a specific direction.

  Feature L10. The amount of displacement required to displace at least one of the monitoring target side engaging portion and the holding side engaging portion to a position where the engagement is released is that the destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion is started. The gaming machine according to Feature L8 or Feature L9, which is set to be larger than a required displacement amount.

  According to the feature L10, after the destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion is started, the engagement between the holding side engagement portion and the monitoring target side engagement portion is released. Thereby, it can be avoided that the engagement is released at the stage before the destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion and the destruction portion becomes removable. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of removing the destruction part without destroying the trace means by the destruction part.

Feature L11. The destruction portion is arranged inside the installation location (the pasting base 135) where the trace means is installed as the initial position, and on the opposite side from the side where the trace means is provided with reference to the installation location. ,
The suppressor includes a sandwiching surface that sandwiches the trace means in the specific direction in cooperation with an installation location of the trace means as the intersection surface,
The opening is formed at a position on the front side in the specific direction of the destruction portion of the sandwiching surface,
The gaming machine according to Feature L3, wherein the destruction portion is formed to be displaceable outside the installation place of the trace means through the opening and on the side where the trace means is installed. .

  According to the feature L11, the trace means is destroyed by displacing the destruction part from the inside to the outside of the installation location. In this case, since the destructive part has only to be pulled outward, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released.

  In addition, since the destruction part is arranged inside the trace means, the destruction part is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and it is possible to suppress fraud to the release means such as destroying the destruction part. it can. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing the cancellation | release means can be suppressed.

  The feature L group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, for example, fraud countermeasures such as pasting a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box and leave a trace when peeled off. Is adopted. This fraud countermeasure assists the confirmation work when confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the fact that the control board has been replaced. There is.

  Here, in the game arcade, the control board may be inspected by an external engine or the like, and it may be necessary to open the board box for the inspection. In this case, in the situation where the seal seal is pasted so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies, since the opening of the substrate box is hindered by the seal seal, it is necessary to peel off the seal seal when opening the substrate box, The work becomes complicated.

  It should be noted that the above-described problem is in a gaming machine equipped with a trace means that inhibits a specific operation such as an opening operation of the board box and leaves a trace that the specific operation has been performed when the inhibition state is released. This is a common issue.

  Further, the features A1 to A43, the features B1, the features C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the features F1, the features G1, and the features H1 to H1 to the configuration of the feature L group. The configuration limited in any one of H2, the above-described features J1 to J7, and the following features M1 to M11 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature M1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If it is, the trace means (the seal seal 160 in the first embodiment) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
Release means for releasing the inhibition state by destroying the trace means (the destruction member 210 in the first embodiment);
The release means is formed to be attachable to a predetermined initial position from the outside of the installation location of the trace means, and the release means is directed to a predetermined specific direction at the initial position. Holding means (cover member 191 in the first embodiment) for holding in a displaceable state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature M1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Further, since the release means is provided, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Thereby, when performing specific operation for an inspection etc., the said specific operation can be performed suitably.

  In such a configuration, since the release means can be attached from the outside of the installation place of the trace means, the release means can be easily attached as compared to the configuration in which the release means is installed inside the installation place of the trace means. Can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability that may be caused by newly providing the release means.

Feature M2. The release means has a destruction part (cutting part 212) that comes into contact with the trace means by displacing in the specific direction from the initial position, and the trace comes into contact with the trace means when the destruction part comes into contact with the trace means. Destroys the means,
The gaming machine according to claim M1, wherein the holding means regulates the removal of the destruction part and holds the destruction part in the initial position in a state where the destruction part can be displaced in the specific direction. .

  According to the feature M2, the destruction portion is held at the initial position by the holding means in a state where the removal is restricted. Thereby, even if it is a case where the destruction part is arrange | positioned outside the installation location of a trace means, the unauthorized removal of the said destruction part can be suppressed.

  Feature M3. The holding means has wall portions (wall portions 194, 195, etc.) that define an accommodation region (internal space 192) capable of accommodating at least a part of the destruction portion, and the destruction portion is disposed in the accommodation region. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the destruction unit is held in a state in which at least a part thereof is accommodated.

  According to the feature M3, since at least a part of the destruction part is accommodated in the accommodation area, it is possible to restrict access to the destruction part. Thereby, removal of a destruction part can be controlled.

  Feature M4. The holding means is formed so that the restriction is released from the state where the removal of the destruction part is restricted by the displacement of the destruction part in the specific direction. Or the gaming machine described in the feature M3.

  According to the feature M4, the removal restriction of the destruction part by the holding means is released by displacing the destruction part from the initial position in a specific direction. Thereby, since it becomes impossible or difficult to remove a destruction part, without destroying a trace means, the fraud which performs specific operation without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

Feature M5. The holding means includes a holding side engaging portion (claw portions 201 and 202) that engages with a monitoring target side engaging portion (receiving portion 204.205) provided on the monitoring target, and the monitoring target side By engaging the engaging portion and the holding-side engaging portion, the breaking portion is held at the initial position in a state where removal of the breaking portion is restricted,
At least one of the monitoring target side engaging portion and the holding side engaging portion is displaced to a position where the engagement is released or loosened when the breaking portion is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to feature M4.

  According to the feature M5, when the holding side engaging portion and the monitoring target side engaging portion are engaged, the destruction portion is naturally arranged at the initial position. Thereby, the operation | work which arrange | positions a destruction part in an initial position can be performed easily.

  Further, when the destruction portion is displaced in a specific direction, at least one of the monitoring target side engagement portion and the holding side engagement portion is displaced toward the side where the engagement is released. Thereby, the restriction | limiting of the removal of a destruction part is cancelled | released and removal of a destruction part is attained.

Feature M6. The holding means abuts against the destruction part from the front side in the specific direction, thereby restricting the displacement of the destruction part in the specific direction, and when the destruction part is pressed in the specific direction. Are provided with restricting portions (engaging inclined portions 221 and 222) that are elastically deformed in a direction in which the restriction is released or loosened.
The holding side engaging part is configured to elastically deform the holding side engaging part in a direction in which the engagement with the monitoring target side engaging part is released along with elastic deformation of the restricting part. The game machine according to feature M5, wherein the game machine is formed integrally with the game machine.

  According to the feature M6, the displacement of the destruction part in the specific direction is restricted by the restriction part. The restricting portion is elastically deformed in a direction in which the breaking portion is released or loosened by being pressed in a specific direction. As a result, the destructive portion can be displaced in a specific direction, and the holding side engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the monitoring target side engaging portion is released, and the engagement between both is released or loosened. It is done. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the engagement between the holding-side engagement portion and the monitoring target-side engagement portion is released with relative ease by pressing the destruction portion in a specific direction.

  Feature M7. The amount of displacement required to displace at least one of the monitoring target side engaging portion and the holding side engaging portion to the position where the engagement is released is that the destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion is started. The gaming machine according to Feature M5 or Feature M6, wherein the gaming machine is set to be larger than a displacement amount required for.

  According to the feature M7, after the destruction of the trace means by the destruction part is started, the engagement between the holding side engagement part and the monitoring target side engagement part is released. Thereby, it can be avoided that the engagement is released at the stage before the destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion and the destruction portion becomes removable. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of removing the destruction part without destroying the trace means by the destruction part.

Feature M8. The release means is
A destruction part (cutting part 212) that pushes at least a part of the trace means in the specific direction by displacing from the initial position in the specific direction, destroys the trace means and releases the inhibition state;
At least in a situation where the trace means is pushed by the destruction portion, the contact with the trace means from a direction opposite to the specific direction, and the pushed portion escapes in the specific direction when breaking by the destruction portion A suppressor (paste base 135) for suppressing this,
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M7, comprising:

  According to the feature M8, when the release means is displaced in the specific direction from the initial position, the trace means is pushed in the specific direction by the destruction unit, and the trace means is destroyed. In this case, the restraining part comes into contact with the trace means from the direction opposite to the specific direction, and the part pushed by the destruction part is difficult to escape in the specific direction, so the force related to the destruction is applied to the trace means. It becomes possible to give suitably. Thereby, destruction of a trace means can be performed easily and cancellation | release of the inhibition state of a trace means can be performed easily. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

Feature M9. The trace means is formed in a sheet shape,
The release means is
A destruction part (cutting part 212) that pushes at least a part of the trace means in the specific direction by displacing from the initial position in the specific direction, destroys the trace means and releases the inhibition state;
At least in a situation where the trace means is pressed by the destruction portion, the contact is made with the trace means from a direction opposite to the specific direction, and the pressed portion is bent in the specific direction at the time of destruction by the destruction portion. A restraining part (affixing base 135) that suppresses running away,
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M7, comprising:

  According to the feature M9, since the trace means is formed in a sheet shape, the trace means can be installed relatively easily and the space occupied by the trace means can be reduced.

  Here, when the release means is displaced in the specific direction from the initial position, the trace means is pushed in the specific direction by the destruction portion, and the trace means is destroyed. In this case, the restraining part abuts against the trace means from the direction opposite to the specific direction, and the portion pressed by the breaking part is restrained from bending and escaping in the specific direction. It becomes possible to give suitably to a means. Thereby, destruction of a trace means can be performed easily and cancellation | release of the inhibition state of a trace means can be performed easily. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

Feature M10. The suppressor is
The breaking portion is formed so as to be able to enter, and an opening (boundary 140) disposed on the front side in the specific direction with respect to the breaking portion,
An intersection surface (side surface region 139) provided so as to sandwich the opening, and intersecting the specific direction;
With
The trace means is in contact with the intersecting surface so as to cover or straddle the opening,
When the destruction portion is displaced in the specific direction, the destruction portion breaks the region covering the opening portion or the region straddling the opening portion by entering the opening portion, and releases the inhibition state. The gaming machine described in the feature M8 or the feature M9.

  According to the feature M10, when the destruction portion is displaced in a specific direction, the destruction portion enters the opening. In this case, the region that covers or straddles the opening in the trace means is caused by the destruction portion and the crossing surface, and the region is sheared. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

Feature M11. In the installation place of the trace means, the opening is formed so as to be exposed on the surface thereof, and the intersecting surface is formed so as to sandwich the opening.
The trace means is installed from the outside with respect to the installation location of the trace means, so as to cover or straddle the opening and is in contact with the intersecting surface,
When the destructive portion is displaced in the specific direction, the position of the trace means that touches the location covering or straddles the opening and the position where the trace portion enters the opening due to the destruction of the trace means is The gaming machine according to Feature M10, wherein the gaming machine is provided at an initial position.

  According to the feature M11, when the destructive part is displaced in a specific direction, the destructive part comes into contact with a place covering or straddling the opening provided in the installation place of the trace means. In this case, the installation location of the trace means functions as a suppression unit that suppresses the escape of the destruction unit in a specific direction. Thereby, simplification of a structure can be achieved.

  The feature M group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, for example, fraud countermeasures such as pasting a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box and leave a trace when peeled off. Is adopted. This fraud countermeasure assists the confirmation work when confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the fact that the control board has been replaced. There is.

  Here, in the game arcade, the control board may be inspected by an external engine or the like, and it may be necessary to open the board box for the inspection. In this case, in the situation where the seal seal is pasted so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies, since the opening of the substrate box is hindered by the seal seal, it is necessary to peel off the seal seal when opening the substrate box, The work becomes complicated.

  It should be noted that the above-described problem is in a gaming machine equipped with a trace means that inhibits a specific operation such as an opening operation of the board box and leaves a trace that the specific operation has been performed when the inhibition state is released. This is a common issue.

  Further, with respect to the configuration of the feature M group, the features A1 to A43, the feature B1, the feature C1, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E15, the feature F1, the feature G1, and the features H1 to H1. You may apply the structure limited in any one of H2, the said characteristics J1 thru | or J7, and the said characteristics L1 thru | or L11. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 63 ... Main control apparatus as monitoring object, 101 ... Main control board, 102 ... Board box, 111 ... Front side structure, 112 ... Back side structure, 133 ... Front side fixed base part, 134 ... Back side fixed base Part, 136 ... sticking area, 139 ... side face area, 140 ... border, 141 ... front side sticking plate part, 144 ... back side sticking plate part, 145 ... pedestal part, 151 ... screw hole, 152 ... through hole, 160 ... sealing Seal, 161 ... Base sheet, 163 ... IC tag, 171 ... IC chip constituting storage unit or control unit, 172 ... Antenna member, 173 ... Slit as impossible state generating unit, 176 ... Notch for antenna as easy-to-cut unit , 180 ... enclosure, 191 ... cover member, 192 ... internal space, 194, 195 ... wall, 201, 202 ... claw, 204, 205 ... receiving part, DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Breaking member, 211 ... Breaking base part, 212 ... Cutting part, 212a, 212b ... Inclined surface, 213 ... Operation member, 221, 222 ... Inclining part for engagement, 242 ... First cutting part, 243 ... Second cutting 306 ... boundary, 311 ... member for destruction, 312 ... destruction member, 331 ... cover member, 401 ... member for destruction, 411 ... cover member, 432, 433 ... slit, 501 ... member for destruction, 511 ... cover member 531 ... engaging member, 601 ... shaft portion, 602 ... bearing hole, 611 ... cover member, 701 ... member for destruction, 704 ... second arm portion, 711 ... shaft portion, 712 ... receiving portion, 721 ... cover member, 741 ... First hook part, 752 ... Second hook part, 753 ... Projection, 808 ... Expansion area, 809 ... Boundary, 810 ... Destruction member, 8111 ... Destruction base part, 814 ... Extension part 815 ... Breaking part, 821, 822 ... Restricting convex part, 825 ... First inclined surface, 826 ... Second inclined surface, 841 ... Tapered region, 844 ... Sealing seal, 850 ... Enclosing part, 851 ... Cutting edge, 852 ... 1st inclined part, 853 ... 2nd inclined part, 854 ... saw part, 861 ... cover member, 862 ... internal space, 866, 867 ... claw part, 868, 869 ... receiving part, 871 ... recessed part for engagement.

Claims (1)

A substrate box formed by combining a plurality of structural bodies and containing a control substrate;
Trace means provided in the substrate box;
Cover means provided to face at least part of the trace means and cover the trace means;
A dividing means disposed inside the cover means and interlocking with the removal of the cover means,
When the cover means is moved in the removal direction, the dividing means moves with the movement of the cover means, and the trace means is divided into a plurality of parts until the cover means is removed. A gaming machine capable of opening an internal space,
A first engagement portion provided in the dividing means;
A second engagement portion provided on the cover means and engaged with a first engagement portion of the dividing means;
A third engagement portion provided inside the cover means and engaged with the substrate box;
With
A gaming machine, wherein an engagement portion between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is covered with the cover means.

Images